owner´s manual · 2020. 7. 14. · table of contents. 1 vehicle owner 5 about the owner's...

OWNER´S MANUALŠKODA SCALA

Your Owner’s Manual

Digital version available on the Internet

http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals

ŠKODA SCALA 07.2020Angličtina/English

657012720AD



Documentation of vehicle deliveryVehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Date of vehicle delivery ________ / ________ / ________________ ŠKODA Partner

Stamp and signature of the vendor

I confirm that I have taken delivery of the vehicle in good condition, have received information on how tooperate it correctly, and have had the terms of the warranty explained to me.

Signature of the customer

Does the vehicle have an extended warranty?

YES

NO

Limitations of the ŠKODA extended warrantya)

_______________

or

_______________

or

_______________a) Depending on which comes first.

Years:

km:

Miles:

Reprinting, reproduction, translation or use in any other way, either in whole or in part, is not permitted with-out the written consent of ŠKODA AUTO a.s..

ŠKODA AUTO a.s. expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.

Subject to change.

Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.

© ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2020657012720AD

Vehicle owner

First Vehicle owner Second Vehicle ownerThis vehicle with the registration plate __________________________________________belongs to:Title, name/company: __________________________________________ __________________________________________Address: __________________________________________ __________________________________________ __________________________________________Telephone: __________________________________________ ŠKODA Partner: Service consultant: __________________________________________Telephone: __________________________________________

This vehicle with the registration plate __________________________________________belongs to:Title, name/company: __________________________________________ __________________________________________Address: __________________________________________ __________________________________________ __________________________________________Telephone: __________________________________________ ŠKODA Partner: Service consultant: __________________________________________Telephone: __________________________________________

1Vehicle owner

657012720AD

Table of Contents

1 Vehicle owner

5 About the Owner's Manual

5 About the Owner's Manual

6 Explanations

6 Digital Instructions in VehicleInfotainment

6 Application Quick Start Guide

7 Vehicle overviews7 Front vehicle area9 Rear vehicle area10 Driver's seat10 Centre console and passenger seat11 Engine compartment11 Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering

wheel

12 Warning lights12 Functionality12 Warning lights overview14 Indicator lights overview

17 Correct and safe17 Introductory information on correct use17 New vehicle or new parts17 Regular checks17 No improper vehicle adjustments17 Keeping sensors and cameras in working

order18 Engine compartment18 Vehicle battery18 Using electrical sockets in the vehicle18 Before your journey20 Safe driving21 Emergency call22 After an accident

23 Keys, locks and alarm system23 Key23 Central locking25 Keyless locking (KESSY)26 Alarm system

27 Doors, windows and boot lid27 Doors27 Child safety lock on the rear doors27 Window - with manual operation27 Window - with electrical operation28 Sunblind - with electrical operation29 Sun visors29 Boot lid - with manual operation29 Boot lid - with electrical control30 Unlocking the boot lid

31 Seats, steering wheel and mirror31 Front seat - with manual operation31 Front seat - with electrical operation31 Rear seats32 Parking position of the rear seat belts32 Headrests32 Front armrest33 Rear armrest33 Steering wheel33 Interior rear-view mirror34 Wing mirror

35 Restraint systems and airbags35 Seat belts36 Child seat37 Fasteners for child seats40 Airbags41 Key switch for the front passenger airbag

42 Lighting, windscreen wipers andwashers

42 Exterior lighting44 COMING HOME, LEAVING HOME exterior

lighting44 Light Assist high-beam assist system45 Replace light bulbs47 Interior lighting48 Interior ambient light48 Windscreen wipers and washers

50 Heating and air conditioning system50 Heating50 Manual air conditioning51 Climatronic automatic air conditioning system52 Heated windscreen53 Seat heating53 Heated steering wheel

54 Driver information system54 Analogue instrument cluster55 Digital instrument cluster56 Driving data58 Speed limit warning58 Vehicle status

59 Infotainment Swing59 Infotainment overview59 System60 Screen60 Infotainment keyboard61 Control centre61 Radio64 Media67 Mobile device management68 Telephone70 Wi-Fi71 SmartLink

73 Infotainment Bolero73 Infotainment overview

2 Table of Contents

73 System74 Screen75 Infotainment keyboard76 Control centre76 Radio79 Media81 Mobile device management82 Telephone85 Wi-Fi85 SmartLink

88 Infotainment Amundsen88 Infotainment overview88 System89 Screen90 Infotainment keyboard91 Voice control92 Control centre92 Radio96 Media100 Images101 Mobile device management102 Telephone105 Wi-Fi107 SmartLink109 Navigation

113 Online Services113 ŠKODA Connect114 User registration and activation of the ŠKODA

Connect services115 Setting personal data protection116 User management117 Personalisation118 Management of online services118 eSIM data connection119 Online System Update120 Shop120 Information call121 Breakdown call121 Service schedules121 Vehicle status report121 Remote access to the vehicle

122 Starting and driving122 Starting with the key123 Start at the push of a button123 Starting issues124 START STOP124 Manual gearbox125 Automatic gearbox126 Vehicle driving mode127 Economical driving style127 Towing a trailer128 Towing eye and towing procedure129 Brakes130 Handbrake

130 Driver assist systems130 Braking and stabilising systems

131 Front Assist132 Pedestrian detection system132 Speed limiter133 Cruise control system134 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)136 Lane Assist137 Lane change assist system Side Assist138 Traffic sign recognition139 Crew Protect Assist proactive occupant

protection139 Driver Alert fatigue detection assistant

140 Park Assist systems140 Park Pilot parking aid141 Rear view camera141 Rear Traffic Alert142 Park steering assistant

144 Engine, exhaust system and fuel144 Bonnet144 Engine oil145 Coolant146 Engine electronics146 Particle filter147 Exhaust control system147 Fuel filter147 Radiator blinds147 Fuel filler flap147 AdBlue148 Petrol150 Diesel151 CNG (compressed natural gas)

153 Vehicle battery and fuses153 Vehicle battery154 Using the jump-starting cable155 Fuses155 Fuses in the dash panel156 Fuses in the engine compartment

157 Wheels157 Tyres and rims158 All-season or winter tires159 Snow chains159 Spare and emergency spare wheel160 Changing the wheel and raising the vehicle161 Breakdown kit162 Tyre pressure163 Tyre pressure monitor163 Wheel bolt cover caps163 Full wheel frame

164 Storage space and interior equipment164 Equipment in the boot165 Emergency equipment165 Storage compartment for the reflective vest165 Fasteners in the boot166 Bag hooks in the boot167 Cargoelements in the luggage compartment167 Storage net

3Table of Contents

167 Hook on the eyelet of the TOP TETHERsystem

167 Fastening nets167 Storage pocket168 Net partition168 Double-sided floor covering168 Rigid boot cover169 Variable loading floor in the boot169 Overview of passenger compartment170 Parking ticket holder170 Bottle tray in the storage compartment of the

front door171 Bottle tray in the storage compartment of the

rear door171 USBConnections172 Hook on the middle body pillar172 Glasses compartment172 Card holder on the armrest172 Storage compartment under the front seat172 Storage compartment for an umbrella173 Phonebox173 Cup holder174 Multimedia holder174 Waste container174 Ashtray and cigarette lighter174 Folding table175 12-Volt power socket

175 Roof rack and hitch175 Roof rack175 Swivelling hitch

178 Maintaining and cleaning178 Service events178 Service work, adjustments and technical

changes179 Interior180 Exterior181 Ice scraper on the fuel filler flap

182 Technical data and specifications182 Requirements for the technical data182 Vehicle identification data182 Maximum permissible weights183 Operating weight183 Vehicle dimensions183 Engine specifications185 Accident data recorder186 Personal data186 Information about the radio systems in the

vehicle187 Rights arising from defective performance,

ŠKODA warranties

189 Index

4 Table of Contents

About the Owner's Manual

General pointsThis Owner's Manual applies to all chassis variantsof the vehicle, including all models and trim levels.

All possible trim levels are described here withoutidentifying them as special trims, model variants ormarket-dependent equipment. This means that notall the trim components described in this Owner'sManual are available in your vehicle.

The images in this Owner’s Manual are for illustra-tive purposes only. The images may differ from yourvehicle; these are for general information purposesonly.

ŠKODA AUTO is constantly working on the furtherdevelopment of all vehicles. It is therefore possiblefor changes to be made at any time to the scope ofdelivery in terms of shape, equipment and technolo-gy. The information contained in this Owner's Man-ual corresponds to the information available at thetime of going to press.

No legal claims can therefore be derived from thetechnical data, illustrations and information in thisOwner’s Manual.

Digital version of the Owner's ManualKeeping environmental protection in mind, the prin-ted Owner’s Manual only contains the most impor-tant information regarding vehicle operation and ve-hicle maintenance.

The digital version of the Owner's Manual includesfull information regarding vehicle operation.

The digital version is available at the following loca-tions.

▶ On the ŠKODA internet pages.▶ In the mobile application - MyŠKODA.▶ In the Infotainment Amundsen.


Digital version of the Owner's Manual in Infotain-mentApplies to Infotainment Amundsen.

The digital version of the Owner's Manual can beviewed in the Infotainment under the menu .

About the Owner's Manual

GeneralThis Owner's Manual applies to all chassis variantsof the vehicle, including all models and trim levels.

All possible trim levels are described here withoutidentifying them as special trims, model variants ormarket-dependent equipment. This means that notall the trim components described in this Owner'sManual are available in your vehicle.

The images in this Owner’s Manual are for illustra-tive purposes only. The images may differ from yourvehicle; these are for general information purposesonly.

ŠKODA AUTO is constantly working on the furtherdevelopment of all vehicles. It is therefore possiblefor changes to be made at any time to the scope ofdelivery in terms of shape, equipment and technolo-gy. The information contained in this Owner's Man-ual corresponds to the information available at thetime of going to press.

No legal claims can therefore be derived from thetechnical data, illustrations and information in thisOwner’s Manual.

5About the Owner's Manual



Explanations

Terms used- A workshop that carries out

specialist service tasks for ŠKODA vehicles. Aspecialist can be a ŠKODA Partner, a ŠKODAService Partner, or an independent workshop.

- A workshop that hasbeen contractually authorised by ŠKODA AUTOor its distribution partner to perform servicework on ŠKODA vehicles and to sell ŠKODAGenuine Parts.

- A company that has been con-tractually authorised by ŠKODA AUTO or its dis-tribution partner to sell new ŠKODA vehiclesand, when applicable, to service them usingŠKODA Genuine Parts and sell ŠKODA GenuineParts.

Text notes- short press (e.g. a button) within 1 second

- long press (e.g. a button) for more than 1second

Direction indicationsAll direction indications, such as “left”, “right”,“front”, “rear”, relate to the forwards direction oftravel of the vehicle.

DANGERTexts with this symbol indicate dangerous situationswhich, if the safety instructions are not observed,will result in death or serious injury.

WARNINGTexts with this symbol indicate dangerous situationswhich, if the safety instructions are not observed,could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTIONTexts marked with this symbol indicate dangeroussituations which, if the safety instructions are notobserved, could result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICETexts with this symbol indicate situations which, ifthe corresponding instructions are not observed, willresult in damage to the vehicle.

Texts with this symbol contain additional informa-tion.

“Specialist garage”

“ŠKODA Service Partner”

“ŠKODA Partner”

“Press”“Hold”

Digital Instructions in VehicleInfotainment

Application Quick Start Guide

Interactive imagesIn pictures with the exterior and the interior of thevehicle, there are touch points. Tapping a touch pointdisplays a menu with topics or a detailed image.

SymbolsInformation about symbols that can be shown on theinstrument cluster display. By tapping the symbol, adetailed description is displayed.

TopicsInstruction content, sorted by topic.

Top bar of the topic displayed

A Title of the topic

B Type of information displayed / display menuwith information

C Text search

About the instructionsLanguage selection for instructions and updates.

6 Explanations

Vehicle overviews

Front vehicle area

A Under the windscreen:▶ Camera for assist systems.▶ Light sensor for automatic driving light circuit » page 42.▶ Rain sensor for automatic wiping » page 48.

B Windscreen - Heating » page 53.

C Wiper - Operation » page 48.

D Bonnet release lever (under the flap) » page 144.

E Headlight cleaning system » page 48.

F Cover for the holder for the screw-in towing eye » page 128.

G Ultrasonic sensors for assist systems.

H Front radar sensor for assist systems.

I Fog lights - Operation » page 42.

J Wheels:▶ Tyres and rims » page 157.▶ Changing the wheel and raising the vehicle » page 160.▶ Breakdown set » page 161.▶ Tyre pressure » page 162.▶ Tyre control display » page 163.

K Headlights:▶ Operation » page 42.▶ High-beam assistant Light Assist » page 44.▶ Replacing the bulb » page 45.

L Door handles:▶ Opening the door » page 27.▶ Keyless entry (KESSY) » page 25.

M Outer mirror - Operation » page 34.

7Vehicle overviews › Front vehicle area

N Side door windows - Operation » page 28.

› Keep the sensors and cameras for the assist systems clean » page 17.

8 Vehicle overviews › Front vehicle area

Rear vehicle area

A Rear window - Heating » page 53.

B Rear window wiper and washer - Operation » page 48.

C Luggage compartment lid handle:▶ Flap with manual operation » page 29.▶ Flap with electrical operation » page 29.▶ Camera for assist systems.

D Tail lights:▶ Operation » page 42.▶ Replacing the bulb » page 45.

E Radar sensors for assist systems (in the bumper).

F Ultrasonic sensors for assist systems.

G Swivelling hitch » page 175.

H Cover for the holder for the screw-in towing eye » page 128.

I Fuel filler flap:▶ Open » page 147.▶ Label with tyre pressure values » page 162.▶ Label with prescribed fuel.▶ Ice scraper.▶ Filler neck of the AdBlue®tank » page 147.▶ CNG filler neck » page 151.

› Keep the sensors and cameras for the assist systems clean » page 17.

9Vehicle overviews › Rear vehicle area

Driver's seat

A Indicator light of the lane change assistant SideAssist » page 137.

B Door opening lever » page 27.

C Light switch » page 42.

D Air outlet nozzle.

E Operating lever:▶ Turn signal and main beam » page 42.▶ Cruise control » page 134.▶ Speed limiter » page 132.▶ High beam assistant » page 45.

F Buttons/dials on the multifunction steeringwheel » page 11.

G Depending on the equipment:▶ Analogue instrument cluster » page 54.▶ Digital instrument cluster » page 55.

H Operating lever:▶ Windshield wipers and washers » page 48.▶ Information system » page 54.

I Depending on the equipment:▶ Ignition lock » page 122.▶ Starter button » page 123.

J Steering wheel with horn/with driver's front air-bag » page 40.

K Safety lever for steering wheel adjust-ment » page 33.

L Operating the automatic distance con-trol » page 135.

M Unlocking the engine compartmentlid » page 144.

N Button for the electric luggage compartmentlid » page 29.

O Operating the exterior mirror » page 34.

P Operating the windows » page 28.

Centre console and passenger seat

A Infotainment (depending on trim level):▶ Amundsen » page 88.▶ Bolero » page 73.▶ Swing » page 59.

B Central locking button » page 24.

C Button for the hazard warning sys-tem » page 42.

D Air outlet nozzle.

E Door opening lever » page 27.

F Indicator light of the lane change assistant SideAssist » page 137.

G Window operation in the passengerdoor » page 28.

H Operation (depending on the trim level):▶ Heating » page 50.▶ Manual air conditioning » page 51.▶ Climatronic » page 51.

I Buttons (depending on the equipment):▶ START-STOP » page 124.▶ Parking assist » page 140.▶ Parking assistant » page 142.▶ Selection of travel mode » page 126.

J Parking brake » page 130.

K Depending on the equipment:▶ Shift lever (manual transmission) » page 124.▶ Selector lever (automatic transmis-

sion) » page 125.

10 Vehicle overviews › Driver's seat

Engine compartment

A Coolant expansion tank » page 145.

B Engine oil dipstick » page 144.

C Engine oil filler opening » page 144.

D Brake fluid reservoir » page 129.

E Vehicle battery » page 153.

F Fuse box » page 156.

G Washer fluid reservoir » page 49.

Buttons/dials on the multifunctionsteering wheel

Switch voice control on / off.

Steering wheel heating » page 53.

A Rotate - Adjust Volume.Press – Switch sound off/on.

Switch to the next track/station.

Switch to the previous track/station.

Show menu of assistance systems.

No function.

B Depending on the equipment:▶ Operate analogue instrument clus-

ter » page 54.▶ Operate digital instrument cluster » page 55.

Depending on the equipment:

▶ Operate analogue instrument clus-ter » page 54.

▶ Operate digital instrument cluster » page 55.

Depending on the equipment:▶ Operate analogue instrument clus-

ter » page 54.▶ Operate digital instrument cluster » page 55.

11Vehicle overviews › Engine compartment

Warning lights

Functionality

WARNINGDisregarding the lighting up of the warning lights andthe associated messages on the display of the instru-ment cluster can lead to accidents, serious injuries ordamage to the vehicle.

The warning lights in the instrument cluster indicatecertain functions or faults.

The illumination of some of the indicator lights maybe accompanied by acoustic signals and messages inthe instrument cluster display.

Additional indicator lightsDepending on the meaning, the additional indicatorlight will also light up in the display along with someof the indicator lights.

- Hazard

- Warning

Warning lights overview

After switching on the ignition, some indicator lightslight up briefly as a function test of the vehicle sys-tems. If the tested systems are in order, the respec-tive indicator lights go out a few seconds after theignition is switched on or after the engine has beenstarted.

For further details » page 12, Functionality.

Symbol Meaning

Indicates a warning together withanother warning light » page 12.

Unfastened seat belts at the frontand rear » page 35.

Vehicle battery is not charg-ing » page 153.

Along with - Enginefault » page 146, » page 153.

Engine oil pressure toolow » page 145.

Engine oil level too low » page 145.

Coolant level is too low » page 146.

Coolant temperature toohigh » page 146.

Brake fluid level is toolow » page 130.

Together with - Brake system andABS faulty » page 131.

Symbol Meaning

Parking brake on » page 130.

Illuminates - Power assisted steeringfaulty » page 33.

Flashing - Steering lock faul-ty » page 33.

Automatic gearbox im-paired » page 126.

Automatic gearbox overhea-ted » page 126.

AdBlue®level too low » page 148.

AdBlue®system impaired » page 148.

Warning if there is a risk of a colli-sion » page 131.

ACC does not decelerate sufficient-ly » page 135.

Indicates a warning along with an-other warning light » page 12.

The fuel supply has reached the re-serve area. » page 149, » page 150.

Windscreen washer fluid level toolow » page 49.

Bulb faulty » page 44.

Rear fog light switchedon » page 43.

Engine oil level too high or engine oillevel sensor impaired » page 145.

Clogged particle filter » page 146.

ABS faulty » page 131.



Water in the diesel fuel fil-ter » page 147.



12 Warning lights › Functionality

Symbol Meaning

Tyre pressure control system faul-ty » page 163.

Tyre pressurechange » page 158, » page 163.


Flashing - Steering lock not un-locked » page 33.


KESSY - starting prob-lem » page 123.

KESSY - no key found » page 26.

Shock absorber faulty » page 127.

Petrol engine control faul-ty » page 146.

Emission control system faul-ty » page 147.

illuminates, if relevant, does not illu-minate after switching on the igni-tion - Diesel preheating system faul-ty » page 146.

Flashing - Diesel engine control faul-ty » page 146.

Flashes together with - Keyswitch for airbag deactivation faul-ty » page 41.

Front passenger airbag switchedoff » page 41.

Front passenger airbag switchedon » page 41.

Airbag system faulty » page 41.

Crew Protect Assist faul-ty » page 139.

Illuminates for 4 seconds and thenflashes - Airbag or belt tensioner de-activated with diagnostic de-vice » page 40.

Ball rod not locked » page 176.

ASR deactivated » page 131.

Illuminates - ESC or ASR faul-ty » page 131.

Flashing - ESC or ASR is engag-ed » page 130.

Symbol Meaning

Front Assist deactiva-ted » page 132, » page 132.

ACC not available » page 136.

Lane Assist intervenes » page 136.


Turn signal light,left » page 42, » page 44.

Rear seat belt fastened » page 35.

Turn signal light,right » page 42, » page 44.

Trailer turn signal light » page 44.

Front fog lights switchedon » page 43.

The selector lever islocked » page 125.

Natural gas operation » page 151.

Lane Assist is activated and ready tointervene » page 136.


ACC controls the drivingspeed » page 134.


The cruise control system controlsthe driving speed » page 134.

Speed limiter controls the drivingspeed » page 132.

Low outside temperature » page 20.

High beam or flasher activa-ted » page 42.

Unoccupied rear seat » page 35.

Rear seat belt not fas-tened » page 35.

A rear seat belt is not fas-tened » page 35.

A rear seat belt is fas-tened » page 35.

13Warning lights › Warning lights overview

Symbol Meaning


High beam Assist System switchedon » page 45.

No light is switched on » page 42.


AdBlue®system impaired. » page 148.


Service event » page 178.

Natural gas system test » page 151.

Engine was switched off automati-cally by START-STOP » page 124.

Engine was not automaticallyswitched off via START-STOP » page 124.

Speed limiter faulty » page 133.

Speed limiter activated » page 132.


ACC activated » page 134.

Cruise control system faul-ty » page 134.

Cruise control activated » page 134.


Front Assist is started » page 131.

Safety distance too small » page 131.

Consumption-friendly driv-ing » page 127.

Break recommendation » page 139.

Driving mode Normal » page 126.

Driving mode Eco » page 126.

Driving mode Individual » page 126.

Symbol Meaning

Driving mode Sport » page 126.

Indicator lights overview

After switching on the ignition, some indicator lightslight up briefly as a function test of the vehicle sys-tems. If the tested systems are in order, the respec-tive indicator lights go out a few seconds after theignition is switched on or after the engine has beenstarted.

Symbol Meaning

Indicates a warning together withanother warning light » page 12.

Unfastened seat belts at the frontand rear » page 35.

Vehicle battery is not charg-ing » page 153.

Along with - Enginefault » page 146, » page 153.

Engine oil pressure toolow » page 145.

Engine oil level too low » page 145.

Coolant level is too low » page 146.

Coolant temperature toohigh » page 146.

Brake fluid level is toolow » page 130.

Together with - Brake system andABS faulty » page 131.

Parking brake on » page 130.







Warning if there is a risk of a colli-sion » page 131.

14 Warning lights › Indicator lights overview

Symbol Meaning

ACC does not decelerate sufficient-ly » page 135.

Indicates a warning along with an-other warning light » page 12.

The fuel supply has reached the re-serve area. » page 149, » page 150.

Windscreen washer fluid level toolow » page 49.

Bulb faulty » page 44.

Rear fog light switchedon » page 43.

Engine oil level too high or engine oillevel sensor impaired » page 145.

Clogged particle filter » page 146.

ABS faulty » page 131.



Water in the diesel fuel fil-ter » page 147.



Tyre pressure control system faul-ty » page 163.

Tyre pressurechange » page 158, » page 163.


Flashing - Steering lock not un-locked » page 33.


KESSY - starting prob-lem » page 123.

KESSY - no key found » page 26.


Petrol engine control faul-ty » page 146.

Symbol Meaning

Emission control system faul-ty » page 147.

illuminates, if relevant, does not illu-minate after switching on the igni-tion - Diesel preheating system faul-ty » page 146.

Flashing - Diesel engine control faul-ty » page 146.

Flashes together with - Keyswitch for airbag deactivation faul-ty » page 41.

Front passenger airbag switchedoff » page 41.

Front passenger airbag switchedon » page 41.

Airbag system faulty » page 41.

Crew Protect Assist faul-ty » page 139.

Illuminates for 4 seconds and thenflashes - Airbag or belt tensioner de-activated with diagnostic de-vice » page 40.

Ball rod not locked » page 176.

ASR deactivated » page 131.

Illuminates - ESC or ASR faul-ty » page 131.

Flashing - ESC or ASR is engag-ed » page 130.





Turn signal light,left » page 42, » page 44.

Rear seat belt fastened » page 35.

Turn signal light,right » page 42, » page 44.

Trailer turn signal light » page 44.

15Warning lights › Indicator lights overview

Symbol Meaning

Front fog lights switchedon » page 43.

The selector lever islocked » page 125.

Natural gas operation » page 151.





The cruise control system controlsthe driving speed » page 134.

Speed limiter controls the drivingspeed » page 132.

Low outside tempera-ture » page 20.

High beam or flasher activa-ted » page 42.

Unoccupied rear seat » page 35.

Rear seat belt not fas-tened » page 35.

A rear seat belt is not fas-tened » page 35.



High beam Assist System switchedon » page 45.

No light is switched on » page 42.


AdBlue®system impaired. » page 148.


Service event » page 178.

Natural gas system test » page 151.

Engine was switched off automati-cally by START-STOP » page 124.

Symbol Meaning

Engine was not automaticallyswitched off via START-STOP » page 124.

Speed limiter faulty » page 133.

Speed limiter activated » page 132.


ACC activated » page 134.

Cruise control system faul-ty » page 134.

Cruise control activated » page 134.


Front Assist is started » page 131.

Safety distance too small » page 131.

Consumption-friendly driv-ing » page 127.

Break recommendation » page 139.

Driving mode Normal » page 126.

Driving mode Eco » page 126.

Driving mode Individual » page 126.

Driving mode Sport » page 126.

16 Warning lights › Indicator lights overview

Correct and safe

Introductory information on correct use

▶ Read this Owner's Manual carefully, as proceedingin accordance with this manual is a prerequisite forthe correct use of the vehicle. This Owner's Manualshould therefore always be in the vehicle.

▶ When using the vehicle, the generally binding legalprovisions that are specific to the country must beobserved. Such as those for transporting children,switching off airbags, using tyres, road traffic andthe like.

▶ Do not exceed the maximum permissible weightsand loads.

▶ Do not exceed the maximum permissible roof load.▶ Use the specified fuel and operating fluids.▶ Drive on roads that correspond to the technical ve-

hicle parameters. Obstacles that exceed theground clearance of the vehicle can damage thevehicle when driving over them.

▶ Care must be taken during operations related tooperation, maintenance and self-help to avoiddamage to the vehicle or injury. If necessary, seekthe help of a specialist company.

▶ All work on the vehicle’s safety systems e.g. on theseatbelts or the airbag system, may only be carriedout by a specialist garage.

▶ When using the accessories, observe the instruc-tions in the operating instructions of the accesso-ries manufacturer. These include child seats, roofracks, compressors etc.

▶ Observe the service intervals.

New vehicle or new parts

New vehicle - Running in the engineDriving style during the first 1500 km determines thequality of the engine run-in process.

▶ During the first 1000 km, rev the engine to max.3/4 of the highest permissible engine speed andavoid using a trailer.

▶ Over the next 500 km, the engine speed can beslowly increased.

Depending on driving style and operating conditions,the engine consumes some oil, up to 0.5 l/1000 km.Consumption may be higher over the next 5000 km.

New brake padsNew brake pads do not provide the optimum brakingeffect during the first 200 km, they have to be wornin first. Therefore, drive very carefully.

New tyresNew tyres do not have optimum grip for the first500 km. Therefore, drive very carefully.

Regular checks

What should be taken into account before driving?A vehicle with technical defects can increase the riskof accidents and injuries.

Eliminate any defects before driving. If required,seek the help of a specialised garage.

Pay special attention to the following points.

▶ Is the tyre undamaged?▶ Is the tyre tread sufficient?▶ Is the tyre pressure sufficient?▶ Do the headlamps, brake and turn signals work?▶ Is the windscreen in good condition?▶ Is the engine oil, brake fluid and coolant level OK?▶ Is the air intake in the engine compartment free

from obstruction?▶ Are the air outlet nozzles or air intake in front of

the windscreen free from obstruction?▶ Are the windscreen wiper and washer system and

windscreen wiper blades functional?▶ Is the windscreen washer fluid level sufficient?▶ Are the windscreen wiper blades in good condi-

tion?▶ Are all seatbelt system components in good work-

ing order? Are the seatbelts clean and have thebuckles been unclogged?

▶ Is the spoiler working properly?▶ Are parts and components of the vehicle still visi-

bly attached?▶ Are there no oil stains or other operating fluids un-

der the vehicle?

No improper vehicle adjustments

Improper modifications can cause interference andaffect safety-related functions and other functionsof the vehicle.

▶ Adjustments and technical modifications to the ve-hicle should only be carried out by a specialist ga-rage.

▶ Do not cover the engine with additional insulationmaterials, e.g. a blanket.

Keeping sensors and cameras in workingorder

Some functions of your vehicle are supported bysensors and cameras inside and outside the vehicle.

The rear-mounted accessories, e.g. bike rack, mayaffect system and camera functionality.

▶ Do not cover or put a sticker over the sensors andcameras and keep them clean.

17Correct and safe › Introductory information on correct use

▶ If there is damage suspected to the sensors orcameras, seek the help of a specialist garage.

Engine compartment

Before opening the engine compartment flapRisk of scalding! Do not open the engine compart-ment flap if steam or coolant comes out of the en-gine compartment.

▶ Stop the engine and allow it to cool.▶ Remove the ignition key. On vehicles with a key-

less locking system, open the driver's door.

When working in the engine compartment▶ Keep children away from the engine compartment.▶ Do not touch the radiator fan. The radiator fan can

turn itself on, even when the ignition is off.▶ Do not touch electrical cables. Avoid short circuits

in the electrical system, especially on the vehiclebattery.

▶ Do not smoke near the vicinity of the engine andrefrain from handling open flames or sparks.

▶ If you need to work in the engine compartmentwith the engine running, be mindful of rotating en-gine parts and electrical equipment.

▶ Do not leave any objects in the engine compart-ment.

Handling operating fluidsYour vehicle needs various fuels to operate that canaffect health or the environment when they areemitted. These include fuel, oils, battery acid, coolantand brake fluid or AdBlue®.

▶ Only use operating fluids outdoors or in well-venti-lated areas. If required, wear protective equipment.

▶ Do not use or check operating fluids with the en-gine running.

▶ In the event of contact with operating fluids, washaffected areas with warm water. If required, seekmedical help.

▶ The leaked engine oil in the engine compartmentcan cause a fire, so wipe it off with a cloth.

▶ Store soiled cloths in a well-ventilated area untildisposal. Cloths with residues of engine oil can ig-nite and cause a fire.

Vehicle battery

Handling the vehicle batteryBattery acid is highly corrosive. Improper handling ofthe vehicle battery can cause an explosion, fire,chemical burns or poisoning!

▶ When handling the vehicle battery, eye and skinprotection must be worn.

▶ Do not tilt the vehicle battery, as it may leak bat-tery acid.

▶ If battery acid comes into contact with skin, washthe affected areas with water for a few minutes.Get medical help without delay.

▶ Do not charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery.Replace a frozen vehicle battery.

▶ Do not use a damaged vehicle battery.▶ Short circuit! Do not connect the battery terminals.

Using electrical sockets in the vehicle

Improper handling of sockets can lead to life-threat-ening electric shock or fire.

▶ The sockets may get hot during operation. Do nottouch hot sockets.

▶ Protect sockets from liquids.▶ If moisture gets into the socket, let the socket dry

before reusing it.▶ Do not insert any objects into the socket contacts.

Before your journey

Adults and children, cargo and objects - everythinghas its place in the vehicle. Observe the following in-structions so that all occupants are protected in thebest possible way in the event of an accident.

Before you go▶ Ensure that you have a good view of outside the

vehicle. Attach external devices (e.g. navigationsystem) so that they do not restrict the view exter-nally.

▶ Adjust the rearview mirrors.▶ Close all doors and the engine compartment and

boot flap.▶ Take up the correct sitting position, adjust the

seats correctly and fasten the seat belt properly.Ensure that passengers do likewise. Always leavethe seat belt on while driving.

▶ Only one person can be secured with a seat belt.▶ Make sure that the seat belts are not trapped, e.g.

in the door or in the seat.▶ Check seat belts, their locks and attachment points

for damage.

Sitting safelyFor the safety of the occupants and to reduce therisk of injury in the event of an accident, the follow-ing instructions must be observed.

▶ Stand the backrests upright. If the front passengerseat backrest has been folded forward, only theseat behind the driver's seat may be used for trans-porting passengers.

▶ Engage the rear seat backrests correctly.

18 Correct and safe › Engine compartment

▶ Adjust the height-adjustable headrest so that thetop of the headrest is as close as possible to thetop of the head.

▶ On the occupied rear seat, the headrest should notbe in the lower position although the upper edge ofthe headrest should be at the same height as thetop of the head.

▶ Keep your feet in the footwell.▶ Use the entire seat.▶ Do not lean forward or sit to the side.▶ Do not hold your limbs out the window.

› Adjust the driver's seatin the longitudinal di-rection so that thepedals can be fullypushed through withslightly bent legs.

› Adjust the steeringwheel in such a waythat the distance Abetween the steeringwheel and sternum is

at least 25 cm.› For vehicles with driver's knee airbag, adjust the

driver's seat longitudinally so that the distance Bfrom the legs to the dash panel in the area of theknee airbag is at least 6 cm.

› Adjust the angle of the backrest so that the steer-ing wheel can be reached at the top with your armsslightly bent.

› Move the passenger seat back as far as possible.The front passenger must maintain a minimum dis-tance of 25 cm from the dash panel.

Correct belt webbing arrangement

The webbing arrange-ment is extremely impor-tant for the seat belts tooffer the best possibleprotection.

▶ The shoulder strapmust run over the mid-dle of the shoulder,must never run overthe neck, and must liefirmly against the body

(it must not run over loose layers of clothing).▶ The lap belt part must be placed in front of the pel-

vis and fit tightly.▶ In pregnant women, the lap belt part must be as

low as possible on the pelvis, so that no pressure isexercised on the abdomen.

▶ The webbing must not be pinched or twisted andrub against sharp edges.

▶ The webbing must not pass over solid or fragileobjects in clothing, such as a key ring, etc.

▶ The tongue may only be inserted into the buckle ofthe associated seat.

▶ The webbing must be tight. Therefore, do not at-tach clamps or similar items to the webbing for ad-justing the seat belt according to body size.

Correct steering wheel position

▶ Hold the steeringwheel with both handson the outer edge inthe "9 o'clock" and "3o'clock" position. Oth-erwise, you may expe-rience serious injury tothe arms, hands andhead when deployingthe airbag.

Be mindful of the effect of the airbag systemAirbag systems can only properly protect if all occu-pants have been secured and they are in the correctseating position.

No persons, animals or objects such as cup holdersor hangers for clothes may be in the deploymentarea of the airbags » page 40.

▶ Do not cover or stick anything over the steeringwheel or the dash panel. The front airbags werenot able to deploy.

The front passenger airbag should be switched off insome situations » page 41.

Securing children properly▶ Do not carry a child on your lap, and secure the

child and yourself with a seat belt.▶ Only transport children in a suitable child

seat » page 37.

Children under 150 cm tall will not be properly pro-tected without a child seat. Children that have beeninadequately secured can be thrown through the ve-hicle in the event of an accident or a sudden ma-noeuvre. You can cause life-threatening injuries toyourself and other occupants.

If children lean forward or assume a wrong sittingposition while driving, they are more likely to be in-jured in the event of an accident. This is especiallytrue for children who are carried in the passengerseat - when the airbag system triggers, they can beseriously injured or killed!

19Correct and safe › Before your journey

A child that has been incorrectly secured in thewrong sitting position - endangered by the sideairbag

The child should not bein the deployment areaof the side airbag.

A child that has been properly secured in a childseat

There must be enoughroom between the childand the exit area of theside airbag for the sideairbag to offer the bestpossible protection.

Transporting objects safelyWhen moving heavy objects, there is a shift in em-phasis. Thus, the driving behaviour of the vehiclechanges.

▶ Adjust driving speed and driving style to thischanged driving behaviour.

Unsecured or misplaced items may be thrownaround in the event of an accident or sudden ma-noeuvre. There is a risk of serious injury and loss ofcontrol of the vehicle!

In a rear-end collision at 50 km/h unsecured objectsare thrown forward with up to 50 times their weight.A 1.5 litre water bottle is thrown with up to 75 kg.

▶ Transport objects securely.▶ Stow objects so they do not hinder the driver.

Keep the driver footwell clear.▶ Stow small items in the storage compartments.▶ Do not leave lockable storage compartments open.▶ Do not let items protrude out of the slots. This

note does not apply to bottles in bottle trays.▶ Do not place any objects on the dash panel or on

the luggage compartment cover.▶ Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of

fasteners and shelves.▶ Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compart-

ment and fasten it so it cannot slip.▶ Place heavy objects in the luggage compartment

as far forward as possible.

Safe driving

Introductory notes▶ Pay attention when you are driving! As a driver, you

are fully responsible for road safety.▶ Always adjust driving speed to the road conditions

as well as the traffic and weather conditions.

When the outside temperature is low, lights up inthe instrument cluster.

Paying attention to warning signalsThe driver information system warns you with indi-cator lights and messages in the event of any faults.

Failure to follow the warnings may increase the riskof accidents and injuries.

▶ If the vehicle issues a warning signal, then park thevehicle safely and follow the information in the in-strument cluster, and in this Owner's Manual.

Using assistance systems in a clever wayThe assistance systems are only for support and donot absolve you from your responsibility for drivingthe vehicle.

The assistance systems are subject to physical andtechnical limitations. Therefore, in certain situations,system reactions may be perceived as undesirable ordelayed.

▶ Stay alert and be ready to intervene.▶ Familiarise yourself with the assistance systems,

their limitations and operating conditions.▶ Activate, deactivate and adjust the assistance sys-

tems so that you have full control of the vehicle inany traffic situation.

Driving with a substitute spare wheel or emergen-cy wheelA substitute spare wheel or emergency wheel is onlyused to reach the nearest specialist garage.

▶ Inflate the wheel with the max. prescribed inflationpressure.

▶ Follow the instructions on the warning label on therim.

▶ Do not cover the warning sign.▶ Avoid full accelerations, strong braking and fast

cornering.▶ Do not drive with more than one mounted spare

wheel.▶ Avoid using snow chains on the temporary spare

wheel.

Driving with a loaded roof rackWhen transporting objects on the roof rack, the ve-hicle’s driving behaviour changes.

▶ Adapt your speed and driving style to this.

20 Correct and safe › Safe driving

Towing a trailerThe vehicle’s handling characteristics change with atrailer. The assistance systems may behave different-ly.

▶ Drive more slowly, excessive speed can lead to lossof control of the vehicle.

▶ Keep a larger distance from the vehicle in front.▶ Do not exceed the max. vertical load and the per-

missible trailer load.

Driving through waterThere must be no water ingress into the vehicle sys-tems e.g. into the engine’s air intake system!

▶ Therefore, determine the water depth before driv-ing through water. The water level must not ex-ceed the lower edge of the lower beam.

▶ Drive at max. walking speed. Otherwise, a wavemay form in front of the vehicle, increasing the wa-ter level.

▶ Never stop in the water, do not drive backwardsand never stop the engine.

Vehicle operation in different weather conditionsIf you wish to run your vehicle in countries with dif-ferent weather conditions from those specified,please contact a ŠKODA partner. They will adviseyou if certain precautions need to be taken to ensurethe full functioning of the vehicle or to prevent dam-age (e.g. coolant, battery replacement, etc.).

Is something wrong?▶ Pay attention to changes in vehicle handling.▶ If in doubt about safety, stop driving and seek the

help of a specialist garage.▶ Unusual vibrations or the vehicle ‘pulling’ to the

side may indicate a puncture.▶ If tyre pressure loss is very quick, try to stop the

vehicle carefully without heavy steering or heavybraking.

▶ Immediately remove foreign bodies stuck in thetyre tread.

▶ Do not remove foreign objects that have penetra-ted into the tyre. Check the tyre pressure and seekthe help of a specialised garage.

▶ Immediately remove any objects jammed underthe floor of the vehicle. These can damage the ve-hicle or ignite and cause a fire.

Parking the vehicle safelyA vehicle that has not been secured may roll awayand cause accidents.

▶ For parking, look for a place with suitable ground.Do not park the vehicle on flammable materialssuch as dried leaves, spilt fuel. Hot vehicle partscan cause a fire.

Carry out the following activities in the specified or-der when parking.

› Stop the vehicle and keep the brake pedal de-pressed.

› Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.› For vehicles with an automatic gearbox, put the se-

lector lever in the position.› Turn off the engine.› For vehicles with manual transmission, engage

1st gear or reverse gear.› Release the brake pedal.

Exiting the vehicleDo not leave children unattended in the vehicle!

▶ Children may injure themselves when handling theseats, releasing the parking brake etc.

▶ In emergency situations, children are not able toleave the vehicle on their own or help themselves.

▶ At very high or very low temperatures, there isdanger to life!

▶ When locking the vehicle, the SAFE functionswitches on. As a result, no doors or windows canbe opened from the inside. Turn off the SAFE func-tion if people are left behind in the locked vehi-cle » page 23.

Emergency call

WARNINGAvailability of a mobile network is indispensable forestablishing a connection to the emergency number.

WARNINGThis emergency service is only available in somecountries.

WARNINGIf the vehicle is located in an area without a function-ing emergency call system infrastructure, no vehicledata shall be transmitted to the emergency call cen-tre.

After the start of the conversation, the emergencycall centre also contains information as to the acci-dent location and the severity of the accident, thenumber of occupants with seatbelts on and the vehi-cle identification number (VIN).

Once the connection has been established, commu-nication with the emergency call centre takes placevia the loudspeaker and microphone installed in thevehicle.

Personal dataPersonal customer data is collected, processed andused by ŠKODA AUTO in accordance with the provi-sions of the generally binding legal provisions in thearea of personal data protection.

The current declaration on the protection of person-al data can be found on the following website:

21Correct and safe › Emergency call

https://www.skoda-auto.com/other/personal-data

Serious accident - automatic callIn the event of an accident where the airbag or belttensioner activates, a call is automatically startedwith the emergency call centre.

The automatic call to the emergency call centre is al-so started after the Emergency Assist- the assistantsystem for emergency situations has intervened.

Minor accident - call optionThe Infotainment screen displays the option to setup a connection to the emergency call centre orbreakdown service.

Manual call

› Keep the buttonpressed down.

› Confirm the connec-tion to the emergencycall centre in the Info-tainment screen.

› To cancel the connec-tion to the emergencycall centre beforestarting the call, pressthe button again or

confirm the cancellation of the connection in theInfotainment screen.

Starting a manual conversation can then be used, forexample, if you also report an accident in which youare not directly involved.

Indicator light

The system status is dis-played after the ignitionis switched on, by the il-lumination of indicatorlamp A .

▶ Green - lit up - the sys-tem is functional.

▶ Green - flashing - a callis being made to theemergency call centre.

▶ Red - lit up - there is a system failure, immediatelyseek the help of a specialist garage.

▶ Not lit up - the system is out of order due to a longterm unavailable mobile network, if this circum-stance persists, the system will require the assis-tance of a specialist garage.

WARNINGIf there is a system fault, no emergency call is possi-ble.

After an accident

What to do after an accidentWhere possible, please observe the following in-structions.

› Switch off the ignition.› Turn on the hazard warning lights.› In the case of natural gas vehicles, remove any ob-

jects that spark or set fire to the vehicle (e.g. putout cigarettes, etc.).

› Set up the warning triangle to warn other roadusers.

› Stay at a safe distance from the vehicle, along withany passengers.

› Report the accident to the emergency services. Ifit is a natural gas vehicle, inform the emergencyservices.

› Wait for the emergency services to arrive.

Safety systemsAfter an accident, the safety systems of the vehicle,e.g. seatbelts and airbag system, may be out of ac-tion.

▶ Have the vehicle's safety systems checked by aspecialist garage, even if no load or trip has occur-red.

▶ Have damaged, loaded or triggered components ofthe safety systems replaced by a specialist garage.

What to do in the event of a fireWhere possible, please observe the following in-structions.

› Switch off the ignition.› Turn on the hazard warning lights.› Set up the warning triangle to warn other road

users.› Stay at a safe distance from the vehicle, along with

any passengers.› Report the fire to the emergency services. If it is a

natural gas vehicle, inform the emergency services.› Wait for the emergency services to arrive.

WARNINGIf it concerns a natural gas vehicle, follow the in-structions below.▶ Do not try to extinguish the fire yourself.▶ Do not stand close to the burning vehicle.

22 Correct and safe › After an accident




Keys, locks and alarm system

Key

Key overview

Lock the vehicleOperate the luggagecompartment lidUnlock vehicle

A Battery status indi-cator light

B Safety button foropening and closingthe key bit

NOTICE▶ Protect the key from moisture and strong vibra-

tions.▶ Keep the grooves in the key bit clean.

The effective range of the key signal is approxi-mately 30 m. The effective area can be reduced, e.g.due to signal interference from other transmitters.

Troubleshooting

The battery in the key is almost empty▶ After pressing a button on the key, the warning

light does not flash.

Or:

▶ A message stating it is necessary to change thebattery will be displayed.

› Replace the battery » page 23.

The vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked with theremote controlThere may be the following reasons.

▶ The battery in the key is empty.

› Replace the battery » page 23.

▶ The key is not synchronized.

Synchronize the key as follows.

› Press one of the buttons on the key.› Unlock the door within 1 minute with the key via

the locking cylinder » page 24.

If necessary, the key must be synchronized if oneof the buttons on the key has been repeatedly press-ed outside of the effective range of the remote con-trol.

Changing the key battery

The new battery must meet the specifications of theoriginal battery.

› Fold out the key bit.› Loosen the battery

cover with your thumbor with a flat-bladescrewdriver at themarked positions.

› Open the battery cov-er.

› Take out the battery.› Press any key on the

radio key, and the keyresets.

› Insert the new battery.› Fit the battery cover

and press until it clicksinto place.

Central locking

Functionality

Central locking systemThe system unlocks and locks all doors, the fuel fillerflap and the luggage compartment flap at the sametime.

Unlock indicator: the flashing lights flash twice.

Lock indicator: the flashing lights flash once.

The warning light in the driver's door will flash forabout 2 seconds in quick succession after the vehicleis locked, then it will start flashing regularly at longerintervals.

If none of the doors or the boot lid is openedwithin 45 seconds of unlocking, the vehicle automat-ically locks again.

SAFE-FunctionDepending on the equipment, the SAFEFunction canbe incorporated into the central locking system.

The SAFEFunction prevents the doors from openingfrom the inside after locking the vehicle.

The SAFEFunction turns on when the vehicle islocked from the outside.

After the ignition is switched off, a message regard-ing the SAFEFunction is displayed on the instrumentcluster display.

23Keys, locks and alarm system › Key

DANGERRisk of death!▶ When the vehicle is locked and SAFEFunction is

switched on, no people may remain in the vehicle.

SAFE-Turn off the function▶ By double locking within 2 seconds.

Or:

▶ Together with the deactivation of the interior sur-veillance » page 26, Settings.

The warning light in the driver's door will flash forabout 2 seconds in quick succession after the vehicleis locked, then goes out and starts flashing regularlyat longer intervals after about 30 secs.

If the SAFEFunction is switched off, the door can beopened from the inside by pulling the opening leveronce.

The SAFEFunction is switched on again after unlock-ing and locking the vehicle.

Operation

Means for operating the central lockingDepending on the equipment:

▶ Key » page 23.▶ Keyless Entry (KESSY) » page 25.▶ Central locking button.

Lock / unlock with the central locking button› Press the button in the middle part of the control

panel.

The symbol in the button lights up when locking.

The button locks all doors and the boot lid.

Unlocking of the vehicle also takes place when open-ing a door from the inside or when removing the keyfrom the ignition.

WARNINGA locked vehicle with a central locking button makesit difficult for responders to enter the vehicle in anemergency.

Setting the unlocking and locking function

The lock and unlock functions are set in the follow-ing menu in the Infotainment system.

Or:

All doorsUnlocking all doors, the luggage compartment lidand the fuel filler flap.

Single doorThe driver's door and the fuel filler flap are un-locked with the button on the key.

In vehicles equipped with a keyless locking system,the door near to which the key is located and thefuel filler flap are unlocked by touching the door han-dle.

When unlocked again, the other doors and the bootlid are also unlocked.

Doors on one side of the vehicleThe doors on the driver’s side and the fuel filler flap are unlocked with the button on the key.

In vehicles equipped with a keyless locking system,the doors on the passenger’s side near to which thekey is located and the fuel filler flap are unlocked bytouching the door handle.

When unlocked again, the other doors and the bootlid are also unlocked.

Automatic locking after startingAfter starting, all doors and the boot lid are lockedwhen a speed of 15 km/h is reached.

Unlocking of the vehicle takes place when opening adoor from the inside or when removing the key fromthe ignition.

WARNINGAn automatically locked vehicle makes it difficult forresponders to enter the vehicle in an emergency.

Troubleshooting

Central locking fault▶ The warning light in the driver's door first flashes

for 2 secs in quick succession.▶ Then it lights up continuously.▶ After 30 secs, it flashes slowly.

› Seek the help of a specialist garage.

Unlock and lock the door mechanically

Unlocking and locking the door with the lock cylin-der

Remove cover› Pull the handle on the

front left door and holdit.

› Insert the key into therecess on the under-side of the cover.

› Open the cover in thedirection of the arrow.

› Let go of the door han-dle.

24 Keys, locks and alarm system › Central locking

Unlock and lock› Insert the key in the

locking cylinder andunlock or lock it.

Install cover› Pull and hold the door

handle.› Replace the cover.› Let go of the door han-

dle.

Lock the door without the locking cylinder

› Open the door.› For vehicles with a panel over the opening, remove

the panel.› Insert the key or a flat-head screwdriver into the

slot.› Turn the key or flat-head screwdriver towards the

outside of the vehicle (spring-loaded position).

After closing, the door is locked.

Keyless locking (KESSY)

Usage

The keyless locking system, KESSY, enables unlock-ing and locking of the vehicle without actively usingthe remote control key.

Operation

Keep the key with you when unlocking and locking.

The sensors on the handle are intended to be operat-ed with bare hands, e.g. wearing gloves may affectthe function of the sensors.

Unlock

› Grip the door handle.› Open the door.

Lock

› Touch the sensor.

After locking, it is notpossible to unlockwithin 2 seconds bytouching the door han-dle. This can be used tocheck whether the ve-hicle is locked.

Unlock the boot lid› Push the handle of the boot lid.

Protection against inadvertently locking the key inthe vehicleWhen the key is locked in the vehicle, the vehicle isautomatically unlocked. If no door is opened within45 seconds, the vehicle automatically locks again.

When the key is locked in the luggage compartment,the luggage compartment lid is automatically un-locked.

Settings

Deactivate keyless locking› Lock the vehicle with the button on the key.› Within 5 s, touch the sensor on the door handle

with your finger.

Deactivation is confirmed by a single flash of thedirection indicators.

› To check the deactivation, wait at least 10 secondsand then pull the door handle.

The door must remain locked.

Keyless locking is automatically activated once againafter the vehicle is unlocked.

Troubleshooting

The vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked usingthe sensors on the handle› Lock or unlock the vehicle with the button on the

key.

25Keys, locks and alarm system › Keyless locking (KESSY)

› Then try to unlock or lock the vehicle using thesensors on the handle.

› If keyless locking does not work, get the help of aspecialist garage.

If the vehicle is not unlocked for a longer periodof time, the function can be deactivated automati-cally.

No key was found when the ignition was switchedon

illuminatesA message that no key was found in the vehi-

cle.

› Insert the key into the vehicle.

Alarm system

Functionality

The alarm system triggers acoustic and optical sig-nals in the event of a break-in or towing attempt.

The alarm system is activated automatically approxi-mately 30 seconds after the vehicle is locked.

The alarm system is automatically deactivated afterthe vehicle is unlocked.

Alarm triggerThe activated alarm system triggers an alarm whenone of the following events occurs.

▶ Open the engine compartment lid.▶ Open the boot lid.▶ Opening the door.▶ Manipulation of the ignition lock.▶ Towing the vehicle.▶ Movement in the vehicle.▶ Sudden and significant voltage drop in the electri-

cal system.▶ Unhitch the trailer.▶ Opening the door unlocked via the lock cylinder.

Switch off the triggered alarm› Unlock the vehicle.

Or:

› Turn on the ignition.

Functional conditions

All windows must be closed for the alarm system tofunction correctly.

A trailer is integrated into the alarm system underthe following conditions.

✓ The vehicle is factory-fitted with a towing device.✓ The trailer is electrically connected to the vehicle

via the trailer socket.

✓ The trailer is not equipped with LED tail lights.

If the electrical connection to the trailer is interrup-ted in a vehicle with an activated alarm system,warning signals are triggered.

Disable the alarm before connecting or discon-necting a trailer.

Settings

The following functions of the alarm system can bedeactivated at the same time.

▶ Interior surveillance.▶ Towing protection.

By deactivating the SAFEFunction will also beswitched off » page 23, Functionality.

Deactivation▶ By double locking within 2 seconds.

Or:

▶ In Infotainment, in the menu: Menuitem for interior monitoring.

Or:

▶ In Infotainment, in the menu: Menu item for interior monitoring.

The deactivated functions are reactivated after un-locking and locking the vehicle.

Deactivation is to be carried out if the vehicle is,for example, towed or transported.

26 Keys, locks and alarm system › Alarm system

Doors, windows and boot lid

Doors

Open / close door

Open from the outside

› Unlock the vehicle andpull on the door handle.

Open from the inside

› Pull the door openinglever and push thedoor away from you.

Close from the inside› Grasp the pull handle and close the door.

Child safety lock on the rear doors

Operation

The child lock prevents the rear doors from beingopened from the inside.

Switching on and off

› Turn the child lock with the vehicle key or a flat-head screwdriver.

Child lock A switched off

Child lock B switched on

Window - with manual operation

service

› Turn the crank in theappropriate direction.

Window - with electrical operation

What you should be mindful of

Force limitationTo reduce the risk of pinch injuries when closing thewindows, the vehicle has a force limiter.

If there is an obstacle, the window closing process isstopped and the pane retracts by several centime-tres.

If the obstacle prevents it from being closed for thenext 10 seconds, the closing process is interruptedonce again and the window goes down by severalcentimetres.

If you attempt to close the window again within10 seconds of the window being moved down forthe second time, even though the obstacle was notyet been removed, the closing process is only stop-ped. During this time, it is not possible to automati-cally close the windows by pulling the button all theway. The force limiter is, however, switched on.

The force limiter is only not operational if you at-tempt to close the window again within the next10 seconds – the window will now close with fullforce! If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the forcelimiter is switched on again.

CAUTIONRisk of injury!▶ Close the windows carefully, even though they

have a force limit.

27Doors, windows and boot lid › Doors

Overview of the operating buttons on thedriver's door

Depending on the equip-ment:

A Front left window

B Front right window

C Rear left window

D Right rear window

E Deactivation / acti-vation of the buttons

in the rear doors

Operation

Open› Press the corresponding button slightly down-

wards and hold it until the window has reached thedesired position.

Or:

› Press the corresponding button until it stops; thewindow opens automatically. Press the buttonagain to stop the opening process.

Close› To close, pull gently upwards on the top edge of

the corresponding button and hold until the win-dow has reached the desired position.

Or:

› Pull the corresponding button until it stops; thewindow closes automatically. The closing processis stopped by pulling the button again.

After switching off the ignition, the windows canstill open and close for about 10 minutes so long asnone of the doors are opened.

Open all windows at the same time› Hold down the button on the key.

Or:

› Turn off the ignition, open the driver's door, andhold down the driver's window button until itstops.

Depending on the setting, only the driver's win-dow can be opened in this way.

Close all windows at the same time› Press the button on the key.

Or:

› Turn off the ignition, open the driver's door, andpull upwards on the driver's window button until itstops.

Or:

› For vehicles with a keyless locking system, holdone finger on the sensor on the outside of the han-dle on the front door.

Depending on the setting, only the driver's win-dow can be closed in this way.

Settings

The window operation is set in the following menu inthe Infotainment system.

Menu item for window operation

Or:

Menu item for window operation

Troubleshooting

The window regulator has stopped working afterrepeated opening and closingThe window regulator mechanism could have over-heated.

› Let the window regulator mechanism cool down.

The automatic window operation does not workafter disconnecting the vehicle battery› Activate the automatic window control » page 28.

Activation after disconnecting the vehiclebattery

Activate automatic window operation› Turn on the ignition.› Pull the corresponding button upwards and the

window closes.› Release the button.› Pull up the respective button and hold for 1 second.

Sunblind - with electrical operation

Operation

CloseOpen

› Press or hold the but-ton to move the blind .

› Press or release thebutton to stop theblind from moving .

28 Doors, windows and boot lid › Sunblind - with electrical operation

Activation after disconnecting the vehiclebattery

› Turn on the ignition.› Keep the button pressed down. The sunblind

opens and closes again.› Release the button.

Sun visors

Fold up and fold down

1 Swivel the panel towards the windscreen

2 Swivel the visor towards the door

CAUTIONObjects attached to the sun visors can restrict visionoutside.In the event of sudden braking or an impact, thesecan also cause injuries.▶ Do not attach anything to the sun visor.

Boot lid - with manual operation


NOTICE

▶ Do not attach a bike rack to the tailgate on vehi-cles with an extended rear window.

Operation

Open

› Push the handle and liftthe flap.

The option to open by pressing the handle is deacti-vated once a speed of 5 km/h is reached. This is acti-

vated again after the vehicle has stopped and a dooris opened.

Close

› Grasp the bracket Aand pull the flap down.

CAUTIONDanger of opening the tailgate while driving!▶ Make sure that the latch engages after the flap is

closed.

Set a delayed lid lock

If the lid is unlocked with the button on the key,the lid is automatically locked again after closing.

The period after which the lid is locked automaticallycan be extended by a specialist garage.

Boot lid - with electrical control


NOTICE

▶ Do not attach a bike rack to the tailgate on vehi-cles with an extended rear window.

Operation

CAUTIONRisk of injury!▶ Only operate the tailgate when there are no people

or objects in the swivel area.

CAUTIONDanger of opening the tailgate while driving!▶ Make sure that the latch engages after the flap is

closed.

NOTICE▶ Do not manually close the tailgate when moving.▶ Before operating the tailgate, check that there are

no objects in the swivel area that could damage thetailgate. Also check whether there are any objectsin the immediate vicinity of the vehicle that coulddamage the vehicle interior and the objects beingtransported.

If the tailgate hits an obstacle when closing, itstops and an audible signal sounds.

29Doors, windows and boot lid › Sun visors

When automatically closing the tailgate, e.g. un-der the weight of snow, a broken beep sounds.

Handle in the tailgate

› Press the handle toopen, close, or stop thetailgate from moving.

The option to open bypressing the handle isdeactivated once aspeed of 5 km/h isreached. This is activatedagain after the vehiclehas stopped and a dooris opened.

Button in the tailgate

› Press the button toopen, close, or stop thetailgate from moving.

Button in the door

› To open the tailgate,pull and hold the but-ton until the tailgatestarts to open.

› To close the tailgate,pull and hold the but-ton until the tailgate isfully closed.

› To stop the tailgatefrom moving, pull or

release the button.

Button on the key

› Hold the button toopen, close, or stop thetailgate from moving.

The option to lock existsonly on vehicles with akeyless locking system.The key must not be inthe vehicle and must beat a distance of max. 2 mfrom the tailgate.

The tailgate can also be closed by pulling it downbriefly.

Settings

Set the uppermost position of the tailgate andstore itIt makes sense to set the top position of the tailgate,e.g. setting for the opening of the tailgate in a limitedspace due to the garage height.

› Stop the tailgate in the desired position.› Press the button and hold down on the lower

edge of the tailgate until an audible signal sounds.

Re-adjusting the top starting position of the tail-gate› Carefully raise the tailgate manually to the limit.› Press the button and hold down on the lower

edge of the tailgate until an audible signal sounds.

Troubleshooting

The tailgate does not react to the opening signal› There is a possible obstacle, e.g. snow; remove it.

Or:

› Press the handle in the tailgate and lift the lid.

Or:

› Mechanically unlock the tailgate » page 30.

The tailgate does not react to the closing signal› Close the tailgate manually.

NOTICE▶ Close the tailgate slowly, push down the tailgate

and push in the lock on the centre of the rear edgeof the tailgate.

Unlocking the boot lid

Release

If the boot lid does not open, it can be unlockedmanually by the following procedure.

› Insert a screwdriver in-to the opening in thepanel.

› Release the tailgate bymoving it in the direc-tion of the arrow.

30 Doors, windows and boot lid › Unlocking the boot lid

Seats, steering wheel and mirror

Front seat - with manual operation

Controls on the seat

A Adjust lengthways - after releasing the operatinglever, the locking mechanism must audibly en-gage

B Adjust height

C Adjusting the angle of the backrest - do not leanagainst the backrest during adjustment

D Adjust lumbar support: the extent of the curva-ture

After a certain time, play can develop within the ad-justment mechanism of the backrest angle.

Folding front passenger seat back

Fold up

› Pull on the operatinglever.

› Fold the backrest for-wards until it clicks in-to place.

Fold back› Pull on the operating lever.› Press the backrest backwards until it audibly clicks

into place.

Front seat - with electrical operation

Controls on the seat

Adjust the seat

A Adjust lengthways

B Adjust the inclination

C Adjust height

Adjust the seat back

A Adjust the inclination

Adjust lumbar support

A Set the position ofthe curvature

B Set the extent of thecurvature

Rear seats

Fold the backrests forward

Before folding down› Insert the rear headrests as far as they will go or

remove them.› Adjust the position of the front seats so that they

are not damaged by the folded backrests.› Pull the outer seat belt to the side trim.

31Seats, steering wheel and mirror › Front seat - with manual operation

Fold up

› Press the release han-dle and fold the seatback forward.

Fold back

› Pull the outer seat beltto the side trim.

› Fold back the seatback.

The release handle mustaudibly click into place.

› Check the locking ofthe seat back. The pinA A must not be visi-ble.

Parking position of the rear seat belts

Headrests

Adjust headrests

Headrests in front

› Hold the safety buttonand move the supportin the desired direc-tion.

Rear headrests

› Move the headrest inthe desired direction.

When moving down-wards, the safety but-ton must be keptpressed.

Remove and insert the rear head restraints

Remove

› Partially fold forwardthe respective seatback.

› Move the headrest upto the stop.

› Press the safety but-tons A and B at thesame time and removethe support.

Deploy› Slide the support into the seat back.

The safety button must audibly click into place.

Front armrest

Settings

› Move the backrest tothe desired position.

32 Seats, steering wheel and mirror › Parking position of the rear seat belts

Rear armrest

Settings

› Fold down the armrest.

The folded-down arm-rest can be used as astorage table.

Steering wheel

Adjust the steering wheel

WARNINGRisk of accident!▶ Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

› Swing the safety leverdownwards.

› Adjust the steeringwheel to the desiredposition.

› Press the safety leveras far as it will go.

Troubleshooting

Power assisted steering faultylights up - total failure of the power steering,failure of the steering assistance

› Turn off the ignition, start the engine and drive afew meters.

› If the indicator light does not go out, do notcontinue driving. Get the help of a specialist com-pany.

lights up - partial failure of power steering,possible reduction in power steering

› Turn off the ignition, start the engine and drive afew meters.

› If the indicator light does not go out, it is possi-ble to continue driving with the appropriate carefuldriving style. Get the help of a specialist company.

Steering column lock faultyflashesMessage regarding a fault in the steering col-

umn lock

› Stop the vehicle.› Get the help of a specialist company.

After switching off the ignition, it is then no longerpossible to switch on the ignition, to lock the steer-ing and to switch on the electrical components.

flashesMessage regarding a fault in the steering lock

› You may continue driving, exercising appropriatecaution. Get the help of a specialist company.

Steering column lock not unlockedflashesMessage regarding the necessary steering

wheel movement

› Move the steering wheel slightly back and forth.› If the steering does not unlock, stop the vehicle

and seek the help of a specialist garage.

Interior rear-view mirror

service

Interior mirror with manual darkening

A Mirror is not dark-ened

B Mirror darkens

Interior mirror with automatic darkeningDarkening of the mirror is automatically controlledthrough the sensors in the mirror once the engine isstarted.

CAUTIONRisk of accident!A glowing display e.g. a mobile phone or navigationdevice may affect the function of the automatic mir-ror darkening.▶ Do not mount these devices near the mirror.

33Seats, steering wheel and mirror › Rear armrest

Wing mirror

service

Depending on the equipment, the mirrors can be fol-ded manually or electrically.

Rotary knob positions

Adjust the left mir-ror surfaceSwitch off operationAdjust the mirrorsurface on the rightFold up the mirrorelectrically (chooseanother position tofold back)Heat the mirror

while the engine is running

Adjust the mirror surface› Select position or .› Turn the rotary knob in the direction of the arrows.

Fold up the electrically folding mirrors automati-callyThe mirrors fold in when the vehicle is locked andfold back in when the function is activated.

Locking of the vehicle is not indicated by the factthat the mirrors fold in. Locking of the vehicle is indi-cated by the turn signal lights flashing.

Manually foldable mirrors› Fold the mirror towards the side window by apply-

ing pressure with your hand.

WARNINGRisk of accident!The exterior mirrors make objects appear furtheraway.▶ Use the inside mirror to determine the distance to

the following vehicles.

NOTICERisk of mirror damage!▶ If the electrically foldable mirror is swung out due

to external influences (e.g. due to an impact whenmaneuvering), fold the mirror with the rotary knoband wait for an audible folding noise.

Settings

Automatic folding of the exterior mirrors is activatedor deactivated in the following menu in the Infotain-ment system.

Or:

Troubleshooting

Electric mirror control disrupted› Adjust the mirror surface by lightly pressing your

finger.

CAUTIONRisk of burns!▶ Do not touch heated exterior mirror surfaces.

34 Seats, steering wheel and mirror › Wing mirror

Restraint systems and airbags

Seat belts

Functionality

Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer verygood protection in the event of an accident. They re-duce the risk of an injury and increase the chance ofsurvival in the event of a major accident.

WARNING▶ The seat belts must not be removed or altered in

any other way.▶ Do not attempt to repair the seat belts yourself.

Have a damaged seat belt replaced immediately bya specialist garage.

Automatic belt retractorThe automatic retractor locks the belt in the eventof a jerky pull on the belt. The belts lock, for example,when brakes are applied fully, when the car acceler-ates, when taking turns as well as when being closeto a vehicle.

WARNING▶ If the seat belt does not lock when pulled jerkily,

have the retractor checked by a specialist garage.

Belt tensionersThe safety of the driver, front passenger and passen-gers on the outer rear seats who are wearing theirseat belts is enhanced by the belt tensioners fittedto the inertia reels on the front and rear external seatbelts.

If there is a collision with a certain severity, the seatbelt is tightened by the belt tensioner so that unwan-ted body movement is prevented.

The belt tensioner can also be deployed when theseat belt is not fastened.

Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of aroll-over, minor collisions or in accidents in which nomajor forces are produced.

Smoke is released when the belt tensioner is de-ployed. This does not indicate a vehicle fire.

Reversible belt tensionerVehicles with a proactive occupant protection sys-tem include reversible belt tensioners » page 139.

The reversible belt tensioners increase safety for thebelted driver and front passenger by automaticallytightening the seat belt tightly over the body in criti-cal driving situations and then releasing it again.

Status display in the instrument cluster displayDepending on the display type, the display can be asfollows.

illuminated – unfastened front or rear seat belt

Illuminates - unoccupied rear seat

illuminated – a rear seat belt is not fastened

illuminated – a rear seat belt is not fastened

illuminated – a rear seat belt is fastened.



service

Fastening the seat belt

› Grasp the buckle latchand slowly pull the beltover the chest and pel-vis towards the buckle.

› Insert the buckle latchinto the buckle untilthere is an audibleclick.

› Carry out a tensile testto determine whetherthe lock tongue is se-

curely engaged.

Unfastening the seat belt

› Grab the lock tongueand release it by press-ing the red button.

› Hold the belt so it doesnot twist when rollingup.

Settings

› Move the seat beltheight adjuster up-wards to increase theheight.

35Restraint systems and airbags › Seat belts

› Press the safety buttonand move the seat beltheight adjuster downto reduce the height.

› After adjustment, firm-ly pull on the belt toensure that the seatbelt height adjuster hascorrectly locked inplace and that the beltis locked securely.

Troubleshooting

Blocked automatic belt retractor

› Grasp the strap in themiddle and pull quicklyin the direction of thearrow.

› Hold the strap and letit roll up slowly.

› Pull on the strap to seeif the retractor isworking properly.

› If the strap is stillblocked, repeat the un-

locking procedure once or twice.› If the strap is still blocked, seek the help of a spe-

cialist garage.

Child seat


For how to install and use the child seat, please notethe instructions in this Owner's Manual as well as theinstructions of the child seat manufacturer.

For safety reasons, we always recommend that chil-dren are transported on the back seats. Carry chil-dren on the front passenger seat only in exceptionalcases.

Child seats according to the standard ECE-R 44 ofthe European Economic Commission.

Child seats according to standard ECE-R 44 aremarked with the test symbol: large E in a circle, withthe test number under it.

We recommend using child seats from the ŠKODAGenuine Accessories range. These child seats havebeen developed and tested for use in ŠKODA vehi-cles. They comply with the standard ECE-R 44.

WARNING▶ When installing the child seat on the rear seat, ad-

just the front seat so that there is no contact be-

tween the front seat and the child seat or the childcarried in the child seat.

▶ Before installing a forward-facing child seat, adjustthe headrest so that it is as low as possible.

▶ If the headrest prevents the child seat from beingfitted, adjust the headrest to the highest position.

▶ When installing the child seat, avoid contact withthe area of the roof and the rear pillar. There is arisk of injury when the head airbag is deployed.

▶ If using a separate child seat cushion, adjust theheadrest so that the child's head is flush with, butnot protruding above the height of the top edge ofthe headrest.

Using a child seat on the front passenger seat

When using a child seat on the passenger seat, anycountry-specific regulations must be observed.

Never use a child seat in which the child is carriedwith his or her back to the direction of travel on aseat protected by an active airbag placed in front ofthe seat. This could cause serious injury to the child,even death.

This is also indicated by the following stickers.

Sticker on the passengersun visor.

Stickers on the middlebody pillar on the pas-senger side.

The following instructions must be followed whenusing a child seat on the front passenger seat.

▶ When using a rear-facing child seat, the front pas-senger airbag must be deactivated.

▶ If possible, adjust the front passenger seat back-rest so that it is vertical, to ensure that there is se-cure contact between the backrest and the childseat.

▶ If possible, move the front passenger seat back-wards so that there is no contact between thefront passenger seat and the child seat behind it.

36 Restraint systems and airbags › Child seat

▶ Adjust the height-adjustable front passenger seatas much as possible.

▶ Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as pos-sible.

WARNINGRisk of the seat belt causing a neck injury to thetransported child!▶ For child seats in groups 2 and 3, ensure that the

guide fitting attached to the child seat headrest ispositioned in front of or at the same height as theseat belt height adjuster on the central body pillar.

▶ Adjust the height of the front passenger seat beltso that the belt passes through the guide fittingwithout kinking and is not bent over the edge ofthe guide fitting.

WARNING▶ As soon as the rear-facing child seat is no longer

being used on the front passenger seat, activatethe front passenger airbag again.

Recommended child seats

Grouping of child seats according to standard ECE-R 44.

Group Weight of the child

0 up to 10 kg0+ up to 13 kg1 9-18 kg2 15-25 kg3 22-36 kg

Recommended child seats

Group Manufacturer Type Attachment Order numberApproval number

(E1 ...)

0+up to 13 kg

Britax Römer Baby Safe Plus Isofix base frame 1ST019907 04 301146

19-18 kg

Britax Römer Duo Plus TTISOFIX and TOP

TETHERDDA000006 04 301133

2-315-36 kg

Britax Römer Kidfix XP a) ISOFIX 000019906K 04 301198Britax Römer Kidfix II XP ISOFIX 000019906L 04 301323

a) For optimum protection, especially in the event of a side impact, it is recommended that you use this childseat complete with the backrest.

Fasteners for child seats

Use of child seats

Overview of the usability of child seats according to the standard ECE-R 16.

37Restraint systems and airbags › Fasteners for child seats

Child seats with the ISOFIX-System

groupSize class of the

child seat a)

Passenger seatwith activatedfront airbag b)

Passenger seatwith deactiva-

ted front airbag-

b)

Rear seats out-side c) Middle back seat

0up to 10 kg

E X X IL X

0+up to 13 kg

EX X IL XD

C

19-18 kg

D

X XIL

IUFX

CBB1A

215-25 kg

- X X IL X

322-36 kg

- X X IL X

a) The size category of the child seat is indicated on the child seat plate.b) If the passenger seat with the eyelets ISOFIXSystem is equipped for the installation of a ISOFIX-Child

seat with approval “Semi-universal” suitable.c) The seat is suitable for the fixing system. ISO / R3 suitable.

IL The seat is for that ISOFIX-Child seats with approval “Semi-universal” suitable.

IUF The seat is suitable for forward-facing child seats and is permitted for use in this weight category.

X The seat is not equipped with eyelets for the ISOFIX System. ISOFIXSystem.

i-SizePassenger seat with acti-

vated front airbag a)Passenger seat with deac-

tivated front airbag b) Rear seats outside Middle back seat

X X i-U Xa) If the passenger seat with the i-SizeSystem, this is only for the forward-facing i-Size-Child seats in the

category “Universal” suitable.b) If the passenger seat with the i-SizeSystem, this is for the forward and backward facing i-Size-Child seats

in the category “Universal” suitable.

i-U The seat is for the forward and backward facing i-Size-Child seats in the category “Universal” suitable.

X The seat is for that i-Size-Child seats in the category “Universal” not suitable.

Child seats fastened with a seat beltWhen using a child seat of the category “Universal” When using a child seat of the Universal category on themiddle rear seat, it is necessary to move the buckle of the middle seat behind the buckle of the outer seat.

Correct position - the belt buckles are one behindthe otherWrong position - the buckles are next to each other

38 Restraint systems and airbags › Fasteners for child seats

groupPassenger seat withactivated front air-

bag

Passenger seat withdeactivated front air-

bagRear seats outside Middle back seat a)

0up to 10 kg

X U b) U U

0+up to 13 kg

X U b) U U

19-18 kg

UF U U U

215-25 kg

UF U U U

322-36 kg

UF U U U

a) It is forbidden to install a child seat with a support foot in the middle rear seat.b) Adjust the height-adjustable front passenger seat as much as possible.

U The seat is not suitable for the child seat of the category Universal. “Universal” suitable that are approvedfor use in this weight group.

UF The seat is for the forward facing child seats of the category “Universal” suitable that are approved for usein this weight group.

X The seat is not suitable for children in this weight group.

Overview

ISOFIX

WARNING▶ On the retaining eyelets that are used to install the

child seat with the ISOFIXSystem provided, do notattach any other child seats, belts or objects.

The ISOFIXSystem enables the child seat to be at-tached quickly and securely. The Holding eyes for in-stalling the child seat using the ISOFIX-System arelocated on the outer rear seats, possibly also on thefront passenger seat.

A child seat with the ISOFIX-System can only be in-stalled in the vehicle if it is approved for this vehicletype. More information is available by asking a ŠKO-DA partner or from a vehicle list that comes with thechild seat.

› Remove the covers be-fore installing the childseat.

TOP TETHER

WARNING▶ Child seats with the TOP TETHER- Only use the

system on the seats with the eyelets TOP TETH-ERSymbol are provided.

▶ Only attach one belt from the child seat to a lock-ing eye TOP TETHER-Fasten the system.

▶ When attaching the child seat with the TOP TETH-ER- No other object may be attached to the eyeletTOP TETHERSystem.

Holding eyelets on the rear seats

39Restraint systems and airbags › Fasteners for child seats

Holding eyelet on the passenger seat

The attached belt of the TOP TETHERSystem re-stricts movements of the child seat top.

The holding eyelets for attaching the belt are locatedon the outer rear seats, as well as on the middle rearseat or passenger seat when necessary.

Airbags

Usage

The airbag system offers additional occupant protec-tion in the event of severe frontal and side collisions,as a supplement to the seat belts.

The best possible protective effect of the airbag isachieved only when the seat belt is also worn. Theairbag system is no substitute for the seat belts.

Functionality

When sinking into the inflated airbag, the forwardmovement of the body is damped and the risk of in-jury is reduced.

As the airbags inflate, smoke is released. Thisdoes not indicate a vehicle fire.

Airbag deployment in the event of an accidentAirbag deployment is influenced by many factors.The decisive factor is the deceleration curve that oc-curs on impact.

WARNINGDanger of serious or fatal injuries!▶ Maintain the correct seating position.▶ Do not keep your limbs in the deployment area of

the airbags.

The airbag is not deployed in the following situa-tions.

▶ Minor frontal and side collisions.▶ Rear collision.▶ Vehicle rollover.

If the measured deceleration rate is below the refer-ence values programmed in the control unit, the air-bags are not deployed despite possible serious dam-age to the vehicle.

Airbag overview

A Front airbags

B Side airbags - front

C Head airbags

D Side airbags - rear

E Driver's knee airbag

The installation location of the airbags is markedwith the lettering .

WARNINGDanger of a functional restriction of the side airbags!▶ Do not exert excessive forces, e.g. impacts, on the

seat backs.▶ Do not use seat covers that have not been ap-

proved by ŠKODA.▶ Have damaged seat covers at the installation loca-

tion of the side airbags repaired by a specialist ga-rage.

Deactivating the airbagsWe recommend having airbags other than the frontpassenger airbag deactivated » page 41, service bya ŠKODA service partner.

Deactivation of the airbags should be considered incases such as the ones below.

▶ If the driver's seat adjustment is correct, the dis-tance of at least 25 cm between the centre of thesteering wheel and the sternum cannot be main-tained.

▶ Additional operating controls for a physically disad-vantaged driver are installed in the vehicle.

▶ The vehicle has special seats, e.g. orthopaedicseats without side airbags.

illuminates for 4 seconds after the ignition isswitched on and then flashes for 12 seconds -

Airbag or belt tensioner deactivated with the diag-nostic deviceMessage regarding the deactivated airbag or belttensioner

WARNINGIf an airbag is deactivated during the sale of the vehi-cle, inform the buyer!

40 Restraint systems and airbags › Airbags

Conditions

✓ The ignition is switched on.

Troubleshooting

Airbag system faultyilluminatesMessage regarding an airbag fault


Key switch for the front passengerairbag

Usage

Deactivation of the front passenger airbag is provi-ded for the following cases, for example.

▶ A rear-facing child seat is mounted on the frontpassenger seat.

▶ The vehicle has special seats, e.g. orthopaedicseats without side airbags.


WARNINGDanger of fault in the passenger airbag deactivationsystem!▶ Only deactivate the airbag when the ignition is

switched off!

WARNINGDanger of unexpected deployment of the passengerairbags in an accident!▶ If the front passenger airbag has been deactivated

with the key, do not leave the key in the key switchwhile driving. Vibrations can cause the key to turnin the slot and activate the airbag!

service

Before switching off/switching on the front pas-senger airbag› Fold out the key bit completely.

Switch off/on front passenger airbag

› Switch off the ignition.› Open the passenger

door.› Insert the key bit into

the slot in the keyswitch as far as it willgo.

› to Switch off the keyswitch carefully intoposition rotate.

› to turn on the key switch carefully into position rotate.

› Remove the key bit from the slot.› Close the passenger door.› Turn on the ignition and check that the front pas-

senger airbag indicator lights are lit up.

WARNINGWhen the passenger airbag is switched off, the headairbag on the passenger side is also switched off atthe same time.

Indicator lights

▶ After switching on the ignition, the two indicatorlights light up briefly.

▶ If the system is OK, the two indicator lights go out.▶ One of the indicator lights then lights up again de-

pending on the position of the key switch.

lights up - front passenger airbag switchedoff

lights up 65 secs after the ignition isswitched on – passenger front airbag

switched on

Troubleshooting

Key switch for airbag deactivation is faultyflashes together with The front passenger airbag will not be de-

ployed in the event of an accident!

› Have the airbag system checked immediately by aspecialist company.

41Restraint systems and airbags › Key switch for the front passenger airbag

Lighting, windscreen wipers andwashers

Exterior lighting

functionality

Unless otherwise stated, the light works when theignition is switched on.

Daylight running lightsThe daytime running lights illuminate the area infront of the vehicle.

In vehicles for certain markets, this also provideslighting for the rear area of the vehicle.

Functional conditions✓ The lights switch is in position , or .

Automatically switch the low beam on/offThe low beam is automatically switched on or off de-pending on the lighting conditions.

Functional conditions✓ The light switch is in the position.

The automatic driving light switch is activated by thesymbol lighting up displayed in the light switch.

Automatically switch the low beam on/off when itrainsFunctional conditions✓ The light switch is in the position.✓ The function is activated.✓ The windscreen wipers are switched on for lon-

ger than 30 seconds.

The automatic driving light switch is activated by thesymbol lighting up displayed in the light switch.

Full LED front headlightsWhen the light switch is in position , the head-lights provide the best possible beam of light in frontof the vehicle.

The Dynamic cornering light function ensures thebest possible illumination of the curve area.

CORNER functionThe CORNER function is intended for turning or ma-noeuvring (e.g. when parking).

The function illuminates the vicinity of the vehiclefront in the direction of travel.

Functional conditions✓ The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels

are steered sharply.✓ The low beam is switched on.✓ The fog lights are not switched on.✓ The driving speed is lower than 40 km/h.

When no light is switched onThe symbol in the light switch may also light up inthe instrument cluster, indicating that it is necessaryto switch on the light.

illuminates

› Switch on the light.

service

Switching off thelights except thedaytime runninglightsAutomatically switchthe low beam on/offSwitching on theparking lightsSwitch on the lowbeam

Use the position as the basic position of the lightswitch .

Main beamThe high beam works when the low beam is on.

A Switch on the highbeam - the warninglight in the instru-ment cluster illumi-nates

B Switch off the mainbeam - the indicatorlamp in the instru-

ment cluster goes out / Switch on the flasher- the indicator lamp lights up

CAUTIONRisk of accident!▶ Do not dazzle other road users with the high beam.

Turn signal

A Switching on theturn signal light onthe right - the warn-ing light flashes inthe instrument clus-ter

B Switching on theturn signal light onthe left - the warn-ing light flashes inthe instrument clus-

ter

42 Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Exterior lighting

Turn signal - convenience signallingConvenience signalling enables three flashes of theturn signal lights without having to move the leverup or down.

› Tap the control lever up or down.

The corresponding direction indicators flash threetimes.

Tap the lever in the opposite direction ahead oftime to stop signalling.

Fog light

Positions for pulling outthe light switch

1 Fog lights - thewarning light in theinstrument cluster il-luminates

2 Rear fog light - thewarning light in theinstrument cluster il-luminates

› Turn the light switch to position , or .› Pull the light switch into the appropriate position.

The rear fog light does not illuminate when an ac-cessory is connected to the trailer socket.

Hazard warning lights› Press the button to switch it on or off Press in

the middle part of the control panel.

When the hazard warning system is on and the turnsignal is switched on, the hazard warning lights willbe switched off temporarily and only the turn signalwill flash on the relevant side of the vehicle.

The hazard warning lights can be switched on auto-matically in the event of a violent braking manoeu-vre. The hazard warning lights are switched off auto-matically when starting or accelerating.

Parking light on one side The one-sided parking light enables the illuminationof one side of the parked vehicle by switching on thecorresponding parking light.

A Switch on the park-ing light on the right

B Switch on the park-ing light on the left

› Switch off the ignition.› Move the lever to the

appropriate position.› Lock the vehicle.

When the parking light isswitched on, an acoustic

warning signal sounds and the driver's door is

opened. After a few seconds or after the driver'sdoor is closed, the warning signal will stop.

Parking lights on both sides The two-sided parking light allows the parked vehi-cle to be illuminated through activation of the side-lights.

› Turn on the ignition.› The light switch in position rotate.› Switch off the ignition.› Lock the vehicle.

The light may switch off automatically if the batteryis low. If the two-sided parking light is switched onwhen the ignition is switched off, the light will notswitch off automatically.

When the parking light is switched on, an acousticwarning signal sounds after the ignition is switchedoff and the driver's door is opened. After a few sec-onds or after the driver's door is closed, the warningsignal will stop.

Settings

Activate/deactivate automatic driving lights whenit rainsThe function is activated or deactivated in the fol-lowing menu in the Infotainment system.

Or:

Activate/deactivate comfort flashingThe function is activated or deactivated in the fol-lowing menu in the Infotainment system.

Or:

Headlight range control of the LED headlights› Select the position of the control according to the

vehicle's current load status.

Front seats occu-pied, boot emptyAll seats occupied,boot emptyAll seats occupied,luggage space loa-dedDriver's seat occu-pied, boot loaded

For the Full LED headlights, the headlight rangecontrol is adjusted automatically.

43Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Exterior lighting

WARNINGRisk of accident!An incorrectly set headlight range leads to inade-quate road lighting or dazzling of other road users.▶ Adjust the headlight range correctly.

Switch full LED headlights for the opposite direc-tion of traffic - driving abroad› Switch on travel mode in the Infotainment in the

following menu.

Or:

Troubleshooting

Turn signal light defectiveflashes faster - right turn signal lamp failed

› Check the right turn signal.

flashes faster - left turn signal lamp failed

› Check the left turn signal.

does not flash when the trailer is coupled -trailer flashing light has failed

› Check the trailer lighting.

Light bulb or LED bulb is defectiveor illuminatesInformation appears in the display regarding

the affected lights.

› Replace the defective bulb.› In the event of a defective LED lamp, seek the help

of a specialist company.

Headlights are fogged from the insideMoisture can condense inside the headlights. This isnot a defect.

Malfunction of the automatic headlight circuit› Clean the windscreen in the area of the rain/light

sensor.

Beam of light in front of the vehicle has shortenedHeadlights defective.

› Get the help of a specialist company.

Driving lights failedIf a message regarding the failed driving lights is dis-played, the light will work in emergency mode.

› Continue driving with appropriate caution.› Get the help of a specialist company.

COMING HOME, LEAVING HOMEexterior lighting

Functionality

The COMING HOME function turns on the light afterturning off the ignition and opening the driver's door.The light switches off automatically after the setlighting time has elapsed.

The LEAVING HOME function switches on the lightwhen unlocking the vehicle with the wireless remotecontrol.


✓ Visibility has worsened.✓ The light switch is in the position.

Settings

This function is set in the following menu in the Info-tainment system.

Or:

Light Assist high-beam assist system

Functionality

The high beam assist system automatically switchesthe high beam on and off.

WARNINGRisk of accident!▶ If necessary, manually switch the high beam on or

off.


✓ The system is activated.✓ The light switch is in the position .✓ The driving speed is higher than 60 km/h (for

some countries, higher than 40 km/h).✓ The low beam is switched on.

44 Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › COMING HOME, LEAVING HOME exterior lighting

service

turn on

› Push the lever in thedirection of the arrow.

Lights up in the instru-ment cluster fromthe isolation box.

Turn off› Manually switch the high beam on or off.

Settings

Activation / deactivationThe function is activated or deactivated in the fol-lowing menu in the Infotainment system.

Or:

Replace light bulbs


DIY replacement of the following bulbs is possible.Have the remaining light sources replaced by a spe-cialist garage.

The new bulb must conform to the specification ofthe original light bulb. The name of the bulb ismarked on the bulb socket.

After changing a bulb in the high beam or in the frontfog light, have the headlights adjusted by a specialistgarage.

CAUTIONHalogen lamps are pressurised and can burst duringreplacement!▶ Wear gloves and safety goggles.

NOTICEContamination of the halogen lamp reduces the lifeof the lamp!▶ Do not touch the glass of the light bulb with your

bare fingers.

NOTICEDanger of headlight damage due to the ingress ofwater and dirt!▶ Always fit the protective cap on the headlight cor-

rectly after changing a bulb.

Conditions for changing a bulb

✓ Ignition switched off.

✓ Light switched off.

Main beam

› Remove the protectivecap from the headlight.

› Press the socket withthe light bulb upwardsand remove it.

› Change the bulb in thesocket.

› Insert the base withthe new light bulb intothe headlight so thatthe fixing lug A ispointing down.

› Reinstall the protectivecap on the headlight.

Front turn signal

› Adjust the front wheels so that the cover cap inthe wheel arch is accessible.

Symbols on the covercap:

Secure positionRemoval/insertionposition

› Turn the cover capwith the correspondingsymbol until it is facingthe marking on thewheel arch.

› Remove the cover cap.

45Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Replace light bulbs

› Turn and remove thesocket with the bulb.


› Insert the socket withthe light bulb into theheadlight and turn itclockwise to secure.

› Insert the cover cap in-to the wheel arch andturn it clockwise tosecure.

Fog lights

› Remove the cover withthe bracket from thetool kit and remove ittowards the outside ofthe bumper.

› Unscrew screws A.

› Remove the lightdownwards and for-wards.

› Release the connectorand remove it from thebulb.

› Turn the light bulb andtake it out.

› Push the new light bulbinto the light so thatthe guide lugs on thelight bulb and the asso-ciated openings in thelight are in alignment.

› Turn the bulb clock-wise to secure.

› Attach the connector to the bulb, ensuring it clicksinto place.

› Reinstall the lamp and screw it on.› First insert the cover in the outer bumper area.› Press the cover in towards the centre of the

bumper until it clicks into place.

Rear turn signal

› Remove the cover withthe bracket from thetool kit.

› Unscrew screws A andremove the lamp.

› Press the lock mecha-nisms on the connec-tor and remove theconnector.

46 Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Replace light bulbs



› Push the base with thenew light bulb into theluminaire so that theguide lugs on the baseand the associatedopenings in the lumin-aire are flush.

› Turn the socket clock-wise to secure.

› Insert the connector into the light until it clicks intoplace.

› Insert the lamp with the cones screws into theopenings B in the body.

NOTICERisk of damage to the electrical system!▶ Make sure that the lines between the lamp and the

body are not pinched when the lamp is inserted.

› Screw on the lamp.› Fit the cover of the light, ensuring it clicks into

place.

Reversing light

› Open the boot lid.

› Release and removethe cover cap in theboot lid.



› Push the base with thenew light bulb into theluminaire so that theguide lugs on the baseand the associatedopenings in the lumin-aire are flush.

› Turn the socket clock-wise to secure.

› Insert the cover cap until it clicks into place.

Interior lighting

service

Automatic switch onThe light switches on when one of the followingevents occurs.

▶ The vehicle is unlocked.▶ One of the doors is opened.▶ The ignition key is removed (vehicle without start-

er button).▶ The ignition is switched off (vehicle with starter

button).

Automatic switch offThe light switches off when one of the followingevents occurs.

▶ The vehicle is locked.▶ The ignition is switched on.▶ About 30 seconds after all the doors have been

closed.

47Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Interior lighting

Operation of the lighting

Automatic switching on and offTurn the front and rear lights on/off

Deactivation of automatic switch-onReading lights

If a door remains open and the ignition is switch-ed off, the lights will turn off automatically after 10minutes.

Automatic switching on/off of the footwell light-ingThe lighting only works when the dipped or parkinglights are on.

The lighting is also switched on automatically afteropening the door (e.g. when getting in or out).

Settings

The brightness level of the footwell lighting whenthe dipped or parking lights are switched on is set inthe infotainment in the following menu.

Or:

Interior ambient light

Usage

The ambient lighting ensures a comfortable atmos-phere in the vehicle interior.

The lighting only works when the dipped or parkinglights are on.

The lighting is also switched on automatically afteropening the door.

Settings

The background lighting brightness settings are setin the Infotainment system, in the following menu.

Or:

Windscreen wipers and washers


Operating conditions of the wipers✓ Engine compartment lid closed.✓ Luggage compartment lid closed.

Middle position of the switches (no symbol avail-able)

✓ Ignition is switched on.

Operating conditions of the windscreen washersystem✓ Engine compartment lid closed.✓ Luggage compartment lid closed.

service

WARNINGRisk of accident!At low temperatures, windscreen washer fluid canfreeze on the windscreen and restrict visibility.▶ Only use the windscreen washer when the wind-

screen is warm.

Wipe and wash the front screen

Quick wipe

Slow wiping

Depending on the equipment:▶ Intermittent wiping▶ Automatic wiping controlled by the rain sensor

Turn off

Tip wiping (sprung position)

A Setting the wiping speed for the position

Washing and wiping (sprung position)

The windscreen washer nozzles on the windscreenare automatically heated together with the exteriormirrors.

Clean headlightsHeadlights that are switched on are cleaned the firsttime and after every tenth wash of the windscreen.The cleaning interval can be set by a specialist com-pany.

48 Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Interior ambient light

Wipe and wash the rear window

Washing and wiping the window (sprung posi-tion)Washing the rear view camera (sprung position)

Wipe

Turn off

Automatic rear window wipingWhen the windscreen wipers are switched on, therear window is automatically wiped when the re-verse gear is engaged.

Settings

Activate/deactivate automatic wipingThe functions for automatic rear window wiping andautomatic wiping in the rain can be activated and de-activated in the following menu in the Infotainmentsystem.

Or:

Add windshield washer fluid

WARNINGRisk of accident!▶ Use a suitable windshield washer fluid according to

the weather conditions.

NOTICERisk of damage to the windscreen washer system!▶ When refilling the washer fluid, do not remove the

strainer from the neck of the container.

NOTICERisk of damage to the headlights!▶ Only use washer fluid that does not attack polycar-

bonates.

NOTICERisk of damage to the parts of the engine compart-ment!▶ Close the container after refilling the windscreen

washer fluid.

The windscreen washer tank is located in the enginecompartment » page 11.

The container can hold a volume of 3 litres and 4 li-tres for vehicles with a headlight cleaning system.

› Open the bonnet » page 144 .› Carefully open the upper area of the lid.› Refill the windshield washer fluid.

Troubleshooting

Windscreen washer fluid level too lowilluminates together with

or

illuminates together with

› Refill the windshield washer fluid.

Frozen wipers› Carefully remove frozen windscreen wipers from

the windscreen before switching on the ignitionand free them from snow and ice.

Fold down the wiper arms and replace thewiper blades

To fold the windscreen wipers off the windscreen,the windscreen wiper arms must first be set to thefold-down position.

NOTICERisk of damage to the windscreen wipers and theengine compartment lid!▶ Close the bonnet before lowering the wiper arms

from the window.▶ Do not turn on the ignition when the windscreen

wiper arms are folded away.

Set the wiper arms to the fold-down position› Switch the ignition on and off again.

49Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Windscreen wipers and washers

› Within 10 seconds,press the control leverdown and hold forabout 2 seconds.

The windshield wiperarms assume the fol-ded position.

Replace the windscreen wiper blade

CAUTIONRisk of accident!▶ Change the windscreen wiper blades once or twice

a year.

› Fold the windscreen wiper arm away from thewindscreen.

› Press the fuse and re-move the wiper blade.

› Insert the new wiperblade until it clicks intoplace.

› Fold the windscreenwiper arm back ontothe windscreen.

› Turn on the ignitionand push the controllever down.

Cap for refilling the windscreen washer fluid

Heating and air conditioningsystem

Heating

Overview of the heating operationcomponents

A Set the temperature

B Set the blower speed

C Set the direction of the air outlet

Switch recirculated air mode on/off

WARNINGDanger of misting!▶ Always keep the fan on.

Manual air conditioning


▶ We recommend a difference of max. 5°C betweenthe outside temperature and the interior tempera-ture.

▶ Annual disinfection of the air conditioning is rec-ommended.


WARNINGRisk of accident!In recirculation mode, there is no fresh air supplyfrom the outside. This can result in loss of driver at-tention and fogging up of windows.▶ Keep the recirculation mode switched on for a

short time only.

Operating conditions for the cooling system

✓ The outside temperature is below 2 °C.✓ The engine is running.✓ The blower is switched on.

50 Heating and air conditioning system › Heating

Overview of the controls of the manual airconditioning system

A Set the temperature

B Set the blower speed

C Set the direction of the air outlet

Switch cooling system on / off

Switch recirculated air mode on/off

Switch window heating on / off » page 53

Switch seat heating on / off » page 53

Cooling systemWhen the cooling system is switched on, the tem-perature and humidity in the vehicle will drop.

Switching on the cooling system prevents the win-dows from misting up.

After pressing the button, the indicator lightin the button illuminates, even if the conditions forswitching on the cooling system are not met. Thecooling system switches on when the conditions forswitching on the cooling system are met.

Automatic switching on of the cooling systemThe cooling system switches on automatically tostop the windows from fogging up. The systemswitches on in the following cases.

▶ When the fan is on and the air distribution control-ler is in the position.

In this case, the recirculation mode is switched offand cannot be switched on.

▶ When the air distribution controller is not in the position, and recirculated air mode is switched on.

Recirculated air modeThe recirculation mode prevents contaminated out-side air getting into the interior of the vehicle.

Switching recirculation mode on briefly can increasethe cooling effect.

Circulating air mode may be switched on or offautomatically under certain circumstances.

When the air conditioner is operating, the engineidle speed may increase automatically.

Troubleshooting

Water under the vehicleWhen the cooling system is switched on, water candrip off the air conditioning system. This is not a leak.

Fogging› Increase the blower speed, switch on the cooling

system, and set the air distribution to the wind-screen.

Automatic switch-off of the cooling systemIf the coolant temperature is too high, the coolingsystem may switch off automatically. This ensuressufficient engine cooling.

Climatronic automatic air conditioningsystem


▶ We recommend a difference of max. 5°C betweenthe outside temperature and the interior tempera-ture.

▶ Annual disinfection of the air conditioning is rec-ommended.


WARNINGRisk of accident!In recirculation mode, there is no fresh air supplyfrom the outside. This can result in loss of driver at-tention and fogging up of windows.▶ Keep the recirculation mode switched on for a

short time only.

Operating conditions for the cooling system

✓ The outside temperature is below 2 °C.✓ The engine is running.✓ The blower is switched on.

Operation

A Set the temperature for the left side

B Climatronic display

51Heating and air conditioning system › Climatronic automatic air conditioning system

C Set the temperature for the right side

D Interior temperature sensor

Press - Switch on automatic modeThis function keeps the temperature constantand prevents the windows from misting.Hold - Switch on maintenance of interior tem-perature according to the temperature settingfor the driver's side (function SYNC )

Switch recirculated air mode on/offThe recirculation mode prevents contaminatedoutside air getting into the interior of the vehi-cle.

Switch seat heating on / off » page 53

Switch the windscreen ventilation/defrostingmode on/off

Operate Climatronic in the Infotainment sys-tem

Switch Climatronic on / off

Switch window heating on / off » page 53

If the temperature is set outside the numericalrange, one of the following symbols is shown in theClimatronic display.

Maximum cooling capacityMaximum heating output

When the air conditioner is operating, the engineidle speed may increase automatically.

Settings

Show settings menu› Tap the button on the Climatronic.

Or:

› on the Infotainment screen.

A Select Climatronic mode

B Set the temperature for the left side

C Set the temperature for the right side

D Set the direction of the air outlet in manualmode

Switch cooling system on / off

LOHI

When the cooling system is switched on, thetemperature and humidity in the vehicle willdrop.Switching on the cooling system prevents thewindows from misting up.

Switch windscreen heating on / off » page 53

According to the selected Climatronic mode:▶ Manual mode - Set the blower speed▶ Automatic mode - set operating performance

Switch on / off maintenance of the interior tem-perature according to the temperature settingfor the driver's side

Further Climatronic settings› To make further settings, press the button on

the Climatronic , tap on in the Infotainmentscreen.

▶ Automatic auxiliary heater - Switching the fast interior heat-ing on / off.

▶ Automatic windscreen heating - Switching the automaticwindscreen heating on / off.

Troubleshooting

Water under the vehicleWhen the cooling system is switched on, water candrip off the air conditioning system. This is not a leak.

Fogging› Switch on automatic mode.

Or:

› Increase the blower speed, switch on the coolingsystem, and set the air distribution to the wind-screen.

Automatic switch-off of the cooling systemIf the coolant temperature is too high, the coolingsystem may switch off automatically. This ensuressufficient engine cooling.

Heated windscreen

Usage

Windscreen heating is used for defrosting or venti-lating the windscreen.

Conditions

✓ The engine is running.✓ The outside temperature is below about 35°C.

52 Heating and air conditioning system › Heated windscreen

Operation

Rear window heating› Press the button.

Windscreen heating› Press the key on the Climatronic panel , tap

in the Infotainment screen.

Or:


Windscreen heating switches off automatically aftersome time.

If the engine is switched off with the heating switch-ed on and started again within approximately 10 mi-nutes, the heating will continue.

Settings

Automatic windscreen heatingThe windscreen heater switches on automatically ifthe windscreen could fog up.

This function is set in the following menu in the Info-tainment system.

› Press the button on the Climatronic controlpanel , tap in the Infotainment screen.

Or:


Troubleshooting

The indicator light in the button or below the but-ton flashesThe heating does not work as the battery charginglevel is low.

Seat heating


WARNINGRisk of burns!▶ Do not switch on the seat heater for persons with

limited perception of pain or temperature.

NOTICERisk of seat damage!▶ Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise puncture

them.▶ Do not turn on the heater in the following situa-

tions.▶ The seat is not occupied.▶ There are objects on the seat, such as a child

seat.▶ There are additional seat covers or protective

covers on the seat.

Conditions

✓ The engine is running.

Operation

› Press the or button.

The seat heating is switched on with maximum heat-ing power. By repeatedly pressing the button, theheating output is reduced until it is switched off.

The heat output is determined by the number of illu-minated indicator lights that are shown in the buttonor in the Climatronic display.

If the seat heating is switched on with the maximumheating output, the heating output is automaticallyreduced after 10 minutes.

Heated steering wheel

Conditions

✓ The engine is running.

Operation

› Press the button on the multifunction steeringwheel.

The seat heating is switched on with maximum heat-ing power. By repeatedly pressing the button, theheating output is reduced until it is switched off.

53Heating and air conditioning system › Seat heating

Driver information system

Analogue instrument cluster

Overview

Overview of the instrument cluster display

A Tachometer with indicator lights

B Display

C Speedometer with indicator lights

D Bar with indicator lights

E Multifunction button:▶ Set the time.▶ Reset ( trip ) odometer.▶ Display the distance travelled and the days un-

til the next service date.

F Depending on equipment fitted▶ Coolant temperature display.▶ Natural gas supply display.

G Petrol/diesel fuel gauge

NOTICERisk of serious damage to the engine and the ex-haust system!▶ Never run the fuel tank completely empty!

In poor visibility and with dipped headlights off,the brightness of the instrument cluster lighting isreduced to remind the driver to turn on the light.

Display overviewDepending on the equipment, the following informa-tion is shown on the display.

A Time

B Directional displayGear engaged / gearrecommendationSelector lever posi-tions of the auto-matic transmission

C Menu, indicatorlights and informa-tion

D Outside temperature

- low outside temperatureE Total distance travelled

F Trip - Distance travelled after resetting thememory

Overview of the main menu items▶ Driving data » page 56.▶ Assistants - Activate / deactivate assistance sys-

tems.▶ Navigation - e.g. show driving recommendations,

compass, destination list.▶ Audio - Using radio and media.▶ Telephone - call list, accept or reject incoming call.▶ Vehicle - Vehicle condition » page 58.

Operation

Operation via the control lever

A Press - Switch be-tween menu items /set valuesHold - Display themain menu

B Press - Confirmmenu item

Operation via the multifunction steering wheel

A Turn - Switch be-tween menu items /set valuesPress - Confirmmenu itemPress - Return onelevel higher in themenuHold - Display themain menu

Press - Show previous menu (if one was selec-ted) / Show phone menu

Settings

Set languageThe language is set in the following menu in the Info-tainment system.

Reset the odometer

› Briefly press the button in the instrumentcluster.

Setting the time

› Press and hold the button in the instru-ment cluster until the menu item Time isdisplayed.

54 Driver information system › Analogue instrument cluster

› Release the button, the display shows the hour set-ting.

› Press the button repeatedly and set the hours.› Wait 4 seconds, the display shows the minute set-

ting.› Press the button repeatedly and set the minutes.› Wait 4 seconds, the display shows the initial set-

ting.

The time is set in the Infotainment system in the fol-lowing menu.

Set the brightness of the instrument cluster light-ingThe brightness of the instrument lighting is automat-ically adjusted depending on the given lighting condi-tions.

When low beam is switched on, the brightness ofthe instruments lighting can be adjusted in the fol-lowing menu in the Infotainment system.

Or:

Digital instrument cluster

Overview

Overview of the instrument cluster display

A Bar with indicator lights

B Coolant temperature display

C Fuel level indicator

D Display

E Additional information

F Central display area


Overview of the main menu items▶ Driving data » page 56.

▶ Assistants - Activate / deactivate assistance sys-tems.

▶ Navigation - e.g. show driving recommendations,compass, destination list.

▶ Audio - Using radio and media.▶ Telephone - call list, accept or reject incoming call.▶ Vehicle - Vehicle condition » page 58.

Operation

A Rotate - Switch be-tween menu items /set values / changemap scale manuallyPress - Confirmmenu itemTurn and press -Switch on automaticchange of map scalePress - Return one

level higher in the menuHold - Display the main menuDepending on the equipment:▶ Press - Change the version of the display▶ Hold - Display the pre-set options menu with

additional information

Settings

Set languageThe language is set in the following menu in the Info-tainment system.

Reset the odometer in the instrument cluster› Select Trip in the menu in the instrument cluster dis-

play

A Rotate - Select entryPress - Confirm en-tryHold - Reset counter

Setting the timeThe time is set in the following menu in the Infotain-ment system.

55Driver information system › Digital instrument cluster

Set the brightness of the instrument cluster light-ingThe brightness is adjusted automatically accordingto the given lighting conditions.

The brightness is adjusted with the dipped beamswitched on in the infotainment in the followingmenu.

Or:

Set the variant of the display› Press the button on the multifunction steering

wheel to change the variant of the display presen-tation.

Select the variants shown› Press and hold the button on the multifunction

steering wheel.› Select and confirm the menu item for the display

variants.› Select and confirm one of the following variants of

the display.

A Classic display

B Extended display

C Modern display

D Basic display

E Sporty display (depending on equipment)

Select to display additional information› Press and hold the button on the multifunction

steering wheel.› Select and confirm one of the following pre-selec-

tion options (the scope of the pre-selection op-tions depends on the infotainment type).▶ Auto - Information depending on the selected

driving mode▶ Classic - Information about the gear selected

and the current speed.▶ Adjustable pre-selection options.

Setting the pre-selection option for the display ofadditional informationThe pre-selection option for displaying additional in-formation is set in the Infotainment system in thefollowing menu.

Menu item for the virtual cockpit

Or:

Menu item for the virtual cockpit

› Select the desired additional information in areasA.

› Hold the desired function area for the pre-selec-tion option in the area B to save the selection (thescope of the pre-set options depends on the typeof Infotainment).

Driving data

Overview

The driving data display works with the ignitionswitched on.

In the instrument cluster displayDepending on the equipment, the display of the in-strument cluster shows information such as speed,fuel consumption, range, etc.

For natural gas vehicles, the display of the instru-ment cluster shows the natural gas quality in percentfrom 70 % to 100 %. The higher the value, the lowerthe consumption of natural gas.

In Infotainment

A Travelled distance

B Driving time

C Average speed

56 Driver information system › Driving data

D Average fuel consumption

E Graphic fuel gauge - If the expected range is lessthan 300 km, the vehicle slowly approaches thesymbol

F Range (for natural gas vehicles, the range withpetrol, CNG and the sum of the ranges with bothfuel types are displayed separately).

StorageThe system saves the driving data in the followingmemories.

Since start▶ Driving data from the time of switching on the ig-

nition until the ignition is switched off again is stor-ed in the memory. If the journey is interrupted formore than 2 hours, the memory will be reset.

Long-term▶ The driving data of all trips up to a total of 99

hours and 59 minutes driving time or 9999 kmdriving distance are stored in the memory. If one ofthe listed values is exceeded, the memory is reset.

Since refuel▶ Driving data from the last fuel tank are stored in

the memory. The memory is reset the next timethe tank is filled.

Operation

Display driving data in the display of the instru-ment cluster via the operating lever› Select the menu item for the driving data in the

main menu in the instrument cluster display.

A Press - Select en-try / set values

B Press - Confirm en-try

Display driving data in the display of the instru-ment cluster via the multi-functional steeringwheel› Select the menu item for the driving data in the

main menu in the instrument cluster display.

A Turn - Select entry /set valuesPress - Confirm en-try

Display drive data in the InfotainmentThe driving data is displayed in the following menu inthe infotainment system.

Menu item for driving data

Or:


Select and reset the memory for driving data inthe display of the instrument cluster using thecontrol lever

› To select the memoryfor the displayed driv-ing data, press buttonA repeatedly.

› To reset the memory,hold down the A but-

ton.

Select memory for driving data in the display ofthe instrument cluster via the multifunction steer-ing wheel and reset it

› To select the memoryfor the displayed driv-ing data, press the set-ting wheel A repeat-edly.

› To reset the memory,hold the setting wheelA.

Select memory in infotainmentTo select the memory, use the functional areas in the following menu in the infotainment system.


Or:


Reset memory in infotainmentThe memory is reset in the following menu in the in-fotainment system.

Or:

Settings

Select the driving data to be displayedThe driving data to be displayed is selected in thefollowing Infotainment menu.

Or:

57Driver information system › Driving data

Set unitsThe units are set in the following Infotainment menu.

Or:

Speed limit warning

Usage

The system offers the possibility to set a speed limitbeyond which an acoustic warning signal will soundand the following warning message appears in thedisplay of the instrument cluster.

Settings

Setting the speed limit› Select and confirm the menu item Warning at or

(depending on display type).› When the vehicle is stationary, set the desired

speed limit and confirm.› While driving, drive at the desired speed and con-

firm it as the speed limit.

Resetting the speed limit› Select and confirm the menu item Warning at or

(depending on display type).› To reset the speed limit, confirm the stored value.

If the journey is interrupted for more than 2 hours,the set limit is deactivated, but the set value remainsstored.

Vehicle status

Display

The vehicle status is displayed in the following menuin the infotainment system.

Menu item for vehicle status

Or:

Menu item for vehicle status

A Vehicle areas shown in colour indicate associ-ated warning messages

B No notification

Warning messages regarding the vehicle con-dition and their quantity

C Display of information about the status ofthe START-STOP system▶ Activation / deactivation of the infor-

mation regarding the messages of the START-STOP system in another screen display

Functionality

In the event of a system fault, messages relating tothe relevant fault are shown on the instrument clus-ter display when the ignition is switched on.

Malfunctions can also be displayed in infotainment.

As long as the malfunctions have not been rem-edied, the warning messages are displayed again andagain. After the first display of the message, only theindicator lights remain on (Hazard) or (Warning)is displayed.

58 Driver information system › Speed limit warning

Infotainment Swing

Infotainment overview

A Touchscreen

Control dial left▶ Press: Switch Infotainment on/off▶ Turn: Set volume

Control dial right▶ Press: Confirm menu item▶ Turn: select menu item/set value

Radio menu

Media menu

Overview of Infotainment menus

Phone menu

SmartLink menu▶ Press: Display menu▶ Hold: Switch voice control of the SmartLink

application on / off

Information about vehicle settings

System

Limitation

For safety reasons, operation of some Infotainmentfunctions while driving is not possible or is restricted.

The Infotainment system indicates this by means ofa message in the screen.

Basic settings

Setting basic functionsThe following Infotainment functions are set in the

menu.

▶ Time and date.▶ Language.▶ Units.▶ Restore factory settings.

Sound settingsThe Infotainment sound is set in the menu .

The following menu items can be set.

▶ Setting the equalizer.▶ Adjusting the volume ratio.▶ Volume adjustment of individual Infotainment

functions.

Some are adjustable, for example the followingmenu items.▶ Volume adjustment of voice commands.▶ Setting the maximum volume when Infotainment

is turned on.▶ Speed-dependent volume setting.▶ Setting the Infotainment to mute with the park-

ing aid switched on.

Depending on the equipment, the following ad-vanced sound settings can be set.

▶ Setting space optimisation.▶ Setting the audio profiles according to genre.▶ Adjusting the subwoofer volume.

Configuration wizardThe configuration wizard helps to set certain Info-tainment functions.

The configuration assistant is automatically displayedif the ignition is switched on and if there are at leasttwo menu items that have not been set up afterswitching on the Infotainment.

› To switch off the automatic display, when theconfiguration assistant is displayed tap Don't showagain .

› For manual display tap Configuration wizard .

Setting the MENUThe position of the functional surfaces in the MENUmenu can be customized as follows.

› Press and hold the desired functional surface untilit is free.

› Move the functional surface to a different position.

Safely disconnect the connected USB device

NOTICERisk of damage to the data on the connected USBdevice!To safely disconnect a USB device, proceed as fol-lows.› Tap Remove safely.› Select the desired device.› Disconnect the USB device.

If it is not possible to safely disconnect the de-vice, switch off the Infotainment and disconnect thedevice.

59Infotainment Swing › Infotainment overview

Troubleshooting

Infotainment not respondingThe Infotainment system must be restarted.

› Press for more than 10 s.› Wait for the restart to complete.

System update

We recommend having the system update carriedout by a specialist company.

The system update ensures optimal function of theInfotainment system, e.g. compatibility with newphones.

Determine system version› Tap System information.

Screen

Overview

A Status bar

B Bar with the functional surfaces of the displayedmenu

C Display of the control centre

D Other pages of the menu

Operation

NOTICEDanger of screen damage!▶ The Infotainment screen is operated by touching it

lightly with your finger.

In principle, operation by touch is identical to the op-eration of a mobile phone.

The following operating modes are specific to the In-fotainment system.

Dragging up or down with two fingers

▶ Quickly review the listof phone contacts.

Settings

The following basic screen functions are set in the Screen menu.

▶ Brightness level of the screen.▶ Switch off the screen.▶ Display the time.▶ Confirmation sounds and animations.

Infotainment keyboard

Keypad overview

The arrangement of the keypad characters dependson the Infotainment language that has been set.

In Infotainment, the following types are used, de-pending on the context.

▶ Alphanumeric.▶ Numeric.▶ Keypad for input.▶ Keypad for search.

Keypad example

A Input line▶ Delete characters before the cursor

▶ Tap: delete the last character▶ Hold: delete all characters one after the other

Show list of searched entries

B Keypad functional surfaces▶ Switch to lowercase/uppercase▶ / Switch to the language keypad▶ Switch to the numeric and character keypad▶ Show additional keyboard languages▶ Insert spaces

60 Infotainment Swing › Screen

▶ Hold: Show more character variants▶ Move cursor to the left▶ Move cursor to the right▶ Confirm the entered characters

Numeric keypad

Keypad example


▶ Tap: delete the last character▶ Hold: delete all characters

B Keypad functional surfaces

▶ Confirm the entered characters

If it is possible depending on the context, alpha-numeric characters can be entered by holding afunction area with the number.

Operation

The Infotainment keypad is used to enter characters,letters and numbers.

The keypad will be automatically displayed when In-fotainment prompts for characters.

FindDuring the character input, a search for correspond-ing entries takes place.

The entry to be searched can be entered, includingdiacritics.

The keypad will only provide characters that matchthe stored entries.

› To display the searched entries, tap .

Show additional keypad languagesTo use the additional keypad languages, the desiredlanguages must be set first.

› Tap or repeatedly tap the flag symbol until thedesired language keypad is displayed.

Further character variants› Press and hold the sign with the symbol .› Select the desired symbol.

Setting up additional keyboard languages

› Tap Additional keypad languages.

Control centre

Overview

Display of the control centre

› Press the bar at thetop of the screen anddrag down.

Closing the control centre› Tap on .

Or:

› Wait 5 seconds.

Control CentreThe Infotainment control centre can be used forquick access to the following functions.

A Preferred features

B Setting up the instrument and key lighting

C Setting up the level of protection for personaldata

Settings

› To display editing mode hold any function surfaceof the preferred feature.

› To add the preferred feature, move the desiredfeature from the top of the screen to the function-al surface at the bottom of the screen.

› To close edit mode, tap on .

Radio

Overview

Display menu› Tap .

61Infotainment Swing › Control centre

Or:

› Tap .

Analogue and digital radio reception

A Select frequency range

B Depending on the frequency rangeFM: Radio textDAB: Radio text: name of the station group

C Station buttons for preferred stations

List of available stations

Show favourites

Show information about the station

Search stations manually (valid for AM and FM)

Settings

Infotainment supports digital radio reception inDAB and DAB+ formats.

List of available stations› Tap on .

Played stationStation stored on the presetsA traffic radio station is setDAB signal is not availableFilter the stations in the list according to theprogramme type, e.g. culture, music, sports, etc.FM: when the RDS function is switched onManual update of the station list

In the station list, information about the programtype and the type of the regional station can be dis-played.

Operation

Select station

› Tap or at the top of the screen.

SCAN functionThe function plays receivable stations of the selec-ted frequency range in succession for a few secondseach.

› To start automatic play press Scan or the rightrotary control .

› To end automatic play press or the right rotarycontrol .

Search for stations manuallyManual search is available for AM and FM stations.

› In the Radio main menu, tap .› For a consecutive search, tap or next to the

displayed frequency range scale.

Or:

› Hold down the scroll mark on the frequency rangescale and move it to the intended value.

Or:

› Turn the right rotary control.

Limitation

▶ Infotainment supports digital radio reception inDAB and DAB+ formats.

▶ Car parks, tunnels, tall buildings or mountains canrestrict radio reception.

▶ In the rear side windows, there are antennas for re-ceiving the radio signal.

Covering the panes with foils or metal-coated la-bels may affect the reception of the radio signal.

▶ The ŠKODA AUTO company assumes no responsi-bility for the availability, correct functioning andbroadcast information of the RDS service.

Settings

Save the station currently being listened to as a fa-vourite from the Radio main menu› Hold the desired station key for preferred stations

until the station is stored.

Save station to favourites from the list of availablestationsApplies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.

› Hold the line with the name of the desired station.› Tap the desired preset button.

Delete favourites› In the Radio main menu , tap Delete presets.

› To delete one preset button for preferred stations,tap the desired station button and confirm the de-letion.

62 Infotainment Swing › Radio

› To delete all preset buttons for preferred stations,tap All and confirm the deletion.

Buttons Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.

The variant for changing stations using buttons in the Radio main menu is set as follows.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Arrow buttons:.› Choose the change variant.

Traffic reception (TP) for FM stations on/offApplies to the FM frequency range.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Traffic program (TP).

Switch traffic reception for DAB stations on/offApplies to the DAB frequency range.

› In the Radio main menu, turn on menu item Traf-fic Radio (TP).

› In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings DABtraffic programme (TP) on/off.

Assign station logosApplies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.

Infotainment offers the option to assign logos fromthe pictures on an external source to the station but-tons.

For station logos, images in jpg, gif, png, bmp formatwith a maximum resolution of 500x500 pixels can beused.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Station logos:.› Tap the desired preset button.› Select the external source with the logo.› Find the desired logo and confirm.

Delete station logosApplies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Station logos:.› To delete a logo, tap the desired preset button and

confirm the deletion.› To delete all logos, tap on All and confirm the dele-

tion.

Switch on/off autostore of logos for stations to bestored to FavouritesApplies to FM and DAB frequency ranges.

When the function is switched on, a station logofrom the Infotainment memory is assigned when thestation is stored on a preset button.

› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings Autostore station logos.

Regional FM station logoApplies to the FM frequency range.

Infotainment provides the option of using country-specific FM station logos.

› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings Region for station logo:.

› Choose the country.

Turn on/off radio text receptionApplies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges.

When the function is switched on and station pre-sets are displayed, detailed information about thebroadcast content of the station being listened to, orthe name of the station group for the DAB station, isdisplayed.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Radio text.

Switch automatic frequency control (AF) on/offApplies to the FM frequency range.

When the function is switched on and the signal ofthe FM station currently being listened to is weak,Infotainment automatically sets the same station toa different frequency with a better signal.

› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings Automatic frequency control (AF).

Automatic change of frequency to a regionallylinked FM stationApplies to the FM frequency range.

Infotainment provides the option of automaticallyswitching to a regionally linked FM station in case ofsignal loss of the FM station being listened to.

› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings RDS Regional:.

› Select one of the following menu items.

▶ Fixed - If there is a loss of signal, another stationmust be set manually.

▶ Automatic - automatic selection of the station withthe best signal reception.

If reception is lost in the given region, Infotainmentwill automatically set another available region.

Sort stations in the list of available stationsApplies to the FM frequency range.

▶ In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings Sort station list:.

▶ Select the sorting of stations in alphabetical orderor by group.

Switch RDS on/offApplies to the FM frequency range.

This menu item is only available in some countries.

› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings Radio Data System (RDS).

If the RDS function is disabled, the following menuitems in the FM transmitters settings are not availa-ble.

▶ Traffic programme (TP).▶ Radio text.

63Infotainment Swing › Radio

▶ RDS Regional.▶ Automatic frequency control (AF).▶ Regional station logos.▶ Sorting of stations in the list of available stations.

Switch program type display on / offApplies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges.

If the function is switched on, additional informationon the broadcast program type (PTY) is displayed inthe list of available stations. The programs can be fil-tered based on this information.

Switch additional DAB announcements on/offApplies to the DAB frequency range.

When the function is switched on, other announce-ments are received as traffic announcements. For ex-ample, weather news, sports reports, financial news,etc.

› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings Other DAB announcements.

Enable/disable automatic programme tracking of aDAB stationApplies to the DAB frequency range.

When the function is switched on and the DAB sta-tion is lost, Infotainment automatically changes tothe same station with a better signal in a differentDAB station group.

› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings DAB - DAB station tracking.

Turn on/off automatic switching from a DAB sta-tion to the same FM stationApplies to the DAB frequency range.

When the function is switched on and the DAB sta-tion being listened to is lost, Infotainment automati-cally changes to the same FM station. The symbol(FM) is displayed after the station name.

When the corresponding DAB station can be re-ceived again, the station automatically changes fromFM to DAB.

› In the main menu Radio tap on Advanced settings Automatic DAB - FM switching .

Turn on/off automatic switching to a similar DABstationApplies to the DAB frequency range.

When the function is switched on and DAB stationbeing listened to is lost, Infotainment automaticallychanges to another DAB station with similar content.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings Switch to a similar station.

Media


▶ Do not save any important data or that which hasnot been backed up on the connected audio sour-ces. ŠKODA assumes no responsibility for lost ordamaged files or connected audio sources.

▶ When changing or connecting an audio source, thismay cause sudden changes in volume. Reduce thevolume before changing or connecting an audiosource.

▶ When connecting an audio source, the source in-formation messages can be displayed. These mes-sages must be observed and, if necessary, con-firmed.

▶ The national copyright laws that apply in yourcountry must be observed.

Overview


Or:

› Tap .

A Choose source

Manage files / multimedia database

Settings

Operating the Player

Operation - Basics

A Album image / symbol of the connected source

Tap: Start playback

64 Infotainment Swing › Media

Tap: Pause

Within 3 seconds of starting playback, tap: playthe previous song

After 3 seconds from the start of playback, tap:to play the current title from the beginning

Hold: fast rewind within the track

Tap: play the next track

Hold: fast forward within the track

Movement within the title is also possible by drag-ging the finger over the timeline.

Extended operationTurn repeat playback of the current track on/offTurn repeat playback of the current album/fold-er on/offTurn random playback of the current album/folder on/off

Limitation

NOTICEThe availability of some media operation functions isdependent on the connected source and the soft-ware being used, e.g. Bluetooth®.

Settings

Turn title playback including subfolders on/off› In the Media main menu, tap on Mix/Repeat including

subfolders.

Enable/disable playback of online media from anApple device› To turn on/off in the Media main menu, tap on

Include online media from an iPod.

Under the following conditions, media in the AppleiCloud is included in the list of available media.

✓ The mobile device is not connected using AppleCarPlay.

✓ The mobile device is connected to Apple iCloud.

Traffic› To turn on/off the traffic monitoring during the

playback of media files, go to the Media main menuand tap on Traffic programme (TP).

Disconnect the connected USB device safely

NOTICERisk of damage to the data on the connected USBdevice!To safely disconnect a USB device, proceed as fol-lows.› In the main menu, tap Media Remove USB safely .› Select the desired device.› Disconnect the USB device.


Supported sources and files

Supported sourcesSource Interface Type Specification File system

USBUSB 1.x; 2.x 3.x

or higher with USB2.x support

MSC

USB stick

FAT32exFATNTFS

HDD(without special

software)USB devices thatuse the USB massstorage support

protocol

MTP

Devices runningthe Android or

Windows Phoneoperating systemthat support theMedia Transfer

Protocol

AppleDevices with an

iOS operating sys-tem

HFS+

65Infotainment Swing › Media

Source Interface Type Specification File system

Bluetooth® player Bluetooth® -

Bluetooth® proto-cols

A2DP and AVRCP(1.0 - 1.6)

-

Apple iAP1 protocol is not supported by Infotainment.

Mobile device compatibilityIt is possible to check the ŠKODA web pages to see if Infotainment is compatible with the selected mobiledevice being tested. This check is carried out by using the following reference or by reading the QR code.

http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility

All information given is incidental and serves as information.

The ŠKODA AUTO company cannot guarantee full functionality and compatibility, e.g. due to a software up-date of the Infotainment and the mobile devices.

Supported audio filesCompression for-

matCodec type File exten-

sionMax. bit rate

[kbps]Max. sam-pling rate

[kHz]

Multi channels

MPEG

MPEG 1 Layer 3 mp3 32 - 320 32, 44, 48Mono, dual mono,

Stereo, JointStereo

MPEG 2 Layer 3mp3 8 - 160

16, 22, 24 Mono,Stereo, Joint

StereoMPEG 2.5 Layer 3 8, 11, 12

WMA

Windows MediaAudio 9 and 9.1

wma

8 - 384 8, 11, 12, 16,22, 32, 44,

48 Mono, stereo,Joint stereo

Windows MediaAudio 9.2

8 - 320

Windows MediaAudio 10

8 - 76832, 44, 48,

96

ADTSAAC LC

aac8 - 640

22, 24, 32,44, 48 Mono,

StereoAAC HE 8 - 320 16, 22, 24,32, 44, 48AAC HEv2 16 - 64

FLAC FLAC flac -

8, 11, 12, 16,22, 24, 32,44, 48, 64,

88, 96

Mono, stereo,5.1, 7.1

RIFF WAV wav 64 - 30728, 11, 12, 16,22, 24, 32,44, 48, 96

Mono,Stereo

SBC Bluetooth A2DP - 8 - 345 44, 48Mono, stereo,Joint stereo

For files in MP4 format, only the soundtrack playback is carried out.

Files that are protected by DRM- and iTunes® methods are not supported by Infotainment.

Supported playlistsCodec type File extension

M3U m3u

66 Infotainment Swing › Media



Codec type File extension

M3U8 m3u8PLS plsWPL wplASX asxPLA pls

Mobile device management

Overview

Using mobile device management, devices can beconnected, disconnected, and interchanged.

View mobile device management› Select mobile phone Tap .

Or:

› Tap Mobile devices .

Connected / Previously connected devices

Available devices

The device enables a connection via the Blue-tooth®“hands-free profile”The device is connected via the Blue-tooth®“hands-free profile”The device enables a connection via the Blue-tooth® audio profileThe device is connected via the Bluetooth® audioprofileThe device enables a SmartLinkconnection to bemade via Android AutoThe device enables a SmartLinkconnection to bemade via Apple CarPlayThe device enables a SmartLinkconnection to bemade via MirrorLinkRemove the device from the list previously con-nected devices

Mobile device and application limitations

Availability of featuresThe availability of certain features depends on thetype of mobile device, as well as that of the applica-tions installed.

A

B

Mobile device compatibilityIt is possible to check the ŠKODA web pages to seeif Infotainment is compatible with the selected mo-bile device being tested. This check is carried out byusing the following reference or by reading the QRcode.


All information given is incidental and serves as in-formation.

The ŠKODA AUTO company cannot guarantee fullfunctionality and compatibility, e.g. due to a softwareupdate of the Infotainment and the mobile devices.

Bluetooth® compatibility of mobile devicesDue to the large number of mobile devices, it is notpossible to guarantee total Bluetooth® compatibilitywith Infotainment. Bluetooth® compatibility dependson the Bluetooth® version as well as the implementa-tion of Bluetooth® protocols by the manufacturer ofthe mobile device.

Applications in mobile devicesMobile devices can be used to install applicationsthat allow you to view additional information on theInfotainment screen, or to operate the Infotainmentsystem.

Due to the variety of applications, as well as their on-going development, the available applications maynot function on all mobile devices. ŠKODA AUTO as-sumes no liability for their proper functioning.

The scope of available applications and their func-tionality is dependent on the type of Infotainment, aswell as the vehicle and country.

Information about the ŠKODA applicationsDetailed information on the ŠKODA applications canbe found on the website after reading the followingQR code or using the link.

http://go.skoda.eu/mobile-apps

67Infotainment Swing › Mobile device management





Connection set-up

Connect a mobile device to Infotainment› Find available Bluetooth® devices in the mobile de-

vice.› Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit.

The name of the unit can be found under the menuitem Bluetooth Name:.

› Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and thenconfirm.

Connect Infotainment to a non-paired mobile de-vice› Select mobile phone Tap .› Select the desired device in the list of available de-

vices.› Select the desired Bluetooth® profile.› Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then

confirm.› If two devices are connected to the Infotainment,

select the device to be replaced.

Connect Infotainment to a previously connectedmobile device› Tap on Select mobile phone.› Select the desired device from the list of previous-

ly connected devices.

The selected device is connected via the most re-cently used Bluetooth® profile.

› If two devices are connected to the Infotainment,select the device to be replaced.

SmartLink connectionInfotainment offers the option to establish the Smar-tLink connection with compatible mobile devices us-ing the following connection types.

Android AutoApple CarPlayMirrorLink

Mobile devices can be connected to the Infotain-ment via USB cable or Wi-Fi, as long as the mobiledevice supports it.

› Connect the mobile device to the Infotainment viaa USB cable or browse and connect to a wirelessnetwork.

› Tap the icon of the supported connection.

Telephone

Overview


Or:

› Tap .

If the menu Telephone is not displayed, checkwhether the mobile device is connected.

A Name of the connected phone▶ Tap: View the list of previously connected

phones

B Name of the telephone service provider

C Station buttons for preferred contacts

Change the main telephone with the additionaltelephone

Enter phone number

Contact list

Call lists

Switch on voice control of the connected phone

Settings

Conditions for connecting a telephone withInfotainment

✓ The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment andthe telephone need to be switched on.

The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment isswitched on in the menu item Bluetooth Bluetooth.

✓ Visibility of the Infotainment is switched on.

The visibility of the Infotainment is switched on inthe menu item Bluetooth Visibility:.

✓ The telephone is within signal range of the Info-tainment's Bluetooth® unit.

✓ The telephone is compatible with Infotainment.

Telephone operation

Enter telephone number› In the Telephone main menu, tap .› Enter the telephone number using the numeric

keypad that is displayed.

The displayed numeric keypad can also be usedfor searching for contacts.If, for example, the digits 32 are entered, contactswith the letter sequence DA, FA, EB etc. are dis-played next to the numeric keypad.

68 Infotainment Swing › Telephone

List of telephone contactsThe list of telephone contacts is imported from theconnected main telephone.

› Tap to display the contact list in the telephonemain menu .

› To find details within the list, tap Find.› Enter the details you wish to find.

› To establish a connection with a contact, tap thefunctional area showing the desired contact.

If a contact has multiple telephone numbers, selectthe telephone number from the displayed list.

› To display the details for a contact, tap .

Establish a connection to the voice mailbox num-ber› In the Telephone main menu, tap .

Telephone callDepending on the context of the telephone conver-sation, the following functions can be selected.

End connection set-up / reject incoming call /end callAnswer an incoming call / Return to the call onholdSwitch the ringer off / on

Hold a callSwitch the microphone off / on

Show details of the callerAnswer a call from the second telephone duringa call on the first telephoneThe ongoing call on the first telephone is termi-nated by accepting the call.

› To switch the call from the speakers to the tele-phone, go to the Telephone main menu and tap on

Hands-free .

› To switch the call tone from the telephone to thespeakers, tap .

Conference callA conference call is a joint telephone conversationwith a minimum of three and a maximum of six par-ticipants.

› Make the next call during an ongoing call / confer-ence.

Or:

› Accept a new incoming call by tapping the functionsurface .

› To start a conference call, tap the function surface.

Depending on the context, the following functionscan be selected during an ongoing conference call.

Hold conference, leave temporarily(the conference will continue in the background)Return to the held conference callSwitch the microphone off / on

/

/

/

End conference callShow details of the conference call

In the details of the conference call, depending onthe connected telephone, the following functionscan be selected.

Show details of the conference call partici-pantsEnd conversation with the conference call par-ticipantTalk to a participant outside of the conferencecall

Settings of the Infotainment telephonefunctions

Telephone-Infotainment-Connection typesThe way in which the telephone is connected de-pends on the number of phones currently connectedto the Infotainment.

▶ No telephone - The telephone is connected as amain telephone.

▶ One telephone - The telephone is connected as anadditional telephone.

▶ Two telephones - Select the telephone to be re-placed.

› To switch between the main telephone and thesupplementary telephone in the main menu, taptelephone .

Connect the telephone to Infotainment› Find available Bluetooth® devices on the phone.› Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit.



Connect Infotainment to a non-paired telephone -no telephone is connected› Tap on .

Or:

› Tap on .› Follow the instructions in the Infotainment screen.

Connecting Infotainment to a non-paired tele-phone - another telephone is connected› Tap on Select mobile phone .› Select the desired device from the list of available

devices.› Select the desired Bluetooth® profile.› Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then

confirm.

The telephone is connected as an additional tele-phone.

Or:

69Infotainment Swing › Telephone

› If two telephones are connected to the Infotain-ment, select the telephone to be replaced.

Connect Infotainment to a previously paired tele-phone› Tap on Select mobile phone.› Select the desired device from the list of previous-



Or:


Manage station buttons for favourite contacts

› To to save the desired station button, hold A .

› Select a contact from the list displayed.› If the contact contains several phone numbers, se-

lect the desired phone number.

› To display the menu for deletion go to the Tele-phone main menu and tap Manage favourites .

› To delete one station button, tap the desired listentry and confirm the deletion.

Or:

› To delete all station buttons, tap Tap All and confirmthe deletion.

Import telephone contactsAfter first connecting the main telephone with Info-tainment, telephone contacts will start to be impor-ted into the Infotainment memory.

Infotainment can import up to 2000 telephone con-tacts together with contact pictures. Each contactcan include max. 5 telephone numbers.

Depending on the type of telephone, import confir-mation may be required.

Update telephone contactsWhen re-connecting the telephone with Infotain-ment, an automatic update of the list is carried out.

› For a manual update of the list in the telephonemain menu, tap on User profile Import contacts.

Sort contacts in the phonebook› In the telephone main menu, tap on User profile

Sort by: and select the sort type.

RingerSome phones do not allow the use of the telephoneringer; instead, the Infotainment ringer is used.

› To set the Infotainment ringer in the telephonemain menu, tap on user profile Select ringtone.

› Select the ringtone.

Number for the voice mailbox› To set the voice mailbox number in the telephone

main menu, tap on user profile Mailbox number:.› Enter the number of the voice mailbox.

Simultaneous callsThis applies to some countries.

Depending on the connected telephone, it is possibleto answer the next incoming call and hold the previ-ous call.

› To switch on simultaneous calls, tap on telephone Parallel talks.

Wi-Fi

Functionality

Wi-Fi can be used for the SmartLink connection.

The Infotainment hotspot can connect up to 3 mo-bile devices.

› To display the list of connected mobile devices, tap Wi-Fi Connected devices .

Limitation

Restriction of the Wi-Fi connectionIn some countries, the WiFi connection is restric-ted for legal reasons. When crossing the border ofthe country in question, the connection with a mo-bile device connected via Wi-Fi can be ended orrestricted.

Find out about country-specific legal restrictions.If necessary, switch off the Wi-Fi manually.

Settings

Connect a mobile device to the Infotainment hot-spot› Turn on the Infotainment Wi-Fi hotspot in the

menu item Wi-Fi Wi-Fi hotspot.› Turn on the Wi-Fi on the mobile device.› In the list of available Wi-Fi devices, look for Info-

tainment Wi-Fi.

The name of the Infotainment is taken from themenu item Wi-Fi Network name:.

› Select the Infotainment hotspot and enter the re-quired password.

70 Infotainment Swing › Wi-Fi

The password for connecting to the Infotainmenthotspot is taken from the menu item Wi-Fi Network key.

› Confirm the connection.

Security level of the Infotainment hotspotThe security level is set at WPA2 and cannot bechanged.

Change password for connection to InfotainmenthotspotThe password must be a minimum of 8 and a maxi-mum of 63 characters.

▶ Tap Wi-Fi Network key.▶ Enter the password and confirm.

SmartLink

Functionality

SmartLink offers the ability to display and operatecertified applications from a connected mobile de-vice in the Infotainment screen.

Certification may be conditional upon the use of thelatest update to the particular SmartLink application.

Applications include, for example, apps for routeguidance, telephoning, listening to music, etc.

Mobile devices can be connected via a USB cable orWi-Fi.

Supported connection typesSmartLink supports the following connection types.

▶ Android Auto.▶ Apple CarPlay.▶ MirrorLink.

Overview of the SmartLink connection

Menu SmartLink› Tap .

Or:

› Tap .

A Previously connected device

B Currently connection device

Display information about SmartLink

Disconnection of the active connection


Settings in SmartLink menu

Android Auto

Overview of running applications, phone calls, re-ceived text messages and the like.

Switching on voice control (Google Voice)

Apple CarPlay

A List of available applications

B Depending on the duration of operation:▶ Tap: Return to the Apple CarPlay main menu▶ Hold: Turn on voice control (Siri)

MirrorLink

It is not possible to operate the application whiledriving

Return to the SmartLink main menu

List of running applications

Display the last running application in the connec-ted mobile device

Settings

71Infotainment Swing › SmartLink

Connection conditions

General connection conditions✓ The mobile device supports the following Smar-

tLink connection types: Android Auto. Apple Car-Play and MirrorLink.

✓ Mobile devices, as well as the type of Smar-tLinkconnection, are supported in the respectivemarket.

✓ Some connected mobile devices require the mo-bile device to be “unlocked”.

Conditions for Android Auto✓ The device to be connected must have Android

AutoSupport.

A list of devices, supported regions and applica-tions that the Android Auto connection supportscan be found on the websites of Google Inc..

✓ The Android Auto application needs to be instal-led on the mobile device.

✓ Some applications require the data connection inthe mobile device to be turned on.

Conditions for Apple CarPlay✓ The device to be connected must have Apple

CarPlaySupport.

A list of devices, supported regions and applica-tions that the Apple CarPlay connection supportscan be found on the websites of Apple Inc..

✓ Siri voice control is on.✓ The data connection is switched on in the mobile

device.

Conditions for MirrorLink✓ The device to be connected must have Mirror-

LinkSupport.

A list of devices and applications that the Mirror-Link connection supports can be found on thewebsites of Car Connectivity Consorcium®.

✓ The MirrorLink application needs to be installedon the mobile device.

✓ Some applications require the data connection inthe connected mobile device to be turned on.

Operation

Operation of the running MirrorLink applicationDisplay of control surfaces at the bottomDisplay of control surfaces at the topReturn to the MirrorLink main menu

Limitation

Restriction of the Wi-Fi connectionIn some countries, the WiFi connection is restric-ted for legal reasons. When crossing the border ofthe country in question, the connection with a mo-

bile device connected via Wi-Fi can be ended orrestricted.


Restriction of SmartLink applications while drivingFor safety reasons, operation of some SmartLinkap-plications while driving is not possible or is restric-ted.

SmartLink settings

Apple CarPlay - Connection via USB› Turn on the Infotainment.› Turn on the mobile device.› Connect the mobile device to the front USB input

using a cable.› Choose to connect via Apple CarPlay.

Apple CarPlay - Connection via Wi-Fi from Info-tainment› Turn on Bluetooth® and Bluetooth® visibility in the

mobile device.› Tap on mobile devices.› In the displayed list, look for and select the desired

device with the symbol .› Follow the instructions on the Infotainment screen

and confirm the Bluetooth® pairing.› If another device is connected to the Infotainment,


Apple CarPlay - Connection via Wi-Fi from mobiledevicesTo establish a connection, the following conditionsmust be met.

✓ The minimum iOS version is 9.✓ No other mobile device can be connected via

SmartLink.✓ Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® functionality is switched on

in the Infotainment system.

› In the mobile device, turn on the CarPlay function.› Press and hold the button on the multifunction

steering wheel.

The Infotainment screen displays a connectionmessage with the name of the Bluetooth® unit ofthe Infotainment.

› Find available Bluetooth® devices on the phone.› Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit.› If necessary, confirm the PIN.› In the Infotainment screen, select the connection

type Apple CarPlay.

Apple CarPlay – Disconnection› In the Apple CarPlay main menu, tap on the “ŠKO-

DA” functional area.› Tap on .

72 Infotainment Swing › SmartLink

Android Auto - Connection via USB› Turn on the Infotainment.› Turn on the mobile device.› Connect the mobile device to the front USB input

using a cable.› Choose to connect via Android Auto.

Android Auto - Connection via Wi-Fi from Info-tainment› Tap on mobile devices.› Select the desired device from the list of available

devices.› Select the Bluetooth®hands-free profile.› Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then

confirm.› If another device is connected to the Infotainment,

select the device to be replaced.› From the list of known devices, select the desired

device with the symbol.

Android Auto - Disconnection› In the main menu of Android Auto tap on “Re-

turn to ŠKODA”.› Tap on .

MirrorLink - Connection via USB› Turn on the Infotainment.› Turn on the mobile device.› Connect the mobile device to the front USB input

using a cable.› Choose to connect through MirrorLink.

MirrorLink - Connection via Wi-Fi from Infotain-ment› Turn on Wi-Fi and visibility in the mobile device.› Turn on the Infotainment Wi-Fi hotspot in the

menu item Wi-Fi Wi-Fi hotspot.› In the list of available Wi-Fi devices, look for Info-

tainment Wi-Fi.› Enter the required password.› With some mobile devices, communication be-

tween the device and the Infotainment in the noti-fication bar of the mobile device must be con-firmed.

› Tap on mobile devices.› From the list of available devices, select the de-

sired device with the symbol.

MirrorLink - Disconnection› In the MirrorLink main menu, tap .› Tap on .

Change to another device / connection typeInfotainment allows you to switch between currentlyconnected devices and the connection type.

› Tap on .› Select the desired device or connection type.

Infotainment Bolero


A Touchscreen

Control dial left▶ Press: Switch Infotainment on/off▶ Turn: Set volume

Control dial right▶ Press: Confirm menu item▶ Turn: select menu item/set value

Radio menu

Media menu

Overview of Infotainment menus

Phone menu

SmartLink menu▶ Tap: Display menu▶ Hold: Switch voice control of the SmartLink

application on / off


System

Limitation



Basic settings


menu.

▶ Time and date.▶ Language.▶ Units.▶ Restore factory settings.

73Infotainment Bolero › Infotainment overview




functions.













Safely disconnect the connected USB device

NOTICERisk of damage to the data on the connected USBdevice!To safely disconnect a USB device, proceed as fol-lows.› Tap Remove safely.› Select the desired device.› Disconnect the USB device.


Troubleshooting



System update




Screen

Overview

A Status bar




Operation





74 Infotainment Bolero › Screen



Settings




Keypad overview




Keypad example


▶ Tap: delete the last character▶ Hold: delete all characters one after the other

Show list of searched entries

B Keypad functional surfaces▶ Switch to lowercase/uppercase▶ / Switch to the language keypad▶ Switch to the numeric and character keypad▶ Show additional keyboard languages▶ Insert spaces

▶ Hold: Show more character variants▶ Move cursor to the left▶ Move cursor to the right▶ Confirm the entered characters

Numeric keypad

Keypad example






Operation



FindDuring the character input, a search for correspond-ing entries takes place.

The entry to be searched can be entered, includingdiacritics.

The keypad will only provide characters that matchthe stored entries.

› To display the searched entries, tap .




75Infotainment Bolero › Infotainment keyboard



Control centre

Overview




Or:

› Wait 5 seconds.


A Preferred features

B Setting up the instrument and key lighting

C Setting up the level of protection for personaldata

Settings




Radio

Overview


Or:

› Tap .

Analogue and digital radio reception

A Select frequency range

B Depending on the frequency rangeFM: Radio textDAB: Radio text: name of the station group

C Station buttons for preferred stations


Show favourites

Show information about the station


Settings

Infotainment supports digital radio reception inDAB and DAB+ formats.

List of available stations› Tap on .

Played stationStation stored on the presetsA traffic radio station is setDAB signal is not availableFilter the stations in the list according to theprogramme type, e.g. culture, music, sports, etc.FM: when the RDS function is switched onManual update of the station list

In the station list, information about the programtype and the type of the regional station can be dis-played.

Operation

Select station

76 Infotainment Bolero › Control centre



› To start automatic play press Scan or the rightrotary control .

› To end automatic play press or the right rotarycontrol .

Search for stations manuallyManual search is available for AM and FM stations.

› In the Radio main menu, tap .› For a consecutive search, tap or next to the

displayed frequency range scale.

Or:

› Hold down the scroll mark on the frequency rangescale and move it to the intended value.

Or:

› Turn the right rotary control.

Limitation






Settings





Delete favourites› In the Radio main menu , tap Delete presets.

› To delete one preset button for preferred stations,tap the desired station button and confirm the de-letion.

› To delete all preset buttons for preferred stations,tap All and confirm the deletion.

Buttons Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.

The variant for changing stations using buttons in the Radio main menu is set as follows.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Arrow buttons:.› Choose the change variant.

Traffic reception (TP) for FM stations on/offApplies to the FM frequency range.


Switch traffic reception for DAB stations on/offApplies to the DAB frequency range.

› In the Radio main menu, turn on menu item Traf-fic Radio (TP).

› In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings DABtraffic programme (TP) on/off.

Assign station logosApplies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.

Infotainment offers the option to assign logos fromthe pictures on an external source to the station but-tons.

For station logos, images in jpg, gif, png, bmp formatwith a maximum resolution of 500x500 pixels can beused.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Station logos:.› Tap the desired preset button.› Select the external source with the logo.› Find the desired logo and confirm.

Delete station logosApplies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Station logos:.› To delete a logo, tap the desired preset button and

confirm the deletion.› To delete all logos, tap on All and confirm the dele-

tion.

Switch on/off autostore of logos for stations to bestored to FavouritesApplies to FM and DAB frequency ranges.

When the function is switched on, a station logofrom the Infotainment memory is assigned when thestation is stored on a preset button.

› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings Autostore station logos.



77Infotainment Bolero › Radio



Automatic change of frequency to a regionallylinked FM stationApplies to the FM frequency range.

Infotainment provides the option of automaticallyswitching to a regionally linked FM station in case ofsignal loss of the FM station being listened to.

› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings RDS Regional:.


▶ Fixed - If there is a loss of signal, another stationmust be set manually.

▶ Automatic - automatic selection of the station withthe best signal reception.

If reception is lost in the given region, Infotainmentwill automatically set another available region.

Switch automatic frequency control (AF) on/offApplies to the FM frequency range.

When the function is switched on and the signal ofthe FM station currently being listened to is weak,Infotainment automatically sets the same station toa different frequency with a better signal.

› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings Automatic frequency control (AF).

Sort stations in the list of available stationsApplies to the FM frequency range.

▶ In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings Sort station list:.

▶ Select the sorting of stations in alphabetical orderor by group.


When the function is switched on and station pre-sets are displayed, detailed information about thebroadcast content of the station being listened to, orthe name of the station group for the DAB station, isdisplayed.



This menu item is only available in some countries.

› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings Radio Data System (RDS).

If the RDS function is disabled, the following menuitems in the FM transmitters settings are not availa-ble.

▶ Traffic programme (TP).▶ Radio text.

▶ RDS Regional.▶ Automatic frequency control (AF).▶ Regional station logos.▶ Sorting of stations in the list of available stations.

Switch program type display on / offApplies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges.

If the function is switched on, additional informationon the broadcast program type (PTY) is displayed inthe list of available stations. The programs can be fil-tered based on this information.

Switch additional DAB announcements on/offApplies to the DAB frequency range.

When the function is switched on, other announce-ments are received as traffic announcements. For ex-ample, weather news, sports reports, financial news,etc.

› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings Other DAB announcements.

Enable/disable automatic programme tracking of aDAB stationApplies to the DAB frequency range.

When the function is switched on and the DAB sta-tion is lost, Infotainment automatically changes tothe same station with a better signal in a differentDAB station group.

› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings DAB - DAB station tracking.

Turn on/off automatic switching from a DAB sta-tion to the same FM stationApplies to the DAB frequency range.

When the function is switched on and the DAB sta-tion being listened to is lost, Infotainment automati-cally changes to the same FM station. The symbol(FM) is displayed after the station name.

When the corresponding DAB station can be re-ceived again, the station automatically changes fromFM to DAB.

› In the main menu Radio tap on Advanced settings Automatic DAB - FM switching .

Turn on/off automatic switching to a similar DABstationApplies to the DAB frequency range.

When the function is switched on and DAB stationbeing listened to is lost, Infotainment automaticallychanges to another DAB station with similar content.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings Switch to a similar station.

78 Infotainment Bolero › Radio

Media






Overview


Or:

› Tap .

A Choose source


Settings


Operation - Basics

A Album image / symbol of the connected source

Tap: Start playback

Tap: Pause







Extended operationTurn repeat playback of the current track on/offTurn repeat playback of the current album/fold-er on/offTurn random playback of the current album/folder on/off

Limitation


Settings

Turn title playback including subfolders on/off› In the Media main menu, tap on Mix/Repeat including

subfolders.

Enable/disable playback of online media from anApple device› To turn on/off in the Media main menu, tap on

Include online media from an iPod.

Under the following conditions, media in the AppleiCloud is included in the list of available media.

✓ The mobile device is not connected using AppleCarPlay.

✓ The mobile device is connected to Apple iCloud.



Disconnect the connected USB device safely

NOTICERisk of damage to the data on the connected USBdevice!To safely disconnect a USB device, proceed as fol-lows.› In the main menu, tap Media Remove USB safely .› Select the desired device.› Disconnect the USB device.

79Infotainment Bolero › Media




USBUSB 1.x; 2.x 3.x


MSC

USB stick

FAT32exFATNTFS

HDD(without special


protocol

MTP



Protocol

AppleDevices with an

iOS operating sys-tem

HFS+




-

Apple iAP1 protocol is not supported by Infotainment.







sionMax. bit rate


[kHz]

Multi channels

MPEG

MPEG 1 Layer 3 mp3 32 - 320 32, 44, 48Mono, dual mono,

Stereo, JointStereo

MPEG 2 Layer 3mp3 8 - 160

16, 22, 24 Mono,Stereo, Joint

StereoMPEG 2.5 Layer 3 8, 11, 12

80 Infotainment Bolero › Media



Compression for-mat

Codec type File exten-sion

Max. bit rate[kbps]

Max. sam-pling rate

[kHz]

Multi channels

WMA


wma

8 - 384 8, 11, 12, 16,22, 32, 44,

48 Mono, stereo,Joint stereo


8 - 320


8 - 76832, 44, 48,

96

ADTSAAC LC

aac8 - 640

22, 24, 32,44, 48 Mono,

StereoAAC HE 8 - 320 16, 22, 24,32, 44, 48AAC HEv2 16 - 64

FLAC FLAC flac -

8, 11, 12, 16,22, 24, 32,44, 48, 64,

88, 96

Mono, stereo,5.1, 7.1

RIFF WAV wav 64 - 30728, 11, 12, 16,22, 24, 32,44, 48, 96

Mono,Stereo

SBC Bluetooth A2DP - 8 - 345 44, 48Mono, stereo,Joint stereo

For files in MP4 format, only the soundtrack playback is carried out.



M3U m3uM3U8 m3u8

PLS plsWPL wplASX asxPLA pls


Overview


View mobile device management› Select mobile phone Tap .

Or:

› Tap Mobile devices .

Connected / Previously connected devices

Available devices

The device enables a connection via the Blue-tooth®“hands-free profile”The device is connected via the Blue-tooth®“hands-free profile”The device enables a connection via the Blue-tooth® audio profileThe device is connected via the Bluetooth® audioprofileThe device enables a SmartLinkconnection to bemade via Android AutoThe device enables a SmartLinkconnection to bemade via Apple CarPlayThe device enables a SmartLinkconnection to bemade via MirrorLinkRemove the device from the list previously con-nected devices

A

B

81Infotainment Bolero › Mobile device management













Connection set-up





Connect Infotainment to a non-paired mobile de-vice› Select mobile phone Tap .› Select the desired device in the list of available de-

vices.› Select the desired Bluetooth® profile.› Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then



Connect Infotainment to a previously connectedmobile device› Tap on Select mobile phone.› Select the desired device from the list of previous-


The selected device is connected via the most re-cently used Bluetooth® profile.

› If two devices are connected to the Infotainment,select the device to be replaced.






Telephone

Overview


Or:

› Tap .

82 Infotainment Bolero › Telephone






A Name of the connected phone▶ Tap: View the list of previously connected

phones

B Name of the telephone service provider

C Station buttons for preferred contacts


Enter phone number

Contact list

Call lists

Switch on voice control of the connected phone

Settings


✓ The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment andthe telephone need to be switched on.

The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment isswitched on in the menu item Bluetooth Bluetooth.


The visibility of the Infotainment is switched on inthe menu item Bluetooth Visibility:.



Telephone operation



The displayed numeric keypad can also be usedfor searching for contacts.If, for example, the digits 32 are entered, contactswith the letter sequence DA, FA, EB etc. are dis-played next to the numeric keypad.


› Tap to display the contact list in the telephonemain menu .

› To find details within the list, tap Find.› Enter the details you wish to find.








Show details of the callerAnswer a call from the second telephone duringa call on the first telephoneThe ongoing call on the first telephone is termi-nated by accepting the call.


Hands-free .



› Make the next call during an ongoing call / confer-ence.

Or:

› Accept a new incoming call by tapping the functionsurface .

› To start a conference call, tap the function surface.

Depending on the context, the following functionscan be selected during an ongoing conference call.

Hold conference, leave temporarily(the conference will continue in the background)Return to the held conference callSwitch the microphone off / on

/

/

/

83Infotainment Bolero › Telephone

End conference callShow details of the conference call


Show details of the conference call partici-pantsEnd conversation with the conference call par-ticipantTalk to a participant outside of the conferencecall











Or:


Connecting Infotainment to a non-paired tele-phone - another telephone is connected› Tap on Select mobile phone .› Select the desired device from the list of available


confirm.


Or:


Connect Infotainment to a previously paired tele-phone› Tap on Select mobile phone.› Select the desired device from the list of previous-



Or:








Or:

› To delete all station buttons, tap Tap All and confirmthe deletion.





› For a manual update of the list in the telephonemain menu, tap on User profile Import contacts.

Sort contacts in the phonebook› In the telephone main menu, tap on User profile

Sort by: and select the sort type.

84 Infotainment Bolero › Telephone

RingerSome phones do not allow the use of the telephoneringer; instead, the Infotainment ringer is used.

› To set the Infotainment ringer in the telephonemain menu, tap on user profile Select ringtone.


Number for the voice mailbox› To set the voice mailbox number in the telephone

main menu, tap on user profile Mailbox number:.› Enter the number of the voice mailbox.




Wi-Fi

Functionality

Wi-Fi can be used for the SmartLink connection.

The Infotainment hotspot can connect up to 3 mo-bile devices.

› To display the list of connected mobile devices, tap Wi-Fi Connected devices .

Settings

Connect a mobile device to the Infotainment hot-spot› Turn on the Infotainment Wi-Fi hotspot in the

menu item Wi-Fi Wi-Fi hotspot.› Turn on the Wi-Fi on the mobile device.› In the list of available Wi-Fi devices, look for Info-

tainment Wi-Fi.

The name of the Infotainment is taken from themenu item Wi-Fi Network name:.


The password for connecting to the Infotainmenthotspot is taken from the menu item Wi-Fi Network key.




▶ Tap Wi-Fi Network key.▶ Enter the password and confirm.

Limitation



SmartLink

Functionality









Or:

› Tap .




85Infotainment Bolero › Wi-Fi




Android Auto



Apple CarPlay



MirrorLink





Settings







AutoSupport.





CarPlaySupport.



device.


LinkSupport.




Operation


Limitation


86 Infotainment Bolero › SmartLink




SmartLink settings




mobile device.› Tap on mobile devices.› In the displayed list, look for and select the desired









steering wheel.


› Find available Bluetooth® devices on the phone.› Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit.› If necessary, confirm the PIN.› In the Infotainment screen, select the connection

type Apple CarPlay.














MirrorLink - Connection via Wi-Fi from Infotain-ment› Turn on Wi-Fi and visibility in the mobile device.› Turn on the Infotainment Wi-Fi hotspot in the

menu item Wi-Fi Wi-Fi hotspot.› In the list of available Wi-Fi devices, look for Info-

tainment Wi-Fi.› Enter the required password.› With some mobile devices, communication be-

tween the device and the Infotainment in the noti-fication bar of the mobile device must be con-firmed.

› Tap on mobile devices.› From the list of available devices, select the de-

sired device with the symbol.




87Infotainment Bolero › SmartLink

Infotainment Amundsen


A Touchscreen

All menus

Favourite menus

Increase volume

Reduce volume

Depending on the status:▶ Infotainment switched off

▶ Tap: Turn on Infotainment▶ Infotainment switched on

▶ Tap: Switch sound off/on▶ Hold: Switch off Infotainment

Radio menu

Media menu

Phone menu

Navigation menu


System

Limitation



Basic settings


menu.

▶ Time and date.▶ Language.▶ Units.

▶ Restore factory settings.




functions.










Setting the HOME menu› To display another page of the HOME menu, press

the screen with two fingers and drag it to the leftor right.

To add the preferred menu, proceed as follows.

› Tap on an empty functional surface.

Or:

› Press and hold an occupied functional surface andthen tap on an empty functional area.

› Select a menu with the desired dimension of thefunctional surface.

› Tap on to exit edit mode.

To remove the preferred menu, proceed as follows.

› Press an occupied functional surface.› Tap on .› Tap on to exit edit mode.

88 Infotainment Amundsen › Infotainment overview




Troubleshooting



System update




Screen

Overview

A Status bar




Operation







▶ Change 2D/3D mapdisplay.

Dragging left or right with two fingers

▶ Display next page ofthe HOME menu.

Pulling apart with two fingers

▶ Enlarge image.▶ Zoom in to the map.

Pulling together with two fingers

▶ Minimize image.▶ Zoom out of the map.

Turn two fingers

▶ Rotate image.▶ Rotate the map.

Contactless gesture controlThe Infotainment menus marked with the symbolcan be controlled by hand gestures.

› Gesture control is ach-ieved by slowly movingthe hand back andforth approximately 8cm above the loweredge of the screen.

89Infotainment Amundsen › Screen

Depending on the setting, a recognized gesture canbe confirmed acoustically and animated.

Displaying operation help› Tap on .

Settings




Keypad overview




Keypad example


▶ Tap: delete the last character▶ Hold: delete all characters one after the oth-

er▶ Display functional surfaces for moving the

cursor in the input line▶ Move cursor to the left▶ Move cursor to the right

B Entries found▶ Show list

C Keypad functional surfaces▶ Change to lowercase

▶ Switch to first having an upper-case letter,followed by lower-case letters

▶ Switch to uppercase▶ / Switch to the language keypad▶ Switch to the numeric and character key-

pad▶ / Switch to other character variants▶ Show additional keyboard languages▶ Insert spaces▶ The next line▶ Hold: Show more character variants▶ Show password▶ Confirm the entered characters

Numeric keypad

Keypad example






Operation



FindWhen entering characters, corresponding entries aresearched for.

The entry to be searched for can be entered includ-ing diacritics.

The keyboard will only provide characters thatmatch the stored entries.

› To display searched entries tap .

90 Infotainment Amundsen › Infotainment keyboard






Voice control

Functionality

Voice control principleVoice control works according to the principle ofdialogue between the user and the Infotainment sys-tem.

The user says a voice command. The Infotainmentsystem responds or executes the voice command.

Advanced voice controlThe vehicle's advanced voice control enables the ve-hicle functions to be searched and operated online.

Advanced voice control understands fluent wholesentences. You do not need to use set commands orphrases.

The advanced voice control can, for example, searchfor special destinations or dictate SMS messages ifthe connected telephone makes this possible.

This function allows you to combine the search inthe online and offline data of the Infotainment. Thetransition between online and offline search is seam-less and imperceptible to the user.


✓ Ignition is switched on.✓ Infotainment is switched on.

Functional conditions of the advanced voice con-trolTo use the advanced voice control, the followingconditions must also be met.

✓ The vehicle supports the function.✓ The vehicle has Infotainment and functions that

can be controlled by the advanced voice control.✓ The ŠKODA Connect services are active.✓ The vehicle is within range of a contractual mo-

bile network, through which the connection toŠKODA Connect Services is ensured.

✓ The level of protection of personal data is set to Share my location .

Operation

Voice control process› To switch on voice control on the multifunction

steering wheel, press the button.

Or:

› Say the “OK Laura” activation command.

The prerequisite for recognising the activationcommand is the switched on menu item voice control active.

After switching on, the icon is displayed.

› Say a voice command.

During recognition of the voice command, the iconis displayed.

The Infotainment system then executes the voicecommand or plays the message. During the message,the icon is displayed.

After the execution of the voice command, voicecontrol is switched off.

Correcting a voice command› During voice command input, press the button

on the multifunction steering wheel and say a newvoice command.

Stopping voice controlStopping leaves more time for voice command input,e.g. for searching for a phone contact.

› Move your finger up or down over the Infotain-ment screen.

Or:

› Say the voice command “pause”.

Resuming stopped voice control› Press the button on the multifunction steering

wheel.

Or:

› Tap on in the Infotainment screen.

Stopping the played back message› Press the button on the multifunction steering

wheel.

Ending voice control› Press the button on the multifunction steering

wheel twice.

Or:

› Say the voice command “cancel” during voice com-mand input.

91Infotainment Amundsen › Voice control

Limitation

For some Infotainment languages, no voice control isavailable. The Infotainment system will indicate this.

The messages are generated by the Infotainmentsystem. Flawless clarity (e.g. road or city name) can-not always be guaranteed.

You cannot use voice control while a phone call is inprogress.

Settings

The following voice control functions are set in themenu Voice control.

▶ Confirmation tones.▶ Enable/disable use of the activation word.

Self help

Starting acoustic help› If the Infotainment system is expecting a voice

command, say “Help”.

The “Help” voice command can be issued repeatedlyfor further tips on voice control.

Displaying the help› Tap on .

Or:

› If Infotainment is expecting a voice command, say“Overview”.

Switch example voice commands display on / offThe system offers the option of displaying examplevoice commands after switching on the voice con-trol in the Infotainment screen.

› To turn voice control on/off, tap Show in Info-tainment system.

Control centre

Overview




Or:

› Wait 5 seconds.


A Display and management of the functional areasof preferred features

B Display list of information messages

C Preferred features

D Display of user account management

E Setting up the level of protection for personaldata

F Setting up the instrument and key lighting

Set functional areas of preferred features




Radio

Overview


Or:

› Tap .

Analogue and digital radio player› A Tap and select the desired frequency range.

› Tap and search for or select the desired station.› Tap on .

92 Infotainment Amundsen › Control centre

A Select source

B Station name

C Information about the broadcast content

D Station logos


Show favourites

Information about the station


Settings

List of available analogue and digital radio stations› Tap on .

Played stationStation stored on the presetsA traffic radio station is setThe DAB transmitter emits images which aredisplayed in the information to the stationManual update of the station list

In the station list, information about the programmetype and the channel identification of the regionalchannel can be displayed.

Web radio player› A tap and select a web radio station.

› Tap and search or select web radio.› Tap on .

A Select source

B Station name


D Station logos

List of web radio and podcasts

Show favourites

Information about the programme as well as thebroadcast content of the web radio

Settings

Podcast player› Tap A and select an online radio station.

› Tap and search for or select the desired pocast.› Tap .

A Select source

B Podcast name


D Podcast logo with the symbol

Tap: Start playback

Tap: Pause

Tap: Go back 15 secs

Tap: Go forward 15 secs

View episodes of the podcast being played

List of web radio stations and podcasts

Show favourites

Show information about the podcast

Settings

List of online radio stations and podcasts› Tap on .

Search for online radio stations and podcasts

Recently heard web radio and podcasts

100 most popular web radio stations dependingon the Infotainment language that has been set

Go to podcasts and select

93Infotainment Amundsen › Radio

Search and select web radio stations and pod-casts for the selected country

Search for and select web radio stations and pod-casts according to the selected language

Search and select web radio stations and pod-casts by genre of choice

See list of related podcasts based on content lis-tened to

See list of related web radio stations based oncontent listened to

The podcasts are shown in the displayed listswith the icon .

List of favourite stations and podcasts› In the menu Radio, tap on .

A Select source

B Radio text

C Station buttons for favourite stations and pod-casts

Operation

Select station



› To start automatic play , tap Scan.› To stop automatic play, tap .

Find stations manuallyManual search is available for AM and FM stations.

› To display the functional surface for the FM sta-tion, turn on the Advanced settings Show stations: turnon FM.

› In the Radio main menu, tap .› To search in sequence, tap or next to the dis-

played frequency range scale.

Or:

› Hold down the scroll mark on the frequency rangescale and move it to the desired value.

Limitation






Settings





Save channels from the list of web radio stationsand podcastsValid for web radio stations and podcasts

› Select a web radio station as the playback source.› Tap on .› Go to the desired web radio station or podcast and

select it.› Hold the line with the name of the desired station

or podcast.› Tap the desired preset button.

With podcasts, it is not possible to save the indi-vidual episodes.

Deleting favourites› In the Radio main menu, tap Delete presets.

94 Infotainment Amundsen › Radio

› To delete a station button for preferred stations,tap the desired station button and confirm the de-letion.

› To delete all presets for preferred stations, tap De-lete all and confirm the deletion.

Functional surfaces for analogue and digital ra-diosApplies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.

The variant for changing stations using the functionsurface in the Radio main menu is set as follows.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Arrow buttons:.› Select the variant for switching between the sta-

tions stored on the station buttons or the stationsstored in the list of available stations.

Function surfaces for web radio stations andpodcastsValid for web radio stations and podcasts

The variant for changing stations using the functionsurface in the Radio main menu is set as follows.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Arrow buttons:.› Select the variant for switching between the sta-

tions stored on the station keys or the last webstations and podcasts listened to.

Switch traffic reception (TP) for stations on/offApplies to FM and DAB frequency range.


Assign station logo from the Infotainment memoryApplies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges.

Infotainment offers the option of assigning logos,which are stored in the Infotainment memory, to thestations.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Station logos.› Select the desired station and logo.

Switching off the station logo displayApplies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Station logos.› Select the desired station and No station logo.

Activating / deactivating automatic station logoassignmentApplies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges.

When the function is switched on, a station logofrom the Infotainment memory is assigned when thestation is stored on a preset.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings Auto-select station logos.


When the function is switched on and the stationbuttons are displayed, you can see more information

about the content broadcast from the station towhich you are listening.






Switching additional announcements of the DABtransmitter on / offApplies to the DAB frequency range.

When the function is switched on, other announce-ments are received as traffic announcements. E.g.weather news, sports reports, financial news etc.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings Addi-tional DAB announcements.


The menu item is only available for some countries.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings RadioData System (RDS).

If the RDS function is disabled, the following menuitems in FM station settings are not available.

▶ Traffic programme (TP).▶ Radio text.▶ RDS Regional.▶ Automatic frequency change (AF).▶ Regional station logo.

Switch automatic switching to a similar DAB trans-mitter on / offApplies to the DAB frequency range.

When the function is switched on and there is signalloss from the DAB station being listened to, Infotain-ment automatically sets another DAB station withsimilar content.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings Switch to a similar station if reception is poor.

Displaying FM / DAB stations or FM stations in thelist of available stationsApplies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges.

Depending on the following setting, the stations ofthe selected frequency range are displayed in the listof available stations.

› In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings Showstations:.


▶ FM / DAB - the list shows available FM and DAB sta-tions.

95Infotainment Amundsen › Radio

▶ FM - the list shows available FM stations.

Sound quality of web radio stations and podcastsValid for web radio stations and podcasts.

› To adjust the sound quality in the main menu, tapRadio Audio Quality:.

› Choose low or high quality.

The quality you set affects the amount of data usedin the data connection.

Quality also depends on the speed and availability ofthe data connection.

If playback failure occur, reduce the sound quali-ty.

Media






Overview


Or:

› Tap .

Music player

A Choose source


Show favourites

Details about the track being played

Settings

Video player


Show favourites

Show video

Reduce image display

Enlarge image display

Settings


Operation - Basics

A Album image / symbol of the connected source▶ Tap: list available albums

Tap: Start playback

Tap: Pause







Advanced operationTurn on / off repeat playback of the currenttrack

96 Infotainment Amundsen › Media

Turn on / off repeat playback of the current al-bum / folderTurn on / off random playback of the current al-bum / folderSave the played track in the “My playlist” playlist

“My playlist” management▶ To display the playlist, tap .

▶ To manage the playlist tap in the displayed play-list.

The following activities can be carried out in playlistmanagement.

▶ Control playback.▶ Change the order of a title in the list by holding and

moving to the desired position.▶ Delete title.

Limitation


Settings

Manage favourites

› To save the desired functional area for favourites,hold A .

› Select one of the list entries available B .

› To clear in the main menu Media tap Manage fa-vourites .

› To delete a favourite, tap the desired list entry andconfirm the deletion.

Or:

› To delete all favourites Clear all and confirm the dele-tion.




97Infotainment Amundsen › Media


USBUSB 1.x; 2.x 3.x


MSC

USB stick

VFATFAT16FAT32exFATNTFS

HDD(without special


protocol

MTP



Protocol

Apple

Devices with theiOS operating sys-tem and the iAP2

protocol

HFS+




-







sionMax. bit rate


[kHz]

Multi channels

MPEG

MPEG 1 Layer 2mp2

32 - 384 32, 44, 48 Mono, stereo,Joint stereoMPEG 2 Layer 2 8 - 160 16, 22, 24

MPEG 1 Layer 3mp3

32 - 320 32, 44, 48 Mono, dual mono,Stereo, Joint

StereoMPEG 2 Layer 3

8 - 16016, 22, 24

MPEG 2.5 Layer 3 8, 11, 12

98 Infotainment Amundsen › Media



Compression for-mat

Codec type File exten-sion

Max. bit rate[kbps]

Max. sam-pling rate

[kHz]

Multi channels

WMA


wma

6 - 1928, 16, 22, 32,

44, 48, 96

Mono, stereo,Joint stereo


8 - 3848, 11, 16, 22,32, 44, 48,

96


8 - 768


8 - 320


32 - 76832, 44, 48,

96

ADTSAAC LC

aac 16 - 2048

22, 24, 32,44, 48

StereoAAC HE 16, 22, 24,

32, 44, 48AAC HEv2

MP4M4A LC

m4a16 - 400

22, 24, 32,44, 48

StereoM4A HE 16, 22, 24,

32, 44, 48M4A HEv2 16 - 64

OGG OGG-Vorbis ogg 8 - 5768, 11, 12, 16,22, 24, 32,44, 48, 96

Mono,Stereo

FLAC FLAC flac -

8, 11, 12, 16,22, 24, 32,44, 48, 64,88, 96, 192


RIFF WAV wav 64 - 30728, 11, 12, 16,22, 24, 32,44, 48, 96

Mono,Stereo

Monkey's Monkey's ape 8 - 192

SBC Bluetooth A2DP - 8 - 3458, 11, 12, 16,22, 24, 32,

44, 48


OPUS OPUS opus 6 - 2000 8 - 48Mono, stereo,Multichannel


Supported video filesCodec type File extension Max. recordings per second bit rate

[Mbit/s]

MPEG 1

mpgmpegm1vmPV

1.5

MPEG 2

mpgmpeg

psm2v

15

MPEG 4 (H.264) m4pmp4m4v

mp4vmov

50MPJEG

MPEG 4 (ISO)

Xvid Xvid 20

99Infotainment Amundsen › Media

Codec type File extension Max. recordings per second bit rate[Mbit/s]

WMV9wmvasf

50


M3U m3uM3U8 m3u8

PLS plsWPL wplASX asx

Images

Overview


Image viewer

A Select source

Manage files

Settings

Operation

Operation using functional areas

A View images▶ Show the next image▶ Show the previous image▶ Start slideshow

▶ Stop slideshow

B View image▶ Turn left▶ Turn right▶ Show in output size

Gesture control

▶ Show the next image.

▶ Show the previous im-age.

▶ Enlarge view.

▶ Zoom out.

100 Infotainment Amundsen › Images

▶ Turn 90 °.

Settings

The following Infotainment functions are set in the menu.

▶ Display image size.▶ Display image duration during the slideshow.▶ Slideshow repeat.


Supported sourcesSource Interface Specifica-

tionFile system

USB

USB 1.x; 2.x3.x

or higherwith USB

2.x support

USB stick VFATFAT16FAT32exFATNTFS

HDD(withoutspecial

software)

Supported filesCodec type File extension Max. resolution

[Mpx]

BMP bmp 4JPG; JPEG jpg; jpeg 4 (Progressive

Mode)64

GIF gif 4PNG png 4

The maximum supported image size is 20 MB.


Cybernetic security

Your vehicle contains components that are used toexchange information and data between the vehicleand the connected mobile devices or the Internet.

These components have security mechanisms thatminimise the risk of unauthorised access to the vehi-cle systems.

Regular software updates help reduce the risk of un-authorised access to vehicle systems and vehiclefunctions. The following guidelines must thereforebe observed.

› Use only media carriers, Bluetooth® devices, andmobile devices that contain no harmful data ormalware.

› Regularly update the software provided by ŠKODAAUTO.

We recommend having the system software andcomponents updated by a specialist company.

WARNINGRisk of an accident!Malware in the vehicle can influence certain vehiclefunctions or deactivate them if necessary.› If the vehicle reacts in an unusual way, immediately

reduce speed or stop the vehicle.› Seek the help of a specialist garage.

WARNINGMalware in the vehicle may gain unauthorised accessto the information and data of the vehicle, and on oc-casion, to connected mobile devices.

Overview


Display mobile device management› Tap on Manage mobile devices.

The device enables a connection via the Blue-tooth®“hands-free profile”The device is connected via the Blue-tooth®“hands-free profile”The device enables a connection via the Blue-tooth® audio profileThe device is connected via the Bluetooth® audioprofileRemove the device from the list previously con-nected devicesThe device enables a SmartLinkconnection to bemade via Android AutoThe device enables a SmartLinkconnection to bemade via Apple CarPlayThe device enables a SmartLinkconnection to bemade via MirrorLinkConnected / Previously connected devices

Available devicesA

B

101Infotainment Amundsen › Mobile device management













Connection set-up



The unit name can be determined by tapping Manage mobile devices device name:.


Connect Infotainment to a non-paired mobile de-vice› Tap on Manage mobile devices.› Select the desired device from the list of available




Connect Infotainment to a previously connectedmobile device› Manage mobile devices .

Or:

› Select mobile phone .› Select the desired device in the list of previously

connected devices.› Select the desired Bluetooth® profile.› If two devices are connected to the Infotainment,







Telephone

Overview


Or:

102 Infotainment Amundsen › Telephone





› Tap .


A Name of the connected telephone▶ Tap: Show list of previously connected phones

B Name of telephone service providers▶ If the symbol is displayed in front of the name,

roaming is active.

C Preset buttons for preferred contacts


Enter telephone number

Contact list

Text messages / emails

Call lists

Settings


✓ The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment andthe telephone needs to be switched on.

The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment isswitched on in the menu item Manage mo-bile devices Bluetooth.


The visibility of the Infotainment is switched on inthe menu item Manage mobile devices Visibility:.



Telephone operation



The displayed numeric keypad can also be usedfor searching for contacts.

If, for example, the digits 32 are entered, contactswith the letter sequence DA, FA, EB etc. are dis-played next to the numeric keypad.


› To display the contact list in the telephone mainmenu, tap .

› To search within the list, tap Enter contact.› Enter the details you wish to find.








Show details of the callerReject an incoming call using an SMS messageAnswer a call from the second telephone duringa call on the first telephoneThe ongoing call on the first telephone is termi-nated by accepting the call.


Hands-free .



› Make the next call during an ongoing conversation/conference.

Or:

› Accept a new incoming call by tapping the functionarea .

› To start a conference call, tap on the functionalarea .

/

/

103Infotainment Amundsen › Telephone

During an ongoing conference call, the followingfunctions can be selected depending on the context.

Hold the conference call and leave temporarily(the conference will continue in the background)Return to the conference being held

Switch the microphone off / onEnd the conferenceShow details of the conference call


Show details of the conference call participantsEnd conversation with the conference call par-ticipantConversation with a participant outside of theconference call

Send a text message› In the Telephone main menu, tap Messages

New text message.› Write a text message and confirm; a view of the

message is displayed.

The message can be edited when the text areawithin the view is tapped.

› Search for or select the recipient of the message.› Add more recipients or confirm selected recipi-

ents.› Tap Send.

Display received text messages› In the Telephone main menu, tap Messages

or .

› Messages that are received are displayed as indi-vidual messages or as messages in a conversation,depending on the following setting.

In order to switch the display of messages in aconversation on or off, go to the Telephone mainmenu and tap Show messages as a conversation.

› To switch on or off a graphic notification regard-ing the receipt of a new message, go to the Tele-phone main menu and tap New message notifications.

Infotainment offers the possibility to read thetext message (context-dependent) by means of thegenerated Infotainment voice if is tapped.

Send E-mails› In the Telephone main menu, tap on E-mails

New e-mail.› Write an e-mail and confirm that an e-mail is dis-

played.

The text can be edited when the text area withinthe view is tapped.

› Search for or select the recipient of the email.› Add more recipients or confirm selected recipi-

ents.› Enter the subject of the e-mail.

/

› Tap Send.

Show received e-mails› In the Telephone main menu, tap E-mails .› Select the desired e-mail.

› To switch on or off,a graphic notification regard-ing the receipt of a new e-mail, go to the Tele-phone main menu and tap New message notifications.








The unit name can be determined by the menuitem Manage mobile devices Device name:.



Or:


Connecting Infotainment to a non-paired tele-phone - another telephone is connected› Tap on Manage mobile devices.› Select the desired device from the list of available


confirm.


Or:


104 Infotainment Amundsen › Telephone

Connect Infotainment to a previously paired tele-phone› Tap on Manage mobile devices.

Or:

Tap on Select mobile phone.

› Select the desired device from the list of previous-ly connected devices.


Or:








Or:

› To delete all station buttons, tap Clear all and confirmthe deletion.





› For a manual update of the list in the telephonemain menu, tap on Import contacts.

Sort contacts in the phone book› In the telephone main menu, tap on Sort by: and

select the sort type.

RingerSome phones do not allow the use of the telephoneringtone; instead, the Infotainment ringtone is used.

› To set the Infotainment ring go to the Telephonemain menu and tap Select ringtone.


Number for the voice mailbox› To set the voice mailbox number go to the Tele-

phone main menu and tap on Mailbox number:.› Enter the number of the voice mailbox.

Turn the graphic notice regarding receiving a newmessage/email on or offWhen the feature is on, the new message icon ap-pears on the status bar and in the feature area forthe messages when a new message/e-mail is re-ceived.

› In the Telephone main menu, tap New message notifi-cations.




Wi-Fi

Functionality

The Wi-Fi can be used for the internet connection orfor the SmartLinkConnection.

The Infotainment hotspot can connect up to 8 mo-bile devices. At the same time, the Infotainment canbe connected to another hotspot.

› To display the list of connected mobile devices, tap Wi-Fi Infotainment system as hotspot Connected devi-

ces.

Overview of available hotspots

Display available hotspots› Tap Wi-Fi Wi-Fi:.

105Infotainment Amundsen › Wi-Fi

A Previously connected hotspots

B Available hotspots

C The hotspot supports the WPS connection

Currently connected hotspot

Delete information about the hotspot connection

Wi-Fi signal strength of the hotspot

The Wi-Fi signal from the hotspot is not available

Functional restriction

The Infotainment system can only be connected to ahotspot with WPA2 access protection.



Settings

Connect a mobile device to the Infotainment hot-spot› Turn on the Infotainment’s Wi-Fi hotspot in the

menu item Wi-Fi Infotainment system as hotspot Use as hotspot.

› Turn on the Wi-Fi on the mobile device.› In the list of available Wi-Fi devices, look for Info-

tainment Wi-Fi.

The name of the Infotainment is taken from themenu item Wi-Fi Infotainment system as hotspot Network name:.


The password for connecting to the Infotainmenthotspot is taken from the menu item Wi-Fi Infotainment system as hotspot Network key.


Connect Infotainment to the mobile device hot-spot› Turn on the Infotainment’s Wi-Fi unit in the menu

item Wi-Fi Wi-Fi: Turn on Wi-Fi on.› Select the desired hotspot in the list of available

hotspots.› Enter the password for connecting to mobile devi-

ces.

Infotainment stores passwords for previouslyconnected hotspots.


Activate/deactivate data transfer between the In-fotainment and the connected device› To turn data transmission on or off, tap

Wi-Fi Infotainment system as hotspot Connected devices .

Change the name of the Infotainment hotspot▶ Tap Wi-Fi Infotainment system as hotspot Network

name:.▶ Enter the name and confirm.


▶ Wi-Fi Infotainment system as a hotspot Network key .▶ Enter and confirm the password.

Quick connection of Infotainment to the mobiledevice hotspot› On the mobile device, turn on the hotspot, its visi-

bility, and the option for WPS connection.› Wi-Fi Wi-Fi: Tap WPS quick connection (WPS button).

Automatic WPS connection› Tap Wi-Fi Quick connection to Infotainment system.› In the mobile device, switch on the option for con-

nection via WPS.› Wait for the connection to be established and, if

necessary, confirm the respective messages.

Manual WPS connection› In the mobile device, switch on the option for con-

nection via WPS PIN.

The mobile device display will show the WPS PINfor connecting to the Infotainment.

› Tap Wi-Fi Quick connection to Infotainment system WPS PIN.

› Enter the WPS PIN in the Infotainment and con-firm.

› Wait for the connection to be established and, ifnecessary, confirm the respective messages.

Automatic connection using the QR code› Tap Wi-Fi Quick connection to Infotainment system.

106 Infotainment Amundsen › Wi-Fi

› In the mobile device, switch on the option for con-nection via QR Code.

› With the mobile device, read the QR code dis-played on the Infotainment screen.

› Wait for the connection to be established and, ifnecessary, confirm the respective messages.

Tips for a perfect connection

▶ Keep only the hotspot to be connected switchedon and switch off the other hotspots.

▶ Delete unused hotspots. This shortens the time re-quired to establish a connection.

▶ For some hotspots, the connection takes longer, sowait for the connection to finish.

▶ If the connection is interrupted, recheck the availa-ble hotspots and repeat the connection.

SmartLink

Functionality















Android Auto



Apple CarPlay



MirrorLink





Settings

107Infotainment Amundsen › SmartLink







AutoSupport.





CarPlaySupport.



device.


LinkSupport.




Operation


Limitation





Restriction of the navigation functionIf route guidance is currently being carried outthrough Infotainment, this is ended when you startroute guidance in the Apple CarPlay application.

If there is route guidance in the Apple CarPlay appli-cation, it is ended by starting the destination guid-ance using Infotainment.

SmartLink settings




Apple mobile device.› Tap on Manage mobile devices.› In the displayed list, look for and select the desired









steering wheel.


› Find available Bluetooth® devices on the phone.› Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit.

108 Infotainment Amundsen › SmartLink

› If necessary, confirm the PIN.› In the Infotainment screen, select the connection

type Apple CarPlay.

















Navigation

Navigation announcements

Infotainment route guidance takes place usinggraphic driving recommendations and navigation an-nouncements.

The navigation announcements are generated by theInfotainment system. Navigation announcementclarity (e.g. road or city name) cannot always beguaranteed.

Repeat the last navigation announcement› Tap on .

Turn off navigation announcements› Tap on .

Navigation overviews


Map overview

A Vehicle position

B Route

C Route view

End route guidance

D Display the destination input and route viewmenu

E Traffic obstruction

F Following driving recommendation

G POI

H Change map orientation▶ North-facing 2D map▶ 2D map facing the direction of travel▶ 3D map facing the direction of travel

I Road signs for the affected section of the route

Find destination

Centre the map on the vehicle position

Show settings menu

Switch off navigation announcements

Repeat the last navigation announcement

J Display the map depending on the following set-ting▶ Auto - Map in day / night mode depending on the

vehicle lighting currently switched on▶ Day - Map in day mode▶ Night - Map in night mode

109Infotainment Amundsen › Navigation

K Navigation in the digital instrument cluster

L End route guidance

Display the entire route

Settings

Map display in the digital instrument clusterThe map can be displayed in the digital instrumentcluster or on the Infotainment display.

› To change the display tap Navigation in themenu.

Find destination› Tap .

A Input line

B List of recently searched destinations

C POI categories› Tap: search for the selected category

Show destination list

Enter destination via address / find destination

Select the destination you are looking for› Enter the details for the destination search.› Select the desired destination.

Destination details are displayed with the option ofstarting route guidance.

Selecting the destination entered via the address› Tap on .

A menu for entering the destination via the ad-dress is displayed.

› Enter the required information.


List of stored destinations› Tap on .

A List of stored destinations

B Select category of stored destinations▶ - Favourites▶ - Last destinations▶ - Telephone contact destinations

Selecting the stored destination› Select the category of stored destinations.› Select the desired destination.


Recommended destinations› Tap on .

A North-facing vehicle position

B Traffic obstruction

Delete the recommended destination

The view can display up to 5 recommended destina-tions in the following categories.

▶ Home address destination.▶ Business address destination.▶ Favourites.▶ Last destinations.

Destination alignment depends on the direction inrelation to the current vehicle position. The function-al surface with the destination displays informationabout the estimated travel time to the destination.

If the vehicle has active online services and there is atraffic obstruction on the route to the destination,the traffic obstruction icon will be displayed.

110 Infotainment Amundsen › Navigation

Delete the recommended destination› Touch the functional surface for the recommended

destination and swipe left.› Tap on .

Selecting destination by tapping the map point› Tap the desired item or the POI icon in the map.

A Show destination details with the following pos-sible settings▶ - Save destination as a favourite▶ - Delete favourites▶ - Set destination as a starting point for

route guidance in demo mode

B Start direct route guidance

C Route calculation

Route calculation

A Current vehicle position

B Proposed fastest route

C Alternative routes

D Destination position

E 15 s time countdown before automatic start ofthe route guidance› Tap: Interrupt time countdown

F Start route guidance

Show information on the selected route

Set parameters for route calculation

Route overview› Tap on .

A Information on current vehicle position

B Final route destinationTap: the following menu items can be selected.

› Show on map› Stop route guidance

C Destination provided by Infotainment on therouteTap: the following menu items can be selected.

› Show on map› Add stopover destination

D Route stopoverTap: the following menu items can be selected.

› Show on map› Delete

E Traffic obstruction on the routeTap: the following menu items can be selected.

› Show on map› Avoid

F Route view

Changing route destinationsIn the route overview, it is possible to exchange thedestination and the intermediate destinations witheach other and thus change their order.

› Hold the line with the desired destination until thefunctional surface for the destination becomesfree.

› Move the destination to the desired position andrelease the functional surface.

The route is re-calculated.

Overview of traffic densityWhen ŠKODA online services are activated, trafficdensity information can be displayed in the form ofthe following colour scale in the route view F .

Low density High density

Traffic density information is not available

111Infotainment Amundsen › Navigation

Touch operation

Gesture control

▶ Move the map.

▶ Enter destination bytapping the map item.

▶ Switch 2D/3D map dis-play.

▶ Zoom in to the map.

▶ Zoom out of the map.

▶ Rotate the map.

Limitation

Infotainment may give incorrect driving recommen-dations if the road conditions or the traffic do notmatch the navigation data. This can lead to the routeguidance being carried out using a different route orproposing a change of direction in a one-way street.

Information for updating the navigation data must berequested from a ŠKODA partner.

Settings

Avoiding traffic obstructionsIf the function is switched on and the Infotainmentreceives information about a traffic obstruction onthe route from online traffic information, the route isrecalculated.

Infotainment may suggest a detour to avoid trafficobstructions, depending on the following settings.

› Tap Route guidance Avoid traffic congestion.› Select the desired menu item.

Showing information on the destination / waypointThe status line displays information on the distanceand travel time to the destination, depending on thefollowing setting.

› Tap Route guidance Show information for:.› Select the desired menu item for the destination

type.

Showing arrival time information in the destina-tion / driving timeThe status line displays information on the traveltime depending on the following setting.

› Tap Route guidance Time display:.› Select the desired menu item.

Switching display of country-specific speed limitson / offWhen the function is switched on, the country-spe-cific speed limits are displayed when crossing nation-al borders.

› Tap Route guidance Country information at border crossings.

Switching the display of road signs on motorwaysand expressways on / offWhen the function is switched on, Infotainment dis-plays traffic and information signs on motorways andexpressways.

› Tap Route guidance Information signs on motorways and dualcarriageways.

Switching the fuel warning on / offWhen the function is switched on and the fuel sup-ply reaches the reserve area, a warning message ap-pears with the option of going to the nearest petrolstation.

› Tap Route guidance Fuel warning.

Switching the speed limit warning on / off› Tap Route guidance Road signs.› Set the note type and the value for exceeding the

permissible speed.

Settings for trailer operationTo calculate the correct route for trailer operation,switch on trailer inclusion.

› Tap Route guidance Trailer Include trailer.

112 Infotainment Amundsen › Navigation

Set the maximum speed for trailer operation to cor-rectly calculate the route time.

› Tap Route guidance Trailer Maximum speed for trailers.› Set the maximum speed for the trailer.

Setting navigation announcements› Tap navigation announcements.› Select and set the desired menu item.

Show preferred POI categoriesFavourite POI categories are displayed on the mapand provided in the destination search.

› Tap Basic functions Define preferred POI categories.› Set favourite categories.

Setting home addressThe defined destination of the home address is dis-played in the overview of recommended destina-tions.

› Tap Basic functions Enter home address.

Setting business addressThe defined destination of the business address isdisplayed in the overview of recommended destina-tions.

› Tap Basic functions Enter business address.

Switching demo mode on / offIn demo mode, the route guidance from the startingpoint of the demo mode to the selected destinationis simulated.

When the function is switched on, Infotainment is-sues a query before the start of route guidance as towhere whether the route guidance should be carriedout in the normal way or in demo mode.

› Tap Basic functions Demo mode.

Defining the starting point of the demo mode› Select or locate the desired destination to be the

starting point of demo mode.› In the displayed destination details, tap More .

Updating the navigation database

Information for updating the navigation databasemust be requested from a ŠKODA partner.

Automatic updateInfotainment automatically updates when the fol-lowing conditions are met.

✓ The “Infotainment Online” online services are ac-tivated.

✓ An update of the navigation database for the cur-rent vehicle position or route destination is availa-ble.

Determining the navigation database version› Tap System information.

Online Services

ŠKODA Connect

Regulations

The rights and obligations of the contracting partieswith regard to the provision of these services areregulated in an independent agreement. Current le-gal documents regarding the ŠKODA Connect serv-ices can be found on the ŠKODA Connect Portal andthe ŠKODA Connect application.

Functionality

ŠKODA Connect services allow you to connect thevehicle to the online world. They thus represent anextension of the vehicle and Infotainment functions.

The ŠKODA Connect services are not part of the ve-hicle's equipment. These will be published separatelyon the ŠKODA Connect Portal website, in the ŠKO-DA Connect application or in Infotainment, if Info-tainment allows this.

The offer of ŠKODA Connect services depends onthe type of vehicle and its trim level, Infotainmentand country.

ŠKODA Connect websiteThe ŠKODA Connect website contains e.g. currentinformation on the ŠKODA Connect services, the linkto that ŠKODA Connect Portal or the option todownload the ŠKODA Connect application.

The website is opened after reading the followingQR code or the link.

http://go.skoda.eu/skoda-connect

ŠKODA Connect Portal websiteThe ŠKODA Connect Portal website enables, for ex-ample, user registration, ordering of ŠKODA Con-nectservices, service management or remote accessto the vehicle.

The website is opened after reading the followingQR code or the link.

http://go.skoda.eu/connect-portal

ŠKODA Connect applicationThe ŠKODA Connect application enables, for exam-ple, user registration, ordering of ŠKODA Connectservices or remote access to the vehicle.

113Online Services › ŠKODA Connect





The application can be downloaded to the mobile de-vice after scanning the following QR code or link.

http://go.skoda.eu/skodaconnectapp

Conditions

Terms of use of the ŠKODA Connect services✓ A main user is registered in the vehicle.✓ The ŠKODA Connect services are active.✓ A user currently logged in is authorized to use the

ŠKODA Connect services.✓ The protection level set for sending personal data

enables the use of ŠKODA Connect services.

Availability of the ŠKODA Connect servicesAvailability depends on the following conditions.

▶ Cellular networks are available, through which theconnection to the ŠKODA Connect services is en-sured.▶ The availability, the functionality, the connection

speed and the technology of the mobile networkcan vary in the respective countries and dependon the mobile network operator.

▶ In areas where this is insufficient signal, e.g. in un-derground garages, functionality may be limited.

▶ The ŠKODA Connect services are available for yourvehicle, Infotainment and the respective country.▶ You check availability on the following website

ŠKODA Connect.

http://go.skoda.eu/skoda-connect-availability

Availability status of the ŠKODA Connect servicesThe availability of the services is indicated by the col-our of the symbol in the status bar on the Infotain-ment screen.

▶ White - ŠKODA Connect services are available.▶ Grey - ŠKODA Connect services are not available.

User registration and activation of theŠKODA Connect services

Functionality

User registration will provide you with a ŠKODA IDuser account that can be used in all ŠKODA applica-tions and services.

Users can register for the ŠKODA Connect servicesat the following locations.

▶ ŠKODA Connect Portal website.▶ ŠKODA Connect application.▶ Infotainment, if it supports this function.

When registering, create an S-PIN.You will need the S-PIN to register for certain ŠKO-DA Connect services as well as to register for theprotected user account.

Settings

Registration and activation of online servicesApplies to Infotainment Swing and Bolero.

› Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.› ŠKODA Connect (online services) Registration .› Enter and confirm the registration PIN received

when carrying out user and vehicle registration onthe ŠKODA Connect Portal website or in the ŠKO-DA Connect application.

› Wait for the message Vehicle activation complete. to be dis-played.

› Confirm any messages on the screen.

Register users in InfotainmentApplies to Infotainment Amundsen.

› Switch on the Infotainment and in the welcomewindow that appears, tap Switch users Tap Register andfollow the instructions on the screen.

Or:

› Tap New user Tap Register and follow theinstructions on the screen.

To complete user registration, access to the e-mail box entered during registration is required.

Activate ŠKODA Connect services when register-ing the main userAfter the main user has been registered, the Info-tainment prompts you to activate ŠKODA Connectservices.

To complete the activation, it is necessary to havetwo original vehicle keys with you.

› Follow the instructions in the Infotainment screen.

Activate ŠKODA Connect services of another reg-istered user› Tap Become main user .› Follow the instructions in the Infotainment screen.

114 Online Services › User registration and activation of the ŠKODA Connect services





Setting personal data protection

Personal data

Personal customer data is collected, processed andused by ŠKODA AUTO in accordance with the re-quirements of the generally binding legal provisions.

The current personal data protection policy can befound on the following website.

http://www.skoda-auto.com/other/personal-data

As a contracting party with regard to the use of theŠKODA Connect services, you must ensure the pro-tection of personal data and the right to privacy.

Inform the vehicle user and passengers that the vehi-cle is transmitting user data and using localizationservices. Failure to provide information can violatethe rights of vehicle users and passengers.

Localisation services include, for example, informa-tion on the last parking position, area notification orspeed notification.

If the passengers do not agree to the use of the lo-calization services, switch off the services by settingthe respective protection level for personal data.

Functionality

User and vehicle data as well as information from thelocalization services are sent when using the ŠKODAConnect services.

The level of protection for personal data set influen-ces what is sent.

The set level of protection for personal data influen-ces data transmission using eSIM. This does not af-fect data transmission of a device connected viaWLAN.

Settings

The legally required services, e.g. emergency call,cannot be switched off.

Every vehicle user can set the protection level ofpersonal data.

The level of protection of personal data is linked tothe user account. After the user has logged on, this isset according to the level last set.

it is necessary to activate localisation services for thefull function of some ŠKODA Connect services.

Settings in the control centre

› Open the Infotainmentcontrol centre by hold-ing down the bar at thetop of the screen andpulling it down.

Display example in Infotainment Amundsen

A Tapping the icon displays a menu for setting theprotection level of personal data.

Tap Set-up in user management› Privacy and service management .› Set the desired level of protection of personal da-

ta.

Maximum privacy▶ All ŠKODA Connect services other than the serv-

ices you are currently using are switched off.▶ All localization services are switched off. The vehi-

cle position information is not shared.▶ Information transmission via eSim is switched off.▶ No online updates available.

No location▶ All localization services ŠKODA Connect are

switched off. The vehicle position information isnot shared.

▶ Information transmission via eSim is switched on.▶ All functions that require a connection via eSIM are

active.

Use location▶ Localization services ŠKODA Connect are enabled.

Information on vehicle position is not provided toother people.

▶ Information on the vehicle position is not availableon the ŠKODA Connect Portal web pages and inthe ŠKODA Connect application.


active.

Share my location▶ Localization services ŠKODA Connect are enabled.

The vehicle position information is available for allservices which need to know the vehicle’s position.

115Online Services › Setting personal data protection




▶ Information on the vehicle position is available onthe ŠKODA Connect Portal web pages and in theŠKODA Connect application.


active.

Collection of anonymised dataWhen the protection level of personal data is set Use location and Share my location the vehicle can collectand send anonymised data to improve the servicesof selected third parties.

It is exclusively anonymous data without any connec-tion to the specific vehicle, the vehicle owner or oth-er authorized users.

User management


When buying an older vehicle with ŠKODA Connectservices, it is possible that the services are active andthe main user is the previous owner of the vehicle.The previous owner may also be able to control thevehicle functions and receive information about theusers and the vehicle.

Therefore, we recommend removing the previousmain user. Then, log in with your own user accountand set yourself as the main user of the vehicle.

If you register a new user and choose yourself as themain user during registration, the previous main userwill be automatically overwritten.

The type of user and vehicle information to besent can be influenced by setting the protection levelof personal data.

Functionality

User accountsUser Management displays the accounts of the lastactive users. The following activities can be carriedout in user management.

▶ Select user account.▶ Register users.▶ Activate ŠKODA Connect services.▶ Add and remove user accounts.▶ Set main users.▶ Set account security.

Overview

Main userThe main user provides a registered user with activa-ted ŠKODA Connectservices and a vehicle associ-ated with his account.

The main user can take full advantage of the person-alisation features.

The main user has full control over the settings andoperation of the vehicle.

All settings are saved in the main user's personal on-line account.

User with a ŠKODA Connect online accountThe user was not selected by the main user, but hashis own ŠKODA Connect online account.

The user can take full advantage of the personalisa-tion features.

All settings are saved in the registered user's person-al online account.

GuestA guest account is anonymous and will in no waysynchronise with ŠKODA Connect services.

All changes to settings related to this account arestored exclusively in the vehicle.

Conditions

The following conditions must be met for unlimiteduse of the management of user accounts and theirsynchronization with online accounts.

✓ A main user with active ŠKODA Connect servicesis registered in Infotainment.

✓ The ŠKODA Connect services are available.

Operation

User loginWhen the ignition and Infotainment are switched on,the introductory login screen for the last user ac-count used is displayed.

The initial login screen cannot be skipped. With-out registering, the Infotainment cannot be used.

› Confirm login.

When you log in to a secure user account, enterthe S-PIN and confirm the login.

Or:

› Select the menu item for switching user.

A menu containing available users is displayed.› Select the desired account.› When you log in to a secure user account, enter

the S-PIN and confirm the login.

116 Online Services › User management

Or:

› Select the menu item for switching user.

A menu containing available users is displayed.› If you are a new user, tap New user to log in the user.› Follow the instructions in the Infotainment screen.

Log in to the protected user accountSome user accounts can be protected. Protected ac-counts are shown in the user list with the icon .

To log in to the protected user account you need theS-PIN created when creating the user account onthe ŠKODA Connect Portal website, in the ŠKODAConnect application or when registering the user inInfotainment.

A User name

B Turn off logging in to the account using the S-PIN

C Display of user account management

Display information about the S-PIN

Display information about restoring the S-PIN

User verification by entering the S-PIN can beswitched on/off in the menu item Pro-tect user profile Protect user profile with S-PIN will be switchedon/off.

Restore S-PINYour S-PIN can be restored on the ŠKODA ConnectPortal website or in the ŠKODA Connect application.

› After restoring the S-PIN, register again for thecorrect functioning of the ŠKODA Connect appli-cation in the vehicle as the main user.

› If you are the main user in several vehicles, registeragain in each vehicle.

Log out userApplies to Infotainment Swing and Bolero.

When the ignition is switched off, the logout screenis displayed and the user is automatically logged off.

Settings

User management› Tap .

Details of the currently selected user▶ - A user account protected by the S-PIN

Switch to another user / enter a new user

Settings

A Online synchronization of the user account withinformation about the last synchronization

Tap Become main user› Tap Become main user and follow the in-

structions on the screen.

Delete user› To display the user accounts, tap De-

lete users .› To delete the user, select the user and confirm the

deletion.

Deleting the main user account will delete theshared user accounts.

Delete the current user account› Tap Delete user profile .› Confirm the deletion.

Delete all usersResetting the Infotainment to the factory settingswill delete all user accounts.

› Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.› Tap .› Restore factory settings select and confirm the reset.

To check the factory reset was successful, werecommend that you check the deletion of the useraccounts and the main user account.

Personalisation

Usage

Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.

The personalisation service allows you to set, saveand restore vehicle settings.

The personalisation service is connected to the useraccounts. Every change to the configured personal-ised functions is automatically saved in the activeuser account.

117Online Services › Personalisation

If the vehicle is within range of a contractual mobilephone network, personalisable settings are stored inthe ŠKODA ID online user account after the ignitionis switched off.

By registering for a user account in another vehicleof the ŠKODA brand, the personalisable functionsassociated with the user account are set dependingon the vehicle type, equipment and Infotainment.

Settings


Switch personalisation service on / off› Privacy settings and manage services .› In the displayed list of online services, select the

service personalisation.› Switch the service off / on.

Management of online services

Usage

The following activities can be carried out in servicemanagement.

▶ Set up protection of personal data.▶ Show list of available services.▶ Receive information about the status of the serv-

ices.▶ Receive information about the validity of the serv-

ices.▶ Switch use of services on / off.

Connection status of the online services

The connection status of the ŠKODA Connect onlineservices is indicated by an icon in the status bar onthe Infotainment screen.

A The ŠKODA Connect online services are availa-ble.

B The ŠKODA Connect online services are notavailable.

C Configured protection level of personal data

Maximum privacy

No position data

Use my position

Share my position

Conditions

✓ A main user with active ŠKODA Connect servicesis registered in Infotainment.

✓ The ŠKODA Connect services are available.

Operation

Show list of online services› Tap Privacy settings and manage services .

Show details of services› Select the desired service from the list of online

services.

The details of the service may contain the followinginformation and functions.

▶ Status of the service.▶ Reason why a service is unavailable or who turned

it off.▶ Name of the group of online services in which the

respective service is contained.▶ Expiry date of the service's validity.▶ Switch use of the activation word on/off.

Settings

Switch on/off use of the service› Tap Privacy settings and manage services .› Select the desired service from the list of online

services displayed.› Switch the desired service on / off.

The use of the service applies to all user ac-counts. The service can only be used if it is available.

eSIM data connection

Usage


It is possible to use the prepaid e-SIM data connec-tion for ŠKODA Connect services.

The data connection can be shared with another 8connected devices using WLAN.

Further information on the function of the data con-nection, user registration, availability of the data con-nection and an overview of the data plans and coun-tries, with the option to purchase them, can be foundon the following website.

118 Online Services › Management of online services

https://skoda.cubictelecom.com

Operation


Display ŠKODA Connect data plans› Data connection Data plans .

The following information is displayed in the over-view.

▶ Overview of the purchased packages.▶ Use of the data plans.▶ Period of validity of the package.

The validity of the plan expires when the plan isfully used or when the period of validity expires.

Settings


Switch data connection of the ŠKODA Connectservices on / off› Data connection Integrated data connection (eSIM) .

Online System Update

Usage


The online update enables a software update of theconnectivity unit (OCU) and the Infotainment.

The Infotainment automatically indicates a possibleonline update by showing a message on the Infotain-ment screen. Infotainment also offers the option ofdownloading the update or postponing the down-load process.

Further information on online updates, their availabil-ity in the respective countries, on supported vehiclesand Infotainment systems can be found on the fol-lowing website.

http://go.skoda.eu/online-system-update

If the download of the update is postponed, theoption to download the update will be offered againthe next time the ignition and Infotainment areswitched on.

Operation


Download update› Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.› Follow the instructions and information displayed

on the Infotainment screen.› Confirm the download in the Infotainment.

The download process can be cancelled at any time.When the ignition is switched on again, the down-load process is automatically restored.

The download time depends on the speed and quali-ty of the mobile network, the file size, and the typeof update.

Install update

WARNINGThe connectivity control unit (OCU) or Infotainmentmay not function during installation.In this case, there are no emergency calls, no auto-matic emergency calls in the event of an accidentand none of the ŠKODA Connect services will beavailable.› Install the update while the vehicle is stationary.

› Park the vehicle safely.› Switch off the ignition.› Confirm the software installation on the Infotain-

ment screen.

It is possible to leave the vehicle and the installa-tion will continue.

› Switch on the ignition and Infotainment after in-stallation or return to the vehicle.

› Check the message regarding successful installa-tion on the Infotainment screen.

The emergency call indicator light does not lightup during installation.

After a successful installation, the emergency callindicator lamp lights up green.

Conditions


The following conditions must be met for a success-ful update.

✓ The ignition and the Infotainment are switchedon.

✓ The ŠKODA Connect services are active.✓ The ŠKODA Connect services are available.✓ The online update is available in the relevant

country.✓ The charge state of the vehicle battery is suffi-

cient.

119Online Services › Online System Update





Self help


If you experience any of the following events whiledownloading the update or during installation, con-tact a specialist company.

▶ A message appears in the Infotainment screen re-garding an incorrect download or installation of theupdate.

▶ The Infotainment screen goes out after switchingon.

▶ The emergency call indicator lamp lights up red.

Shop

Usage


The following activities can be carried out in theShop menu in Infotainment.

▶ Order new functions and services.▶ Extend purchased functions and services.▶ Purchase data plans from ŠKODA Connect serv-

ices later.

Devices connected via Wi-Fi can also access thedata plans.

Further information on the data plans can be foundon the following website.


The functions and services can be subject to a run-time limitation or even be unlimited.

The functions and services that are purchased areavailable to all vehicle users.

The functions and services can also be purchasedlater on the website ŠKODA Connect Portal.

Overview


› Tap .› Select the desired function or service from the list

that is displayed.

Conditions


The availability of the services and functions de-pends on the vehicle and Infotainment type as wellas being country-specific.

The following conditions must be met to activatenew services and functions.

✓ Infotainment supports the activation of newservices and functions.

✓ The vehicle equipment enables the use of newservices or functions.

If a service or a function is linked to a trim levelthat is not available with the vehicle, find outfrom a specialist garage whether the vehicle trimcan be added.

✓ The main vehicle user is logged on.✓ The ŠKODA Connect services are active.✓ The ŠKODA Connect services are available.✓ The charge state of the vehicle battery is suffi-

cient.

An active data connection is required for certainservices or functions. The connection may be subjectto charges.

Activated services and functions are not linked tothe validity period of ŠKODA Connect services.

Limitation


The functions are linked to the vehicle, not to themain user account. These cannot be transferred toany other vehicle in which the user logs on.

Information call

Usage

The info call can be used if there are problems withthe ŠKODA Connectservices or for information re-garding the products and services of the ŠKODAbrand.

Conditions

✓ The ŠKODA Connect services are active.✓ The level of protection for personal data is not

set to Maximum privacy .

To send information about the vehicle position,the level of protection for personal data must beset to Share my location .

120 Online Services › Shop



Operation

› Press the key.

Breakdown call

Usage

The breakdown call can be used in the event of abreakdown.

By pressing the key a connection is establishedwith the ŠKODABreakdown Service. At the sametime, the vehicle sends information about the vehiclecondition and the vehicle position.

Conditions

✓ The ŠKODA ConnectServices are active.✓ The level of protection of personal data is not set

to maximum privacy .

To send information about the vehicle position,the level of protection of personal data must beset to Share location .

Operation

› Press the button.

Service schedules

Usage

If the vehicle detects that a service visit is necessary,it will automatically send this information to theservice partner of your choice.

The service partner will then contact you and sched-ule the service visit with you.

Conditions

The service and the coupled functions are availabledepending on the following conditions.

✓ A service partner can be selected on the ŠKODAConnect Portal website or in the ŠKODA Connectapplication.

✓ The vehicle type, vehicle equipment and Infotain-ment type are supported.

✓ The level of protection of personal data is not setto Maximum privacy .

✓ The ŠKODA Connect services are active.✓ The ŠKODA Connect services are available.

Vehicle status report

Usage

The vehicle status report function allows you to haveonline control over the condition of the vehicle.

The service is available in the ŠKODA Connect appli-cation.

Available vehicle data include e.g. distance travelled,selected warning messages or requirements for theservice inspection.

Conditions


✓ The ŠKODA Connect services are active.✓ Configured protection level of personal data.✓ The ŠKODA Connect services are available.

Remote access to the vehicle

Usage

The service relating to remote access to the vehicleoffers the possibility of remotely controlling certainvehicle functions and accessing vehicle information.

Available functions include, for example, the follow-ing.

▶ Trip overviews.▶ Notification if alarm triggered.▶ Localisation service notifications, such as, for ex-

ample, location, area or speed notifications▶ Vehicle search using horn and flashing signals.▶ Remote controlled vehicle locking and unlocking.▶ Operation of the auxiliary heating.

121Online Services › Breakdown call

Conditions


✓ The vehicle type, vehicle equipment and Infotain-ment type are supported.

✓ Configured protection level of personal data.✓ The ŠKODA Connect services are active.✓ The ŠKODA Connect services are available.

Starting and driving

Starting with the key

Starting instructions

DANGERDanger of poisoning by exhaust gases!▶ Do not run the engine in an enclosed space.

Positions of the key in the ignition lock

1 Ignition off

2 Ignition on

3 Start the motor

Start vehicle with manual transmission› Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.› Move the shift lever to the neutral position.› Keep the clutch pedal depressed.› Turn key to position 3 .

› Let go of the key.

Start vehicle with automatic transmission› Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.› Keep the brake pedal depressed.› Move the selector lever to position or .› Turn key to position 3 .

› Let go of the key.

In vehicles with diesel engines, the warning lightlights up after the ignition is switched - glow plugsystem on. The engine starts after .

CAUTIONDanger of unexpected vehicle movement!▶ At temperatures below -10°C, start the vehicle

with the selector lever in the position.

Stopping the engine› Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.› Turn key to position 1 .

On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the keycan only be removed when the selector lever is in theposition .

WARNINGSteering lock hazard!▶ During a journey with the engine stopped, the igni-

tion must always be switched on.

122 Starting and driving › Starting with the key

NOTICERisk of engine overheating!▶ Do not switch the engine off immediately at the

end of your journey after the engine has been run-ning at high loads. Leave it to run at an idling speedfor about 1 minute.

Start at the push of a button

Starting instructions

DANGERDanger of poisoning by exhaust gases!▶ Do not run the engine in an enclosed space.

Function conditions✓ The vehicle key is located in the vehicle interior.

NOTICERisk of key loss, possibly of key damage!The system can detect the key even if it has beenforgotten on the vehicle roof.▶ Always keep the key with you.

Switching the ignition on and off

› Press the starter button.

Start vehicle with manual transmission› Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.› Move the shift lever to the neutral position.› Keep the clutch pedal depressed.› Press the starter button.

Start vehicle with automatic transmission› Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.› Keep the brake pedal depressed.› Move the selector lever to position or .› Press the starter button.

In vehicles with diesel engines, the warning lightlights up after the ignition is switched - glow plugsystem on. The engine starts after .

CAUTIONDanger of unexpected vehicle movement!▶ At temperatures below -10°C, start the vehicle

with the selector lever in the position.

Stopping the engine› Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.› Press the starter button.

WARNINGSteering lock hazard!▶ During a journey with the engine stopped, the igni-

tion must always be switched on.

NOTICERisk of engine overheating!▶ Do not switch the engine off immediately at the

end of your journey after the engine has been run-ning at high loads. Leave it to run at an idling speedfor about 1 minute.

Starting issues

Troubleshooting

NOTICERisk of engine damage!▶ Do not start the vehicle by towing.

The engine does not start› Switch off the ignition.› Wait 30 seconds and repeat the starting proce-

dure.› If the engine does not start, start the vehicle using

another vehicle's battery » page 154 or get helpfrom a specialist company.

The engine does not start, the display shows amessage regarding the immobilizer› Use the other vehicle key.› If the engine does not start, seek the help of a spe-

cialist garage.

The key cannot be turned in the ignition› Move the steering wheel back and forth while

turning the key.

Starting is not possible with the starter button, thesystem did not detect the key

illuminates

› Press the starter but-ton with the key.

› If the engine does notstart, seek the help of aspecialist garage.

The key might not be detected if the battery inthe key is nearly discharged or the signal is faulty.

The engine cannot be turned off with the starterbutton› Hold the starter button or press twice.

The radiator fan keeps running even after the en-gine has stoppedThe radiator fan can continue to run for approxi-mately 10 minutes after the engine is stopped. This isnot a defect.

123Starting and driving › Start at the push of a button

The engine makes noises after the cold startThe increased running noise is due to the briefly in-creased engine speed. This is not a defect.

START STOP

Usage

The START-STOPSystem reduces polluting emis-sions and CO2emissions and saves fuel.

Functionality

If the system determine that the engine is not nee-ded when the vehicle stops, it turns off the engineand starts it again when moving off.

Vehicle with manual transmissionA system-related engine shutdown takes place whenthe vehicle is stopped, when the gear lever is shiftedinto neutral and when the clutch pedal is released.

A system-related engine start occurs when theclutch pedal is pressed down.

Vehicle with automatic transmissionA system-related engine switch-off occurs when thebrake pedal is actuated and the engine is stopped.

A system-related engine start takes place after re-leasing the brake pedal.

Status display in the instrument cluster display- Engine is switched off by the START-STOPSystem

- Engine is switched off by the START-STOPSystem not switched off due to func-

tional conditions not being met

Display of detailed information in the infotainmentscreen

Vehicle status

Or:

Vehicle status


Some conditions are system-related and cannot beinfluenced or recognized. Therefore, the system mayreact differently in situations which seem identicalfrom the driver's perspective.

The driver must meet the following conditions.

✓ The driver's door is closed.✓ The driver has fastened the seat belt.✓ The driving speed was higher than 4 km/h after

the last stop.

Settings

Automatic activation▶ Upon start-up of the engine.▶ By selecting the driving mode Eco » page 127, Op-

eration.

Deactivate / activate system› Press the button.

When the system is deactivated, the symbol lightsup in the button .

If a system-related engine switch-off occurs and thesystem is deactivated, the engine will start.

Troubleshooting

The engine does not switch off when stopping, orit starts before starting upThe system has detected that the engine is running.

Manual gearbox

Operation

NOTICEDanger of engine damage!▶ Shift to a higher gear before reaching the red area

on the tachometer scale.

NOTICEDanger of gearbox damage!▶ Fully depress the clutch pedal when changing gear.▶ When not shifting gear, do not put your hand on

the shift lever.

Engaging reverse gear› Stop the vehicle.› Fully depress the clutch.› Move the shift lever to the neutral position.› Push the shift lever down.› Turn it completely to the left.› Wait briefly.› Engage reverse gear.

124 Starting and driving › START STOP

Automatic gearbox

Selector lever positions

Parked vehicleThe drive wheels arelocked.Only adjust he po-sition when the vehi-cle is stationary.Reverse gearOnly adjust he po-sition when the vehi-cle is stationary.

Idle positionThere is no transmission of engine power to thewheels.Forward drive / sports programThe gear is changed automatically.In mode the gear is changed at higher speedsthan in mode .Select between and (sprung position)

Selector lever out of position or solvelights up - the selector lever is locked

› Press the brake pedal,and at the same time,press the button in theselector lever.

WARNINGDanger of the vehicle rolling away automatically!▶ When the selector lever is in the position , or

in manual shift mode, secure the vehicle with thebrake.

Operation

Start up› Keep the brake pedal depressed.› Start the engine.› Press the button on the selector lever and set it to

the desired position.› Release the brake pedal and press the accelerator

pedal lightly.

Speeding up while driving (kick-down)› Fully depress the accelerator.

Stopping temporarily (e.g. at a junction)› Leave the selector lever in the position and se-

cure the vehicle with the brake pedal.

Stop› Keep the brake pedal depressed.› Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.› Press the button in the selector lever and bring it

to the position adjust.› Turn off the engine.

Drive in neutralIf the system detects that no gear is engaged whiledriving, it automatically switches to neutral position.

It will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

Requirements for driving in neutral position✓ The mode is selected.✓ Neither the accelerator nor the brake pedal is

pressed.✓ The vehicle speed is 20-130 km/h.✓ No device is connected to the trailer socket.

Manually switching gear with the selector lever› To turn on, move the selector lever to the right

(to the left for right-hand drive vehicles).› To turn off, move the selector lever back into posi-

tion .

+ Upshift

- Downshift

Manually changing gear with the shift paddles onthe steering wheel

- Downshift

+ Upshift

› To turn on, press theshift paddle - or + .

› To turn off, hold theshift paddle + .

If none of the shift pad-dles are pressed for acertain time, manual shift

mode turns off automatically.

If the engine threatens to over-rev▶ The gearbox automatically changes to the next

higher gear.

125Starting and driving › Automatic gearbox

▶ The transmission prevents changing to the nextlower gear.

Troubleshooting

The selector lever cannot be moved out of posi-tion in the normal way› Mechanically unlock the selector lever » page 126.

Gearbox overheatedilluminates together with

or

illuminates together with Message regarding the gearbox overheating

› You may continue driving, exercising appropriatecaution.


or

illuminates together with Message regarding the gearbox overheating

› Stop driving! Stop the vehicle and stop the engine.› After the indicator light goes out, your journey can

continue.› If the warning light does not go out, stop driving!

Get the help of a specialist company.

Gearbox impairedilluminates together with

or

illuminates together with Message regarding the gearbox in emergency

mode

› You may continue driving, exercising appropriatecaution.

› Immediately seek the help of a specialist company.


or

illuminates together with Message regarding a gearbox fault

› Stop driving! Get the help of a specialist company.

Starting the stuck vehicle› Adjust the selector lever quickly between and

. The vehicle will then start to rock and be easierto free.

Mechanical release of the automatic gearbox

› Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.

› Insert a flat-headscrewdriver or push asimilar tool into thegap in the arrow areaA .

› Carefully loosen andlift the cover of theshift gate.

› Push the foam insertaway until the yellowrelease lever is visible.

› Press with the vehiclekey on the release lev-er, and at the sametime, press the key inthe selector lever.

› Move selector lever toposition .

Vehicle driving mode

Usage

The driving mode offers the possibility of adaptingthe driving behaviour to the desired driving style.

Overview

Information about the selected driving mode is dis-played in the status bar in the Infotainment screen aswell as in the digital instrument cluster.

Eco mode

Eco mode is suitable for a relaxed style of driving andhelps to save fuel.

Normal mode

Normal mode is suitable for conventional driving.

Sport mode

Sport mode is suitable for a sporty driving.

Individual mode

Individual mode enables certain vehicle systems tobe customised.

126 Starting and driving › Vehicle driving mode

Operation

Select driving mode› Press the button.

In the Infotainment, a driving mode menu appears.

A Information about system settings of the cur-rently selected mode / system settings for theselected Individual mode

B Driving mode menu

› Tap the corresponding functional surface B.

Or:

› Press the button again.

After switching on the ignition, Normal mode isautomatically selected.

Troubleshooting

Shock absorber Sport Chassis Preset faultyilluminates together with

or


› Continue driving with appropriate caution. Getthe help of a specialist company.

Economical driving style

Tips for economical driving style andevaluation of driving economy

Tips for economical driving▶ Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.▶ Display the gear recommendation in the instru-

ment cluster display▶ Avoid full acceleration and excessive speeds.▶ Avoid engine idling during longer periods of sta-

tionary time.▶ Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is sta-

tionary. If possible, start your journey as soon asthe engine starts.

▶ Observe the prescribed tyre pressure » page 162.▶ Remove unnecessary ballast.

▶ Remove the roof rack when it is not needed.▶ Switch on electric consumers only for as long as

necessary.▶ Do not leave the windows open while driving.

Consumption-friendly drivingThere is a slight reduction in fuel consumption in thefollowing situations. lights up in the instrumentcluster.

▶ The active cylinder management has temporarilydeactivated some cylinders of the engine (appliesto certain engine types).

▶ A vehicle with automatic transmission rolls in neu-tral position.

Towing a trailer


WARNINGWhen driving with a trailer, special care is required!

NOTICEWith frequent towing, the vehicle is excessively loa-ded so this must also be checked between serviceintervals.

Recommendations for using a trailer▶ Adjust the tyre pressure on the vehicle for full load.▶ Do not exceed the maximum permissible total

weight of the vehicle and the combination weightspecified in the technical vehicle documentation(e.g. in the vehicle registration documentation, inthe COC document) and on the type plate.

▶ For trailer operation, consider the current load con-dition of the vehicle as well as the distribution ofthe load in the trailer. The coupled trailer increasesthe rear axle load and can therefore reduce thepayload.

▶ Adjust the headlight range of the headlights ac-cording to the load status of the vehicle. The frontof the vehicle may lift up when a trailer is beingtowed and the headlights may dazzle other roadusers.

▶ A speed of 100 km/h should not be exceeded.▶ Reduce the speed by releasing the accelerator

pedal as soon as a pendulum movement of thetrailer is noticeable. Never attempt to stop thetrailer from swaying by accelerating.

▶ If the traffic area behind the trailer can not beviewed, install additional exterior mirrors.

▶ Apply the brakes in good time. If the trailer is fittedwith a trailer brake, apply the brakes gently at first,then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts result-ing from the trailer wheels locking.

▶ Select a lower gear before descending to also usethe braking force of the engine.

127Starting and driving › Economical driving style

Distribution of the load over the vehicle and trailercombination▶ Secure heavy objects against slipping, as close to

the trailer axle as possible.

▶ Transport small and light objects in the luggagecompartment.

Permitted trailer loads

The details in the technical vehicle documentation take precedence over the information in this Owner's Man-ual.

WARNINGRisk of an accident!▶ Do not exceed the permissible trailer load.

Engine type Gearbox Permissible trailer load,braked (kg) a)

Permissible trailer load,unbraked (kg)

1.0 l/66 kW TSI G-TEC Manual gearbox - -1.0 l/70 kW TSI Manual gearbox 1150 5901.0 l/85 kW TSI Manual gearbox 1200 600

DSG b) 1200 6101.5 l/110 kW TSI Manual gearbox 1250 620

DSG b) 1250 6201.6 l/81 kW MPI Manual gearbox 1150 590

Automatic gearbox 1150 6001.6 l/70 kW TDI CR Manual gearbox 1250 6501.6 l/85 kW TDI CR Manual gearbox 1250 650

DSG b) 1250 660a) With gradients up to 12%.b) Automatic dual-clutch transmission.

Towing eye and towing procedure

Towing eye

Remove the front cover

› Press on the cover capand remove it.

Remove the cover cap at the rear

› Press on the cover capand remove it.

Install the towing eye

› Screw in the towingeye.

› Insert the wheelwrench or similar ob-ject through the tow-ing eye.

› Tighten the towingeye.

After the towing process› Unscrew the towing eye.

128 Starting and driving › Towing eye and towing procedure

› Insert the cover cap.

Towing the vehicle

WARNINGRisk of accident!▶ The tow rope must not be twisted.▶ When towing, drive at a speed of max. 50 km/h.

WARNINGRisk of accident!▶ Use a braided synthetic fibre rope for towing. Do

not use a twisted tow rope.

NOTICE▶ Always keep the tow rope taut during towing.▶ Do not exceed a towing distance of 50 km.

NOTICERisk of gear damage!▶ If the gearbox no longer contains any oil, the vehi-

cle must only be towed with the front axle raisedclear of the ground or transported on a specialbreakdown vehicle.

▶ Vehicles with an automatic transmission must notbe towed without the ignition switched on or withthe rear axle raised.

Where should the tow rope or the tow bar be se-cured?▶ At the front towing eye.▶ On the towing eye at the back.▶ On the ball bar of the factory-installed towing de-

vice.

Instructions for the driver of the pulling vehicle› Drive slowly and smoothly.› Only accelerate once the rope is taut.

Instructions for the driver of the towed vehicle› Move the shift lever to the neutral position or the

selector lever to the position.› If it is not possible to start the engine, switch on

the ignition!

WARNINGRisk of accident!When the ignition is switched off, the brake boosterand the power steering do not work. In addition,there is a risk that the steering lock will engage.

▶ If it is not possible to start the engine, switch onthe ignition!

Brakes


WARNINGProblems and faults with the brake system can ex-tend the braking distance of the vehicle!

DANGERDanger of a functional restriction of the brake boos-ter!▶ When braking in a vehicle with manual transmis-

sion, when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs,depress the clutch pedal.

DANGERDanger of the brakes overheating!▶ Do not depress the brake pedal if you do not need

to brake.▶ If the original front spoiler is damaged, ensure the

air supply to the front brakes is guaranteed.

Check the brake fluid level

Test conditions✓ The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.✓ The engine is off.

Checking

The fill level must be inthe marked area.

› If the level is below themark , do not con-tinue.

› Do not refill liquid.› Get the help of a spe-

cialist company.

If the brake fluid level istoo low, a light will be

displayed in the instrument cluster. However, werecommend that you regularly check the brake fluidlevel directly on the reservoir.

WARNINGDanger of brake failure!If the fluid level falls significantly within a short timeor drops below the mark , the brake system mayhave become leaky.▶ Stop driving! Get the help of a specialist company.

SpecificationThe brake fluid must comply with standardVW 501 14. This standard complies with the require-ments of the FMVSS 116 DOT4 standard.

129Starting and driving › Brakes

ChangingHave the brake fluid replaced by a specialist garage.

WARNINGDanger of brake failure!If the brake fluid change date is exceeded, heavybraking may cause vapour bubbles to form in thebrake system.

Troubleshooting

Brake fluid level is too lowilluminates

› Stop driving! Get the help of a specialistcompany.

Brake system and anti-lock braking system faultyilluminates together with


Braking effect reducedMoist, frozen, salted or corroded brakes can impairthe braking effect.

› Clean the brakes by braking repeatedly if the trafficconditions allow it.

When the engine is stopped, the brake boosterdoes not work› Depress the brake pedal more forcefully.

Handbrake

service

WARNINGRisk of accident!An insufficiently released parking brake will impairthe function of the brake system.▶ Fully release the parking brake before driving.

To back up

› Pull the lever up to thestop position.

The parking brake lights up.

To solve› Pull the lever up a little and push in the lock button.› Press and hold the lock button and pull the lever

completely down.

Driver assist systems

Braking and stabilising systems

Overview

Stabilisation control (ESC)ESC helps to stabilize the vehicle in borderline situa-tions (e.g. when the vehicle starts to skid). ESCbrakes the individual wheels to maintain the direc-tion of travel.

flashes - ESC is engaged

Traction control (TCS)ASR helps to stabilize the vehicle when acceleratingor driving on low-grip roads. ASR reduces the drivepower transmitted to the wheels when the wheelsspin.

flashes - ASR is engaged

Antilock braking system (ABS)ABS helps maintain control of the vehicle duringemergency braking. An ABS intervention is noticea-ble by pulsating movements of the brake pedal.

Motor Slip Regulation (MSR)MSR helps to maintain control of the vehicle in theevent of a sudden reduction in speed, e.g. on icyroads. If the drive wheels lock, MSR increases theengine speed. This reduces the braking effect of theengine and the wheels can rotate freely again.

Electronic differential lock (EDS)EDL helps to stabilize the vehicle when driving onroad surfaces with different grip under the individualwheels. EDL brakes a spinning wheel and transmitspower to a different drive wheel.

Electronic differential lock (XDS+)XDL + helps to stabilize the vehicle during fast cor-nering by braking the inside wheel of the driven axle.

Active steering support (DSR)In difficult situations, the DSR provides the driverwith a steering recommendation in order to stabilisethe vehicle.

Hill start assistHill Hold Control helps when starting off on uphillgradients by braking the vehicle for about 2 secondsafter the brake pedal is released.

Functional conditions✓ The gradient is at least 5%.✓ The driver's door is closed.

Multi-Collision Brake (MCB)MCB helps to decelerate and stabilize the vehicle af-ter a collision with an obstacle. This reduces the riskof further collisions.

130 Starting and driving › Handbrake

Functional conditions✓ There has been a frontal, side and rear collision of

a certain severity.✓ The impact speed was greater than 10 km/h.✓ The brakes, ESC and other necessary systems re-

mained functional after the impact.✓ The accelerator pedal is not pressed.

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)TSA helps to stabilize the trailer. When the trailerstarts to wobble, TSA stabilizes the trailer by brakingthe individual vehicle wheels.

Functional conditions✓ The trailer hitch was delivered from the factory

or purchased from the ŠKODA Original accesso-ries.

✓ The trailer is connected to the trailer socket.✓ ASR activated.✓ The driving speed is higher than 60 km/h.

Settings

Deactivate / activate ASRThe function is deactivated or activated in the fol-lowing Infotainment menu.

Or:

When deactivated lights up in the instrument clus-ter.

goes out on renewed activation.

Deactivating the ASR may be helpful in the followingsituations.

▶ Driving with snow chains.▶ Driving in deep snow or on very loose ground.▶ Starting the stuck vehicle.

Troubleshooting

ESC or ASR faulty/deactivated by the systemilluminates

› Stop the engine and start again.› If the warning light does not go out after covering

a short distance, seek the help of a specialist ga-rage.

ABS faultyilluminates

› You may continue driving, exercising appro-priate caution. Get the help of a specialist compa-ny.

Brake system and anti-lock braking system faultyilluminates together with


Front Assist

Functionality

Front Assist monitors the distance to the vehicleahead and points out when the safety distance is ex-ceeded. In borderline situations, it helps to avoid acollision by braking interventions.

Status display in the instrument cluster displayilluminates - safety distance too small

or illuminates - warning in case of collision

Automatic braking in the event of a collisionIf there is a risk of collision, the symbol lights up as awarning or from the isolation box. If you donot respond to the warning, the vehicle will slowdown.

At a driving speed of up to 30 km / h, the vehicle isbraked without prior warning.

The automatic braking can be stopped by pressingthe accelerator pedal or by steering.

With automatic braking, the pressure in the brakesystem increases. The brake pedal cannot be operat-ed by using the pedal as normal.

WARNINGRisk of accident!Front Assist does not respond to crossing or oncom-ing vehicles.

Operating conditions

✓ ASR activated.✓ The driving speed is higher than 5 km/h.


The function may be restricted or unavailable in thefollowing cases.

▶ About 30 seconds after starting. Lights up in theinstrument cluster .

▶ When driving through a sharp bend.▶ During an ESC intervention.

131Driver assist systems › Front Assist

Settings

Automatic activationFront Assist is automatically activated when the igni-tion is switched on.

Activation / deactivation in the instrument cluster› Press the button on the multifunction steering

wheel.› Select Front Assist .

Activation / deactivation and setting in Infotain-mentIn the menu:

Show system deactivation in the display of the in-strument cluster


or


Deactivate Front Assist when handling the vehi-cle on a truck, a car ferry etc.

Troubleshooting

Front Assist is not availableilluminates together with

Or:


› Clean the front radar sensor.› Stop the engine and start again.› If Front Assist is still unavailable, check the brake

lights on the vehicle or on the attached trailer.› Replace the defective bulb.› If the brake lights are working and Front Assist is

still unavailable, seek the help of a specialist ga-rage.

There was an unfounded warning or system inter-vention› Clean the front radar sensor.› If the system is not working properly, disable Front

Assist and seek the help of a specialist garage.

Pedestrian detection system

Functionality

Pedestrian detection helps prevent automatic colli-sions with pedestrians crossing or moving longitudi-nally.

Status display in the instrument cluster displayor lights up - Danger of collision

Risk of collision in a speed range of 5-30 km/hThe system triggers automatic braking.

Risk of collision in a speed range of 30-60 km/hThe system warns of a collision hazard first. If thedriver does not respond, the vehicle is automaticallybraked.


✓ Front Assist activated.✓ Driving speed between 5-60 km/h.

Speed limiter

Functionality

The speed limiter controls the maximum drivingspeed according to the set speed limit.

If the limit is exceeded when driving downhill, brakethe vehicle with the brake pedal.

Status display in the instrument cluster displayilluminates - the cruise control is activated.

When the control starts, is highlighted and theset limit is displayed.

illuminates - cruise control is activeflashing - the set limit is exceeded


✓ The driving speed is higher than 30 km/h.

Operation

Variant without GRA

A Activate limiter (control inactive)

Deactivate limiter

Interrupt control (sprung position)

B Resume control1) / Increase limit

132 Driver assist systems › Pedestrian detection system

C Start control at the current speed / reducelimit

Variant with cruise control

A Activate GRA (condition for the subsequentactivation of the limiter)To activate the speed limiter, press the D or Ekey.

Deactivate limiter


B Resume control1) / Increase limit

C Start control at the current speed / reducelimit

D Depending on the equipment:

Switch between GRA and speed limiterOr:

Show menu of assistance systems - Possibilityto switch between GRA and speed limiterSwitching to cruise control interrupts the con-trol.

E Show menu of assistance systems - Possibilityto switch between GRA and speed limiterSwitching to cruise control interrupts the con-trol.

Adjust the speed limit using the B and C keysPress for increments of 1 km/h.

Hold for increments of 10 km/h.

Variant with ACC

Activate ACC (condition for the subsequentactivation of the limiter). To activate the limit-er, press the A button.

Resume control1) / Increase limit in incre-ments of 1 km / h (sprung position)


Deactivate limiter

Increase limit in steps of 10 km/h

Decrease limit in steps of 10 km/h

Start control/Reduce limit in steps of 1 km/h

A Change between ACC and speed limiter (byswitching to cruise control, control is inter-rupted)

Exceeding the limit› Disengage the accelerator pedal completely.

Control will continue as soon as the vehicle has de-celerated to below the set limit.

Troubleshooting

Speed limiter faultyilluminates


Cruise control system

Functionality

The cruise control system (GRA) maintains the setspeed without having to press the accelerator pedal.

This, however, is only possible to the extent permit-ted by the engine output and braking power of thevehicle.

1) If no speed limit is set, the current speed is set as the speed limit.

133Driver assist systems › Cruise control system

WARNINGRisk of the cruise control system starting uninten-tionally!▶ Deactivate cruise control after use.

Status display in the instrument cluster displayilluminated - the cruise control system is acti-vated

illuminated - cruise control is activeWhen cruise control starts, the set speed is

displayed.



Operation

A Activate GRA (cruise control inactive)

Disable GRA


B Resume cruise control1) / Increase speed

C Start control at the current speed / reducespeed

D Show menu of assistance systems - Possibilityto switch between GRA and speed limiter

Accelerate temporarily› Depress the accelerator pedal.

Releasing the accelerator pedal will cause the speedto drop again to the set speed.

Interrupt speed control▶ After pressing the brake pedal.▶ After an ESC intervention.

Troubleshooting

Cruise control system faultyilluminates


Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Functionality

ControlACC maintains the set speed. When your vehicle ap-proaches the vehicle in front, ACC will automaticallystart to maintain the set distance to this vehicle.

Maintaining the set speed and the distance will here-inafter be referred to as Control.

WARNINGACC does not respond to stationary objects or tocrossing or oncoming objects.

ACC is intended primarily for use on motorways.

Speed rangeDepending on the equipment, ACC allows a speedsetting in the range of 30-160 or 30-210 km/h.

If control is started at a speed of less than 30 km/hon vehicles with an automatic transmission, thespeed is automatically increased to 30 km/h or con-trolled according to the speed of the vehicle ahead.

Distance levelThe distance to the vehicle ahead can be adjusted tofive different levels.

WARNING▶ Maintain a minimum distance in accordance with

the country-specific legal regulations.

Automatic stop and startA vehicle with an automatic transmission can be de-celerated to a stop using the ACC and start movingagain. In the event of a long stop, a message will ap-pear in the display, indicating that you must operatethe brake pedal.

› Keep the brake pedal depressed until the vehicle infront starts moving.

If the brake pedal is not depressed, control is inter-rupted.

OvertakingIf your vehicle changes to the fast lane and no vehi-cle is detected in front, ACC accelerates up to theset speed.

Status display in the instrument cluster displayilluminates - ACC is activated

Depending on the equipment:

illuminates - Control is active

or

illuminates together with - Control is active

1) If no speed is set, the current speed is adopted.

134 Driver assist systems › Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

When the control starts, the set speed is displayed.

illuminates - ACC does not decelerate suffi-ciently

› Depress the brake pedal.

Operation

Operating with the lever

Activate ACC (control inactive)

Start or resume control/Increase speed insteps of 1 km/h (sprung position)

Stop control (sprung position)

Deactivate ACC

Increase speed in steps of 10 km/h

Reduce speed in steps of 10 km/h

Set distance level

Start control/Reduce speed in steps of 1km/h

Starting control with the current speed› .

Or:

› If no speed is saved, move the lever to the sprungposition .

Set distance level› Move the switch to the sprung position

or .

Line A , appears on thedisplay, indicating thechange in distance.

› Use the switchto set the desired dis-tance level.

For temporary acceleration› Depress the accelerator pedal.

The vehicle accelerates and control is temporarily in-terrupted. Upon releasing the accelerator, control isresumed.

Interrupting cruise control▶ After pressing the brake pedal while driving.▶ By operating the clutch pedal for a long time.▶ After an ESC intervention.▶ After deactivation of the ASR.

Resuming control› If a speed is stored, move the lever to the sprung

position .

The vehicle is controlled at the set speed. The setspeed is shown in the instrument cluster display.

Function restriction

WARNING▶ Be particularly attentive and alert in the following

situations.

Regulation according to the vehicle in the adjacentlaneIf your vehicle is moving faster than the vehicle inthe next lane on the driver's side, at a speed of morethan 80 km/h, this may cause your vehicle to be con-trolled according to that vehicle.

When cornering

When cornering, a vehicle in the next lane may enterthe detected area. Your vehicle will be controlled ac-cording to this vehicle.

Narrow or staggered vehicle

135Driver assist systems › Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

ACC detects a narrow or staggered vehicle onlywhen it is in the area covered by the radar.

Lane change by another vehicle

A vehicle that changes to the lane a short distanceaway may not be recognized by the ACC in time.

Stationary vehicle

If a vehicle in front turns and there is a stationary ve-hicle in front of this vehicle, the ACC will not respondto the stationary vehicle.

Vehicles with special load or special bodiesA load or superstructure that protrudes outside thevehicle might not be detected by the ACC.

Settings

In Infotainment, in the menu: ◼

▶ Driving programme: - Setting the vehicle accelerationwhen the ACC is switched on (this setting ismade for vehicles with driving mode selec-tion » page 127)

▶ Last distance selected Switching on/off the last distancerange selected

▶ Distance: - Setting the distance to vehicles in front

Troubleshooting

ACC not availableilluminates together with

or


› Stop the engine and start again.› If ACC is still unavailable, check the brake lights on

the vehicle or on the attached trailer.› Replace the defective bulb.› If the brake lights are working and ACC is still un-

available, seek the help of a specialist garage.

Lane Assist

Usage

Lane Assist helps to keep the vehicle in the lane. It isbased on the boundaries of a lane. These can includeboundary lines, road edges or objects such as curbsand possibly traffic cones.

The system is intended primarily for use on high-ways.

Functionality

As the vehicle approaches a lane marking, the sys-tem executes a steering movement in the oppositedirection from the lane marking. The steering inter-vention can be overridden manually.

No system intervention occurs when changing lanewith the turn signal on.

Status display in the instrument cluster displaylights up - System is activated and ready tointervene

lights up - System is activated and ready tointervene

lights up - System intervenes

lights up - System intervenes

DisplayDisplay example in the black and white display.

Lane limitation highligh-ted on the right: systemintervenes on the rightwhen approaching thelane marking.

The lines are highlightedin colour on the coloureddisplay.

Warning through steering wheel vibrationsThe steering wheel vibrations are triggered in thefollowing situations.

136 Driver assist systems › Lane Assist

▶ The vehicle crosses the boundary line without theflashing light switched on.

▶ The system is unable to keep the vehicle in thelane.

› Correct the steering movement in the event of vi-brations.


✓ The driving speed is higher than 60 km/h.✓ The lane markings are clearly visible.


The system function may be restricted in the follow-ing cases.

▶ The field of view of the sensor is limited by a dirtyscreen or an obstacle or a preceding vehicle.

▶ In the event of unfavourable weather conditions.▶ When driving through a sharp bend.▶ When driving on a steep road or in ruts.▶ When the driving lane is too narrow.▶ When driving through construction sites.

WARNINGRisk of incorrect steering intervention!Certain objects or markings on the roadway can beincorrectly recognized as boundary lines.▶ Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and

be prepared to override the steering intervention.

Settings

Automatic activationLane Assist will automatically always be activatedwhen the ignition is switched on.

Activation / deactivation in the instrument cluster› Press the button on the multifunction steering

wheel.› Select Lane Assist .

Setting in InfotainmentIn the menu:

Troubleshooting

Message regarding system unavailability› Clean the windscreen in the sensor area.› Stop the engine and restart again after a short

time.› If the system is still not available, seek the help of a

specialist garage.

Lane change assist system Side Assist

Usage

The system uses optical signals in the exterior mirrorto alert the driver to vehicles that could be danger-ous when changing lanes.

Functionality

The system monitors the area next to and behind thevehicle.

The system warns of an approaching vehicle throughthe warning light in the exterior mirror cover onthe side of the vehicle where the vehicle is recog-nized.

Driving situations in which a system warning isgiven

Your vehicle will be overtaken by vehicle A. The fast-er the vehicle A approaches, the earlier the warninglight comes on.

Vehicle B is overtaken by your vehicle at a speedthat is faster by max. 10 km/h. If the speed is higherduring the overtaking process, no warning will beprovided by the indicator light.

Indicator light illuminates - there is another vehicle behind your

vehicle

flashes - there is another vehicle behind your ve-hicle, and the turn signal on the same side is switch-ed on

For vehicles with Lane Assist The indicator lightflashes even if your vehicle crosses the boundary linein the direction of the approaching vehicle. The sys-tem will trigger a steering wheel vibration in thiscase.

For this, Lane Assist must be activated and the boun-dary line between the vehicles recognized.



137Driver assist systems › Lane change assist system Side Assist

✓ No accessories are connected to the trailer sock-et.


The system cannot detect lane width. For this rea-son, it may, for example, draw attention to a vehiclein a distant lane in the following cases.

▶ Driving on a road with narrow lanes or on the laneedge.

▶ Driving round bends.

The system can draw attention to objects along theroad, such as high guard rails or noise barriers.

In the following cases, the system does not have toissue a warning of another vehicle, or the warningmay be issued incorrectly.

▶ Unfavourable weather conditions.▶ A very fast approaching vehicle.▶ When going round a sharp bend or a roundabout.

Settings

In the instrument cluster displayThe system settings are made in the display of theinstrument cluster in menu item Assistants.

In InfotainmentThe system settings are made in the infotainmentsystem in the following menu.

Troubleshooting

Message regarding system unavailability› Stop the engine and start again.› If the system is still not available, seek the help of a

specialist garage.

Traffic sign recognition

Usage

The road sign recognition shows road signs in thedisplay of the instrument cluster. This also indicatesexceeding the speed limit.

Functionality

Displayed traffic signs▶ Speed limits.▶ No overtaking.▶ Driving bans - one-way traffic.

▶ Additional characters, e.g. speed limit in wet condi-tions.

WARNINGRoad signs on the road always have priority over theroad signs shown on the display.

Driving with a trailerIf a trailer or other accessories are connected to thetrailer socket, trailer-relevant traffic signs are alsodisplayed.

Driving on roads with no speed limitsIf you are on a road without speed limits, the trafficsign will appear on the display

Example of road sign display

Example of additional characters

Example of several traffic signs recog-nized at the same time.

Speed unitsThe speed information in the displayed traffic signsrefer to the country-specific speed units.

For example, the displays refer to 30 km / h or 30mph, depending on the country.

Restriction


▶ The sensor is blinded by the sun or oncoming traf-fic.

▶ The field of view of the sensor is limited by an ob-stacle or a preceding vehicle.

▶ In the event of unfavourable weather conditions.▶ At high speeds.▶ The road signs are hidden, damaged, or are non-

standard.▶ The road signs are attached to flashing neon signs.▶ Non-current or unavailable map documents for the

navigation.

Settings

In Infotainment, in the following menu.

◼ Traffic sign recognition

138 Driver assist systems › Traffic sign recognition

▶ Include in the instrument cluster - Activation / deactivationof the additional display in the instrument clusterdisplay

▶ Speed warning: - Setting a warning when the permissi-ble speed is exceeded

▶ Warning when more than - Increase the speed limit forwhen the warning of when the speed limit is bro-ken is given

◼ Trailer detection▶ Show trailer-relevant traffic signs - Deactivation / activation

of the display of trailer-relevant traffic signs▶ Use for route calculation - Activation / deactivation of

trailer consideration when calculating the routein the navigation

▶ Top speed for trailers - Set the maximum speed for trail-er operation

Crew Protect Assist proactive occupantprotection

Usage

The system for proactive passenger protection trig-gers measures to protect passengers in the vehiclein dangerous situations.

Functionality

If the system assesses the situation as critical, it trig-gers the following security measures.

▶ Open windows are closed except for a small gap.▶ The front seat belts are tightened on the body.

The system reaction depends on the selecteddriving mode.

Risk of a head-on crashApplies to vehicles with the Front Assist system

The system triggers safety measures when it de-tects the impending risk of a head-on crash.


The function may be restricted or unavailable in thefollowing cases.

▶ When deactivated in the infotainment in the menu .

▶ When ASR is deactivated or ESC Sport is activated▶ When reversing.▶ If there is a malfunction in the ESC, reversible seat

belt or airbag system.▶ If there is a malfunction or restriction of the Front

Assist system.

Settings

Automatic activationThe system is automatically activated when the igni-tion is switched on.

Troubleshooting

Crew Protect Assist faultyilluminates together with Message concerning unavailability or function-

al restriction


Driver Alert fatigue detection assistant

Functionality

Driver Alert evaluates the steering behaviour. If it de-tects fatigue in the driver, a break is recommended.In the display of the instrument cluster, the lightsup.

WARNINGThere will be no system warning during the so-calledmicro-sleep.

Resetting the break recommendationThe break recommendation is reset in the followingcases.

▶ The vehicle stops and the ignition is switched off.▶ The vehicle stops, the seat belt is removed and the

driver's door is opened.▶ The vehicle stops for more than 15 minutes.

In some situations, the system may erroneouslyissue a break recommendation.


✓ Driving speed between 60-200 km/h.

Settings

Activation / deactivationIn Infotainment, in the menu:

139Driver assist systems › Crew Protect Assist proactive occupant protection

Park Assist systems

Park Pilot parking aid

Functionality

If an obstacle is detected, the Infotainment will dis-play a visible message and an audible signal willsound.

The interval between the signals becomes shorter asthe clearance is reduced. At a distance of less than30 cm from the obstacle, a continuous tone sounds.

If the driver does not respond to the warning, thesystem triggers automatic emergency braking atspeeds below 8 km/h in order to reduce the impact.

Automatic braking can be activated and deactivatedin the infotainment.

Display

The areas covered vary depending on the fitments.

A Route controlled at the current steering angle

Switch acoustic signals on / off

One-time deactivation / activation of automaticbraking

Change to the rear view camera display

System failure

Obstacle at a distance of less than 30 cm

Obstacle at a distance of over 30 cm

Obstacle outside the route


✓ The driving speed is lower than 15 km/h.✓ No accessories are connected to the trailer sock-

et.

Turn on/ turn off

Turn on› Engage reverse gear.

Or:


Automatic switch-on during forward travelWhen approaching an obstacle at a speed of lessthan 10 km/h.

Automatic switch-on does not activate automaticbraking.

Turn off› Disengage reverse gear.

Or:


Automatic switch offThe driving speed is higher than 15 km/h.


The system might not warn of an obstacle e.g. in thefollowing cases, or a warning may only be issued in-correctly.

▶ Unfavourable weather conditions.▶ The detected obstacles are moving.▶ Sensor signals are not reflected by the surface of

the obstacles.▶ It is a small obstacle, e.g. a stone or a pillar.

Settings

The system settings are made in the infotainmentsystem in the following menu.

Or:

Troubleshooting

After switching on, an audible signal sounds for 3seconds and there is no obstacle near the vehicle› Get the help of a specialist company.

After switching on, the symbol flashes in the but-ton › Get the help of a specialist company.

After switching on, not all scanned areas are dis-played on the Infotainment screen› Move the vehicle forward or backward a few me-

ters.› If the scanned areas are still not displayed, obtain

the help of a specialist garage.

140 Park Assist systems › Park Pilot parking aid

Rear view camera

Functionality

When reversing, the area behind the vehicle is dis-played in the Infotainment screen complete with ori-entation lines.

The camera is equipped with a cleaning system.Cleaning takes place automatically when the rearwindow is washed.

Orientation lines and functional surfaces

Orientation lines

A Distance about 40 cm

B Distance about 100 cm

C Distance about 200 cm

The distance between the side lines corresponds ap-proximately to the vehicle width including mirrors.

Function surfaces

Brightness, contrast and colour settings of thescreen

Turns off the display of the area behind the vehi-cle

Switching audible parking signals on/off

One-time deactivation/activation of automaticbraking

Parking aid full screen view.


✓ The luggage compartment lid is closed.

✓ The ignition is switched on.✓ The driving speed is lower than 15 km/h.

Operation

Switching on› Engage reverse gear.

Switching off› Disengage reverse gear.

Restriction

The camera image is distorted in contrast to the nak-ed eye. The display may only be used to estimate thedistance.

Some items may not be displayed properly on thescreen. These include narrow columns, wire meshfences, grids or road bumps.

Rear Traffic Alert

Functionality

When reversing, theRear Traffic Alert warnsof approaching vehicles.

If the driver does not re-spond to the warning,the vehicle is braked au-tomatically at a speedbelow 10 km/h.

WARNINGWhen the ESC/ASR system is deactivated, automat-ic braking is not performed.

Vehicle with Parking AidIf an approaching vehicle is detected in the area be-hind your vehicle, a graphical warning is displayed inthe Infotainment. At the same time, a continuoustone sounds.

Vehicle in the collision area - risk of collision!

Approaching vehicle

141Park Assist systems › Rear view camera

Vehicle without parking assistIf an approaching vehicle is detected in the area be-hind your vehicle, the a warning is displayed in the in-strument cluster display, indicating to the driver tomonitor the traffic behind. At the same time, anacoustic signal sounds.


✓ No accessories are connected to the trailer sock-et.


Manoeuvre Assist’s functionality may be limited inunfavourable weather conditions.

Settings

The system is activated or deactivated on the displayof the instrument cluster in the menu item Assistants.

The system is activated or deactivated in the follow-ing menu in the Infotainment system.

Or:

Troubleshooting


specialist garage.

Park steering assistant

Usage

Park Assist helps drivers park in parallel and perpen-dicular parking places and to manoeuvre out of par-allel parking spaces.


Do not use the Park Assist in the following cases.

▶ On unpaved or slippery surfaces.▶ If snow chains or a spare wheel are mounted on

the vehicle.▶ If the system chooses an inappropriate parking

space for parking.

Functionality

The system looks for a parking space and only takesover the steering during the parking procedure orwhen leaving a parking place. The driver operates thepedals and the shift lever/gear selector.

The system displays information and notes on the in-strument cluster display.

If the system detects a risk of an impact, there is au-tomatic emergency braking to reduce the conse-quences of the impact.


✓ The driving speed is lower than 7 km/h.✓ The ASR is activated and there is no intervention.✓ There is no driver intervention in the automatic

steering operation.✓ No accessories are connected to the trailer sock-

et.

Operation

Turn on/ turn off› Press the button.

When the system is switched on, in the button thesymbol .

Select the lane side for the parking procedureThe system automatically searches for a suitableparking space on the passenger side.

› Use the turn signal for the driver's side to find aparking space on this side of the road.

Operation while searching for a parking space› Drive past a number of parked vehicles at a dis-

tance of 0.5–1.5 m.› To search for a parking space across the road, drive

slower than 20 km/h.› To search for a parking space along the road, drive

slower than 40 km/h.

When the symbol (km / h) is displayed in the dis-play, reduce the driving speed. If the system finds aparking space, the display will show the recommen-ded parking mode.

Changing the parking modeIf a suitable parking space is found, the followingparking modes can be shown on the display.

142 Park Assist systems › Park steering assistant

Park parallel backwards

Park diagonally backwards

Park diagonally forwards

The parking mode can be changed by pressing thebutton .

Press the button again to switch the system off.

› To return to the originally recommended parkingmode, press the button again.

Before the parking process› If a suitable parking space is found, stop and drive

backwards or forwards according to the arrow inthe display.

› When a steering intervention message is displayed,release the steering wheel. The steering operationis taken over by the system.

Parking operation

CAUTIONRisk of injury!▶ Do not reach between the steering wheel spokes

during the parking manoeuvre.▶ Only operate the pedals and the shift / selector

lever.

› Observe the area around the vehicle and drivebackwards or forwards in accordance with the ar-row in the display.

› As soon as the symbol is displayed in the displayand an acoustic signal sounds, stop the vehicle. Thesteering wheel is taken over accordingly. The sym-bol turns off.

› Travel backwards or forwards in accordance withthe arrow in the display.

As soon as the parking process is completed, thecorresponding message is displayed and an audiblesignal sounds.

The parking process can be terminated by pressingthe button at any time.

If there is parking to some extent in a suitable bayparking space, press the button. The parkingprocess is completed by the system.

Getting out of a parallel parking space› Press the button.

When the system is switched on, in the button thesymbol .

› Follow the instructions on the screen.

Automatic speed reductionIf a speed of 7 km/h is exceeded during the parkingprocess, the system will reduce the speed.

Upon the speed being exceeded by 7 km/h a secondtime, the parking process is terminated.


If the parking space is too small, it is not possible touse the parking assistant to initiate a parking ma-noeuvre. A message is shown on the instrumentcluster display.

Troubleshooting


specialist garage.

Incorrect resulting position of the vehicle in theparking spaceThe correct parking procedure depends on the sizeof the wheels. If other wheels approved by ŠKODAAUTO are fitted, have the system readjusted by aspecialist garage.

143Park Assist systems › Park steering assistant

Engine, exhaust system and fuel

Bonnet

Open the engine compartment lid

Before opening› Make sure that the wiper arms are folded against

the windscreen.› Keep everyone away from the engine compart-

ment.

to open

› Pull the release leverunderneath the dashpanel.

› Release the lock.

› Open the hatch.› Take the flap support

out of the bracket andinsert the end of thesupport into the open-ing in the flap.

Close› Raise the flap.› Unhook the flap support and insert it into the hold-

er.› Fold the bonnet down and release it with a dis-

tance of 30 cm remaining.› Check that the bonnet is closed.

NOTICE▶ Do not press an open flap.

Engine oil

Checking the fill level and topping up

Test conditions✓ The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.✓ The parked engine is warm.

Checking the level› Wait a few minutes for the engine oil to flow back

into the oil sump.› Remove the dipstick and wipe with a clean cloth.› Insert the dipstick as far as it will go and pull it out

again.› Read the oil level and push the dipstick back in

again.

The oil level must be within the marked range.

NOTICERisk of damage to the engine and the exhaust sys-tem!▶ The oil level must not be outside the marked range.

If it is not possible to top up the engine oil or if theoil level is above the marked range, do not continuedriving. Stop the engine and seek the help of a spe-cialist garage.

▶ Do not use any oil additives.

ConsumptionDepending on driving style and operating conditions,the engine consumes some oil, up to 0.5 l/1000 km.Consumption may be higher over the next 5000 km.

Refilling› Unscrew the cover of the engine oil filler opening.› Top up the oil to the correct specification in 0.5 li-

tre portions.› Check the oil level.› Screw on the cover of the engine oil filler opening.

SpecificationAsk a specialist garage for the correct engine oilspecification for your vehicle.

If no oil of the correct specification is available, max.0.5 l of oil with the following specifications may beused until the next oil change.

▶ Petrol engines: VW 504 00, VW 508 00,ACEA C3, ACEA C5.

144 Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Bonnet

▶ Diesel engines: VW 507 00, VW 509 00, ACEA C3or API CJ-4. For vehicles without a particulate fil-ter, VW 505 01 can be optionally used.

ChangingHave the oil changed by a specialist garage.

Troubleshooting

Engine oil pressure too lowflashes, lights up at the same time

or

flashes, lights up at the same time

› Check the engine oil level.

The oil level is OK, the warning light continues toflash:

› Stop the engine and seek the help of a specialistgarage.

Engine oil level too lowilluminates together with

or

illuminates together with Message regarding required engine oil top up

› Check the engine oil level, top up with oil if re-quired.

Engine oil level too highilluminates together with

or

illuminates together with Message regarding the need to reduce the

engine oil level

› Check the engine oil level.

The oil level is too high:

› Drive on, exercising appropriate caution.› Seek the help of a specialist garage.

Engine oil level sensor impairedilluminates together with

or

illuminates together with Message regarding the engine oil sensor

› Drive on, exercising appropriate caution.› Seek the help of a specialist garage.

Coolant

Coolant temperature display

A Cold area› Avoid high engine speeds.

B Operating range

C High temperature range


Test conditions✓ The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.✓ The engine is turned off and cooled.

Checking the level

The fill level must bewithin the marked range.

› If the fill level is belowthe mark , top upthe coolant.

NOTICEDanger of damage to the engine compartment!▶ Do not top up the coolant above the marked area.

The coolant could be forced out of the cooling sys-tem when heated.

NOTICEThere must be a small quantity of coolant in the tank.▶ Do not add coolant when the tank is empty.▶ Stop driving! Seek the help of a specialist garage.

Refilling

CAUTIONRisk of scalding!The cooling system is pressurised.▶ Do not open the cap of the coolant expansion tank

while the engine is warm. Let the engine cooldown.

› Place a rag on the lid of the tank and carefully un-screw the lid.

145Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Coolant

› Refill with coolant of the correct specification.› Screw on the cap until it clicks into place.

SpecificationUse the G12evo (TL 774 L) additive for refilling.

NOTICERisk of damage to the cooling system and the en-gine!Adding coolant that does not conform to the correctspecification can reduce the corrosion protection ofthe cooling system.

Troubleshooting

Coolant level is too lowilluminates together with

or

illuminates together with Message concerning the required coolant

check

› Check the coolant level.

The coolant level is OK:

› Check the fuse for radiator fan, replace if re-quired » page 155, Replacing a fuse.

The fuse is OK, the indicator light comes on again:

› Stop driving! Seek the help of a specialist garage.

Coolant temperature too highilluminates together with

or

illuminates together with Report regarding the engine overheating

› Stop driving.› Stop the engine and allow it to cool.› Drive on after the indicator light goes out.

Engine faultilluminates together with

or


› Stop driving!› Stop the engine and seek the help of a specialist

garage.

There is no coolant of the correct specificationavailable› Top up with distilled or demineralised water.› Have the correct coolant mixing ratio corrected by

a specialist garage as soon as possible.

Another substance was used for topping up, otherthan distilled or demineralised water:

› Have the coolant changed by a specialist garage.

It is not possible to top up with a sufficient amountof coolant› Stop driving.› Stop the engine and seek the help of a specialist

garage.

There is a loss of coolant› Top up the coolant and seek the help of a specialist

garage.

Engine electronics

Troubleshooting

Petrol engine control faultyilluminatesDriving in emergency mode is possible - a

noticeable reduction in engine performance may oc-cur.

› Drive on carefully, get the help of a specialist com-pany.

Diesel engine control faultyflashes

Driving in emergency mode is possible - a noticeablereduction in engine performance may occur.


Diesel preheating system faultyilluminates, or does not illuminate after theignition is switched on

Driving in emergency mode is possible - a noticeablereduction in engine performance may occur.


Particle filter

Troubleshooting

Clogged particle filterilluminates together with

or


› Clean the filter.

When the indicator light is on, it must be as-sumed that fuel consumption will be higher, engine

146 Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Engine electronics

power will be reduced, and the START-STOPP func-tion will not be available.

Filter cleaning

Conditions for cleaning✓ The engine is warm.✓ For vehicles with manual transmission, observe

the gear recommendation shown in the display ofthe instrument cluster.

Procedure for vehicles with diesel engines› Drive at a speed of at least 60 km/h at engine

speeds of at least 2000 rpm.

If the filter is cleaned successfully, the indicator lightgoes out .

If the indicator light does not go off within40 minutes, the filter was not cleaned.

› Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution,and seek the help of a specialist garage.

Procedure for vehicles with petrol engines› Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h at engine

speeds between 3000-5000 rpm.› Release the accelerator pedal and let the vehicle

roll with the gear engaged for a few seconds.› Repeat this procedure several times.

If the filter is cleaned successfully, the indicator lightgoes out .

If the indicator light does not go off within30 minutes, the filter was not cleaned.


Exhaust control system

Troubleshooting

Emission control system faultyilluminatesDriving in emergency mode is possible - a no-

ticeable reduction in engine performance may occur.


Fuel filter

Troubleshooting

Water in the diesel fuel filterilluminates together with

or



Radiator blinds

Usage

The radiator blinds reduce polluting emissions andCO2 emissions and save fuel.

Troubleshooting

If the display of the instrument cluster shows a mes-sage relating to the function restriction of the blinds,the maximum speed of the vehicle is limited to 160km/h.

The cause may be ice or snow in the area around theblinds. After the ice or snow has thawed, the blindsare functional again.

› Should the impairment not be due to ice or snow,assistance from a specialist should be sought.

Fuel filler flap

Opening the fuel filler flap

› Press the flap and openit.

AdBlue

Regulations

Only use AdBlue® that complies with the ISO 22241-1standard. Do not mix any additives to the AdBlue®.

AdBlue® is a registered trademark of VDA and is alsoknown as AUS 32 (Aqueous Urea Solution) or DEF(Diesel Exhaust Fluid).

Functionality

To reduce pollutant emissions, a diesel exhaust fluid -AdBlue® is automatically injected into the exhaustsystem.

AdBlue® freezes at temperatures below -11 C. Thesystem function is ensured by automatic heating.

147Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Exhaust control system


Checking the levelThe AdBlue® level is monitored automatically.

The range with the existing AdBlue® tank fill level aswell as the indication of the minimum and maximumAdBlue® top up quantity can be viewed in the drivingdata in the instrument cluster display under themenu item .

If the range with the existing AdBlue® tank fill leveldrops to 0 km, it is not possible to start the engine.

› If possible, top up AdBlue® to the maximum level.

Requirements for refilling✓ Vehicle unlocked.✓ Independent car heating switched off.✓ Ignition off.✓ Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface.

Methods of refilling▶ With the fuel nozzle at the gas station.▶ With the refill bottle or from the canister.▶ At a specialist garage.

For refilling using refill bottles or canisters, we rec-ommend using refill bottles and canisters from ŠKO-DA original parts. The refill bottles are equipped withoverfill protective function.

Refilling› Open the tank flap.

› Turn the tank cap inthe direction of the ar-row and remove it.

› Place the tank cap onthe tank flap.

› Refill AdBlue®.

The AdBlue® tank is fullwhen the fuel nozzleswitches off or as soonas no more AdBlue®

flows out of the refill bottle. Do not continue refilling.

› Place the tank cap on the filler neck and turn it inthe opposite direction to the arrow until it clicksinto place.

› Close the tank flap and click into place.› Before starting the engine, leave the ignition on for

30 seconds to allow the system to detect the refill-ing.

NOTICERisk of damage to the system for injecting AdBlue®

in to the exhaust system!▶ Do not exceed the maximum refill quantity speci-

fied in the instrument cluster.▶ The service life of AdBlue® is 4 years. If the tank

contents are not consumed within this period, have

them replaced by a specialist garage. When top-ping up, do not use AdBlue® that is past its expirydate.

Troubleshooting

AdBlue®level too lowor or lights up

› Top up AdBlue®.

AdBlue®system impaired.or or lights up


Technical data

The AdBlue®tank capacity is approximately 12 litres.

Petrol


DANGERRisk of death!Fuel and fuel vapours are explosive.


If you would like to operate your vehicle in a countryother than that intended for vehicle operation,please contact a ŠKODA Partner. They will let youknow whether a suitable fuel is offered in the associ-ated country.

Regulations

StandardsPetrol must comply with European standard EN 228(in Russia, GOST 32513-2013).

Only use unleaded petrol that contains max 10% bi-oethanol (E10).

We recommend using petrol with additives,which is available at petrol stations at the petrolpumps.

Octane numberUse the petrol with the octane number prescribedfor your vehicle.

Petrol with an octane number that is one higher thanthe one prescribed for your vehicle can be usedwithout restriction.

148 Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Petrol

NOTICERisk of damage to the engine and the exhaust sys-tem!▶ If petrol is used that has an octane number that is

lower than the one prescribed for your vehicle,then drive at moderate speeds with minimal enginestress.

▶ Fill up with the prescribed octane number as soonas possible.

▶ Do not use petrol with an octane number that low-er than 91!

Prescribed petrol 95 / min. 92 or 93 RON / ROZWe recommend using95 RON petrol.

92 or. 93 RON petrol may be used as an option (lowpower loss, slightly increased fuel consumption).

In an emergency, 91 RON petrol may be used (lowpower loss, slightly increased fuel consumption).

Prescribed petrol min. 95 RON / ROZUse min. 95 petrol.

Using higher octane petrol than 95 RON may resultin improved performance and lower fuel consump-tion.

In an emergency 91. 92 or. 93 RON may be used(low power loss, slightly increased fuel consump-tion).

Prescribed petrol 98 / (95) RON / ROZWe recommend using98 RON petrol.

95 RON petrol may be used as an option (low powerloss, slightly increased fuel consumption).

In an emergency 91. 92 or. 93 RON may be used(low power loss, slightly increased fuel consump-tion).

Additive

NOTICERisk of damage to the engine and the exhaust sys-tem!▶ Do not use petrol containing metal-based addi-

tives, e.g. manganese, iron, lead, and do not use, forexample, any LRP petrol – lead replacement petrol.

▶ Do not add any additional additives to the petrol inaccordance with EN 228.

▶ If petrol is not used in accordance with EN 228, werecommend obtaining information from a specialistcompany regarding the possible use of petrol addi-tives approved by ŠKODA AUTO.

Requirements for refuelling

✓ Vehicle unlocked.✓ Ignition off.

Refilling

› Open the tank flap.

› Turn the tank cap inthe direction of the ar-row and remove it.


› Insert the fuel nozzleinto the fuel filler neckup to the stop and re-fuel.

› Do not continue refuel-ling after the fuel noz-

zle switches off.› Remove the fuel nozzle and put it back on the pet-

rol pump.› Place the fuel cap on the fuel filler neck and turn it

in the opposite direction to the arrow until it clicksinto place.

› Close the tank flap and click into place.

Troubleshooting

If fuel other than unleaded petrol has been refuel-led according to the standards applicable to yourvehicle› Do not start the engine or switch on the ignition.› Seek the help of a specialist garage.

Technical data

The fuel prescribed for your vehicle is indicated on asticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

A Unleaded petrol

B Organic share as apercentage

The fuel tank has a capacity of about 50 litres, in-cluding a reserve of approx. 7 litres.

For natural gas vehicles, the content of the petroltank is approximately 9 litres.

illuminates - the fuel level has reached the re-serve area.

149Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Petrol

Diesel


DANGERRisk of death!Fuel and fuel vapours are explosive.


If you would like to operate your vehicle in a countryother than that intended for vehicle operation,please contact a ŠKODA Partner. They will let youknow whether a suitable fuel is offered in the associ-ated country.

Regulations

StandardsThe diesel fuel must comply with European standardEN 590 (in Russia, GOST 32511-2013 or GOST R55475-2013).

Only use a diesel fuel that contains a maximum of 7% biodiesel (B7).

We recommend using diesel with additives,which is available at petrol stations at the petrolpumps.

Operation in different weather conditionsOnly use a diesel fuel according to the current or theexpected weather conditions.

Additive

NOTICERisk of damage to the engine and the exhaust sys-tem!▶ Do not use RME biofuel, even as a diesel fuel addi-

tive.▶ Do not add any additional additives to the diesel in

accordance with EN 590.▶ If diesel is not used in accordance with EN 590, we

recommend obtaining information from a specialistcompany regarding the possible use of diesel addi-tives approved by ŠKODA AUTO.



Refill

Misfuel protectionThe fuel filler neck of diesel vehicles can be equippedwith misfuelling protection.

In some countries, the diameter of the diesel fuelnozzle may be the same as that of the gasoline noz-zle. Before driving in these countries, have the pro-tection device removed by a specialist garage.

Refill› Open the fuel filler flap.

› Turn and remove thefiller cap in the direc-tion of the arrow.


› Insert the fuel nozzleinto the fuel filler neckup to the stop and re-fuel.

› Do not continue refuel-ling after the fuel noz-

zle switches off.› Remove the nozzle and put it back in the gas pump.› Put the filler cap on the fuel filler neck and turn it

against the direction of the arrow until it clicks intoplace.

› Close the tank flap and snap it into place.

Troubleshooting

If a fuel other than diesel fuel has been refuelled tothe appropriate standard› Do not start the engine or switch on the ignition.› Seek the help of a specialist garage.

The diesel fuel nozzle cannot be correctly insertedinto the filler neck› If the fuel nozzle cannot be properly inserted into

the fuel filler neck, move it slightly back and forthwhen inserting it.

Technical data


A Diesel

B Organic share as apercentage

The fuel tank has a capacity of about 50 litres, in-cluding a reserve of approx. 7 litres.

illuminates - the fuel level has reached the re-serve area.

150 Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Diesel

CNG (compressed natural gas)


WARNINGNatural gas is highly explosive and highly flammable.

WARNINGRisk of death, explosion or fire!▶ Do not ignore the smell of gas in the vehicle or

when refuelling.▶ The natural gas tanks in the vehicle must not be ex-

posed to undesirable heat sources.▶ Do not enter the vehicle when refuelling with natu-

ral gas. Electrostatic discharges may occur whenentering the vehicle. If the fuelling nozzle of the re-fuelling system is subsequently touched, sparksmay form and a fire may break out.

WARNINGTouching the floor of the vehicle or an accident maydamage the natural gas containers. If damaged natu-ral gas tanks are refuelled, they can burst and causeserious or fatal injuries!▶ Ensure a gas system test is carried out immediately

by a specialist company.▶ Do not refuel using natural gas until a gas system

test has been carried out.

NOTICERisk of damage to the engine and the exhaust sys-tem.▶ Do not use Liquefied Natural Gas (LPG), Liquefied

Petroleum Gas (LPG) or Hythane (hydrogen/meth-ane mixture).

Regulations

Regular gas system checksOn natural gas-powered vehicles regular gas systemchecks must be carried out at a specialist workshop.

Variants of the CNG sticker in natural gas vehicles .

Position of the sticker

The vehicle operator is responsible for ensuringthese tests are carried out properly.

For new cars, this is after 4 years and then every 2years▶ Check the gas system for leaks and carry out an

examination of gas containers.▶ Check the filler cap.▶ Check the condition of fuel filler tubes and the

sealing ring in the fuel filler tubes, and clean sealingring if necessary.

Lifetime of the containersThe lifetime of the natural gas containers is max. 20years.

› Ensure the gas tanks are replaced at the appropri-ate time.

Indicates the natural gas system test.illuminatesNotification regarding the remaining days until

the natural gas system is checked

› Ensure the test is carried out by a specialist com-pany.

NOTICEIf the natural gas system is not tested by the duedate, the natural gas drive will not be available inyour vehicle.

Functionality

A natural gas vehicle also has a petrol en-gine » page 148,

Natural gas operation displayilluminates

Automatically switching over from natural gasmode to petrol modeThe vehicle automatically switches from natural gasto petrol, for example, if the following situations oc-cur.

▶ With an empty natural gas tank or insufficientpressure in the tank.

▶ After natural gas refuelling - the fuel system of thevehicle determines the quality of natural gas.

▶ At very low ambient temperatures.

WARNINGDanger of remaining in traffic.▶ Once the warning light comes on fill up with gas

as soon as possible.▶ Never fully empty the petrol tank.▶ Track the range with natural gas in the drive data

menu item » page 56. Plan to fill up with naturalgas in good time.

151Engine, exhaust system and fuel › CNG (compressed natural gas)

Every six months, to ensure the correct function-ing of the fuel system, it is recommended that thefuel tank for petrol should be run down until thewarning light comes on .



Refilling

› Open the tank flap.

› Remove the cap Afrom the natural gasfiller neck.

› Plug the coupling ofthe refuelling systemonto the filler neck andstart refuelling withnatural gas and whiledoing so, follow the in-structions given on therefuelling system.

The refuelling system stops the refuelling processautomatically when the tank is full.

› After releasing thecoupling of the refuel-ling system, checkwhether the sealingring B is stuck in thefiller neck A .

› If the sealing ring hasslipped on the connec-tor, reinsert it into thefiller neck.

› Place the cap on the filler neck.› Close the tank flap and click into place.

The natural gas refuelling systems have an overfillprotection with a dependence to the outdoor tem-perature. With very high outside temperatures, itmay not be possible to fully refuel the natural gastank.

If the car is parked directly after a refuelling op-eration, on restart the pointer of the gas gauge maynot show exactly the same level as immediately afterthe filling process. This is not a leak in the system,but a reduction in pressure due to the cooling of thegas in the natural gas container after refuelling.

Troubleshooting

Unknown refuelling systemNatural gas refuelling may vary from station to sta-tion. If refuelling with natural gas at a station is unfa-miliar to you, get someone to instruct you or allowthe fuelling operation to be carried out by the stationstaff.

Gas leakageIf a gas leak is suspected (perceptible odour), pro-ceed as follows.

› Stop the vehicle.› Switch off the ignition.› Extinguish cigarettes, switch off spark-producing

or incendiary items and remove them from the ve-hicle.

› Open doors and the boot lid to ventilate the vehi-cle sufficiently.

› Do not continue to drive if the odour persists.› If it is not possible to drive a vehicle with a gas leak

out of an enclosed area (e.g. tunnel, underpass, ga-rage, ferry etc.), call the emergency services imme-diately.

› Ensure a gas system test is carried out immediatelyby a specialist company.

Technical data


CNG (compressed natural gas)

The fuel tank is built with a capacity of approximate-ly 13.8 kg CNG.

152 Engine, exhaust system and fuel › CNG (compressed natural gas)

Vehicle battery and fuses

Vehicle battery


Explanation of the warning symbols on the vehiclebattery

Wear safety goggles!

Battery acid is highly caustic. Wear gloves andeye protection.

Keep fire, sparks, and open flames away fromthe vehicle battery! Do not smoke!

When charging the vehicle battery, a highlyexplosive gas mixture is produced.

Keep children away from the vehicle battery.

Refer to the manual!

Functionality - Discharge protection

Possible causes of battery discharge▶ Frequent short journeys.▶ Low temperatures.▶ Vehicle stationary for a long period of time.

System-related discharge protection measures▶ Increasing the engine idling speed.▶ Switching off certain consumers or limiting their

power.

Measures to be taken when vehicle stationary formore than three weeks› Disconnect the terminal of the vehicle battery.

Checking and charging the vehicle battery

Checking the conditionThe battery condition is checked by a specialist ga-rage during servicing.

Checking the acid levelApplies to a vehicle battery with an acid level indica-tor.

› Tap on the indicatorbefore testing, to clearair bubbles.

▶ Black colour - the acidlevel is OK.

▶ Colourless or pale yel-low colour - acid levelis too low, the batterymust be replaced.

Requirements for the charging process✓ Ignition off.✓ Power consumers switched off.

Vehicle battery charging processTo charge the vehicle battery fully, set a chargingcurrent of max. of 0.1 times the battery capacity.

› Connect the termi-nal of the charger tothe terminal of thevehicle battery.

› Connect the termi-nal of the charger tothe earth point A .

› Plug the charger'spower cable into thesocket and switch onthe device.

› After charging, switch off the charger and unplugthe power cable from the socket.

› Disconnect the charger terminals from the vehiclebattery.

WARNINGRisk of explosion!▶ During charging, hydrogen is released. An explo-

sion can also be caused by sparks, for example,when disconnecting or loosening the cable con-nector.

▶ Never charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery.▶ Do not carry out the so-called quick charging of

the vehicle battery yourself, but have it carried outby a specialist garage.

NOTICEA flat vehicle battery can freeze easily!

Troubleshooting

Vehicle battery does not charge while the engine isrunning

or illuminates


Engine faultor illuminates

Earth point

153Vehicle battery and fuses › Vehicle battery

› Stop driving!› Stop the engine and seek the help of a specialist

garage.

Disconnecting, connecting and replacing

CAUTIONRisk of fire!▶ Do not mix up the connection cables.

Disconnect› Close the electric boot lid, all windows and the

electric sun blind.› Switch off the ignition and any connected power

consumers.› Disconnect the terminal and then the termi-

nal.

Connect› Connect the terminal and then the terminal.

After switching on ignition, the indicator lights illumi-nate briefly. from the isolation box.

› If, after a short distance, one of the above-men-tioned indicator lights does not go out, seek thehelp of a specialist garage.

Commission these functions after disconnectingand connecting the vehicle battery▶ Clock setting » page 54.▶ Window operation » page 28.▶ Sun blind » page 29.

ChangingThe new vehicle battery must have the same param-eters as the original battery. Have the replacementcarried out by a specialist garage.

Using the jump-starting cable


WARNINGRisk of explosion and chemical burns!▶ Do not jump start with the battery of another vehi-

cle under the following conditions.▶ The discharged vehicle battery is frozen. A dis-

charged vehicle battery can freeze at tempera-tures just below 0°C.

▶ The battery acid level is too low » page 153.

Use jump leads with a sufficient cross section and in-sulated terminal clamps.

The rated voltage of both batteries must be 12V. Thecapacity (in Ah) of the charging battery must not besignificantly lower than the capacity of the dis-charged battery.

Jump-starting with the battery of anothervehicle

WARNINGRisk of injury and danger of vehicle damage!▶ Lay the jump start cables so that they cannot be-

come caught by rotating parts in the engine com-partment.

NOTICEShort circuit!▶ The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps

must not touch each other.▶ The cable connected to the positive pole of the

battery must not come into contact with electri-cally conductive vehicle parts.

▶ The vehicles must not touch each other.

Connect the jump start cable› Connect the terminal clamps of the jump start ca-

bles in the order shown in the legend.

- discharged battery / - current-emitting battery

1 -pole of the discharged battery

2 -pole of the current-emitting battery

3 -pole of the current-emitting battery

4 Earth point of the engine to be started

Start the engine› Start the engine of the current-giving vehicle and

let it idle.› Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery.› If the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery

does not start within 10 seconds, repeat the start-ing procedure after approximately 30 seconds.

Earth point

154 Vehicle battery and fuses › Using the jump-starting cable

Disconnecting the cable› Disconnect the cables in the reverse order from

connection.

Fuses


NOTICEFire hazard and risk of damage to the electrical sys-tem.

▶ Do not repair fuses or replace them with strongerfuses.

▶ Replace the defective fuse with a new fuse withthe same amperage.

▶ We recommend using replacement fuses from theŠKODA Genuine Accessories range. These guaran-tee reliable and safe consumer protection.

▶ If a newly inserted fuse blows again, seek the helpof a specialist garage.

One fuse may belong to several consumers. Oneconsumer may have several fuses.

Functionality

Blown fuse

Conditions for replacing a fuse

✓ Ignition key removed (vehicle without starterbutton).

✓ Ignition switched off and driver's door open (vehi-cle with starter button).

✓ All consumers switched off.

Replacing a fuse

› Replace the fuse withthe clamp located onthe inside of the fusebox cover in the enginecompartment.

› Use the appropriateend of the clamp ac-cording to the fuse di-mensions.

Fuses in the dash panel

Overview

Access to the fuses› Open the storage compartment on the driver's

side.

› Press the button andopen the tray.

› Pull the tray out bypulling it towards you.

› Change the fuse.› Insert and close the

tray at the original lo-cation.

Fuses overview

Fusenumber

Consumer

1 Tow hitch2 LED headlights - left side

155Vehicle battery and fuses › Fuses

Fusenumber

Consumer

3 Music amplifier4 Headlamp cleaning system5 Sliding/tilting roof6 Central locking, windscreen washer,

rear window wiper7 Seat heating - rear8 Climatronic9 LED headlights - right side10 Tow hitch11 Electric boot lid12 Heated steering wheel13 Light switch, diagnosis connection, rain

sensor, control lever under the steeringwheel, front windscreen heating

14 Windscreen washer system15 Instrument cluster, emergency call16 Light - right side17 Electric windows - right side18 Windscreen wiper19 Infotainment20 Heated rear window21 SCR (AdBlue®)22 Not used23 Rear view camera24 Phonebox, GSM antenna, USB connec-

tion, Infotainment screen25 Control lever under the steering wheel26 Databus27 Shock absorber adjustment (adaptive

suspension)28 Alarm system sensor29 Alarm system horn30 Ignition (ignition lock)31 Air conditioning, heating32 Passenger belt tensioners33 Electric windows - left side34 Driver belt tensioners35 Light - left side36 Horn37 Heating of the front seats38 Interior lighting, button lighting, head-

light cleaning system, ambient lighting,manual air conditioning, heating

39 Assist systems40 Light switch, headlights, headlight level-

ling, diagnostic connection, reversinglight switch, control lever under thesteering wheel

41 Interior mirror dimming, exterior mirroradjustment, air conditioning, CNG relay

42 Clutch pedal switch, engine start43 Rear window wiper44 Airbag system, airbag control lamp45 Windscreen wiper46 Seat heating - rear

Fusenumber

Consumer

47 Not used48 Electric steering column lock, Kessy

(keyless lock and start system)49 SCR (AdBlue®) / CNG50 Rear USB ports, USB port on the interior

mirror51 Not used52 Cigarette lighter / 12 volt socket in front53 Ignition key trigger lock, automatic

transmission54 12 volt socket in the luggage compart-

ment55 Not used56 Manual air conditioning, heating57 Not used58 Windscreen washer system59 Exterior mirror heating, washer nozzle

heating60 Tow hitch61 Tow hitch

Fuses in the engine compartment

Overview

Access to the fuses

› Simultaneously pressthe locking buttons onthe fuse box cover andremove the cover.

› Change the fuse.› Fit the cover and click

into place.

NOTICEDanger of water entering the fuse box.▶ Fit the cover correctly and click into place secure-

ly.

Fuses overview

156 Vehicle battery and fuses › Fuses in the engine compartment

Fusenumber

Consumer

1 Engine control unit2 Exhaust flap, coolant pump, radiator

blinds, SCR (AdBlue®), engine compo-nents

3 Lambda sensors, NOx control unit4 Fuel pump, engine components5 Radiator fan, boost pressure regulator,

oil level and oil temperature sensor, en-gine components

6 Crankcase breather, glow plug system,engine components

7 Brake system (vacuum pump)8 Fuel pump, engine components9 Brake light switch10 Databus, BCM controller, battery data

module11 Not used12 Air conditioning13 Not used14 ESC, engine control system, engine

components15 Automatic gearbox16 Not used17 Engine control system18 Starter19 Not used20 ESC21 ESC22 Not used23 Not used24 Not used25 Electric auxiliary heater, radiator fan27 Electric auxiliary heater, radiator fan28 Electric auxiliary heater29 Heated windscreen

Wheels

Tyres and rims


NOTICE▶ Protect tyres from contact with lubricants and

fuel.▶ Always store wheels and tyres in a cool, dry and

dark place. Tyres without rims should be kept up-right.

▶ Alloy rims can be damaged by grit.

Causes of uneven tyre wear▶ Improper tyre pressure.▶ Driving style (e.g. fast cornering, rapid acceleration

and braking).▶ Wheel position error.▶ Incorrect wheel balancing.

Wheel changes

For uniform wear on alltyres, we recommendthat you change thewheels every 10,000 kmaccording to the sched-ule.

Instructions for tyre mounting› Comply with the specified direction of travel, oth-

erwise the driving characteristics may be impaired.The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked byarrows on the wall of the tyre.

› Always replace tyres by axle.

additional informationOnly use approved radial tyres of the same type, size(rolling circumference) and the same tread patternon one axle.

Approved tyre sizes are specified in the technical ve-hicle documentation and in the declaration of con-formity (in the so-called COCDocument).

The declaration of conformity can be obtained froma ŠKODA partner (applies to some countries andsome model variants).

Overview of tyre labelling

Explanation of the tire labellinge.g. 195/65 R 15 91 T

Tyre width in mmHeight/width ratio in %Code letter for the type of tyre - RadialRim diameter in inchesLoad indexSpeed icon

19565R1591T

157Wheels › Tyres and rims

Load indexThe load index indicates the maximum permissibleload for each individual tyre.

560 kg580 kg600 kg615 kg630 kg650 kg670 kg690 kg

Speed iconThe speed icon indicates the maximum permissiblevehicle speed with tires fitted in the respective cate-gory.

180 km/h190 km/h200 km/h210 km/h240 km/h270 km/h300 km/h

WARNING▶ Do not exceed the maximum permissible load and

speed for the mounted tires.

Tire wear indicator

There are wear indica-tors in the profile base ofthe tires, which indicatethe permissible minimumprofile depth.

Markings on the tireflanks using the lettersTWI or other symbols,e.g. , mark the positionof the wear indicators.

A tyre is to be regarded as worn out when this wearindicator is flush with the tread.

The tread depth can be measured with a treaddepth gauge on the ice scraper. The ice scraper is lo-cated on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

WARNINGRisk of accident!▶ Do not use worn tires.

Tire manufacturing dateThe date of manufacture is indicated on the tyresidewall.

For example, DOT ... 10 18 means that the tire wasmanufactured in the 10th week of 2018.

WARNINGRisk of accident!▶ Do not use tires that are older than 6 years.

8889909192939495

STUHVWY

Troubleshooting

Help with a flat tire▶ Spare wheel and emergency spare

wheel » page 159.▶ Changing the wheel and raising the vehi-

cle » page 160.▶ Breakdown set » page 161.

Change in tire pressureilluminates

› Stop the vehicle.› Check the tires and tire pressures.

Show tires with changed pressureIn the following menu, select the menu item for dis-playing the tyre condition.

Or:

All-season or winter tires

Usage

All-season or winter tyres improve handling in winterweather conditions. They are characterised by ‘M+S’and a mountaintop and snowflake symbol .


For the best possible handling, use tyres on all fourwheels with a minimum tread depth of 4 mm.

Change winter tyres to summer tyres at the appro-priate time. Summer tyres have better driving andbraking characteristics on snow- and ice-free roadsand at temperatures above 7 °C.

Conditions of use

If all-season or winter tires are used that have a low-er speed category than the actual maximum speedof the vehicle, then proceed as follows.

› Set the speed limit in the Infotainment accordingto the category of the fitted tires.

› In the driver's field of view, affix a warning labelwith the maximum value of the speed category in-tended for the tyres fitted (applies only to certaincountries).

Settings

The speed limit setting for tyres is set in the Infotain-ment in the following menu item.

158 Wheels › All-season or winter tires

Or:

Snow chains

Usage

The snow chains improve driving in wintry road con-ditions.

WARNINGRisk of accident as well as tyre damage!▶ Do not use chains on routes that are free from

snow and ice.


› Before fitting the snow chains, remove the fullwheel trims.

› Only mount the snow chains on the front wheels.

Technical specifications

Permitted rim / tire combinations for the installationof the snow chains.

Rim size Wheel size6Jx15 ET35 195/65 R156Jx16 ET35 195/60 R16

Only use snow chains with links and locks no largerthan 13 mm.

Spare and emergency spare wheel

Overview

Spare wheel▶ The dimensions of a full-featured spare wheel cor-

respond to the dimensions of the wheels installedon the vehicle.

▶ A temporary spare wheel is provided with a warn-ing label on the rim. This wheel is intended to ena-ble you to reach the nearest specialist garage.

Inflate a space saver wheel with the maximum pre-scribed pressure.

Emergency wheelA warning label is displayed on the rim of the tempo-rary spare wheel. This wheel is intended to enableyou to reach the nearest specialist garage.

An emergency wheel is significantly narrower thanthe wheels mounted ex-factory.

Remove and insert the wheel on vehicleswithout a sound system

The spare wheel or emergency wheel is mounted in arecess under the floor covering or the variable load-ing floor in the boot.

Remove

› Loosen the retainingbelt and take out thebox with the tool kit.

› Unscrew the lock nut.› Take out the wheel.

Insertion› Insert the wheel into the wheel well with the out-

side facing downwards.› Pull the fixing band through the opposite holes in

the wheel rim.› Screw in the locknut until it stops.› Replace the box with the tool kit into the wheel

and secure it with the tape.

Remove the wheel on vehicles with soundsystem and replace

Remove

› Loosen the retainingbelt and take out thebox with the tool kit.

› Press the safety but-tons and pull out theplug.

› Unscrew the lock nut.› Take out the bass

speaker.› Take out the wheel.

Insertion› Insert the wheel into the wheel well with the out-

side facing downwards.› Insert the bass speaker.› Screw in the locknut until it stops.

159Wheels › Snow chains

› Insert the plug into the bass speaker.› Replace the box with the tool kit and secure it with

the strap.

Changing the wheel and raising thevehicle


Before changing› Park the vehicle safely and secure it against rolling

away.› Turn off the engine.› Let all passengers get out. During the wheel

change they should not stand on the road, e.g. be-hind the crash barriers.

› Close all doors, the luggage compartment and en-gine compartment flaps.

› If a trailer is coupled, uncouple it.

Lift the vehicle

WARNINGAlways secure the jack's base plate against slipping!▶ Place a large, firm surface under the jack on a loose

surface.▶ Place a non-slip pad, e.g. a rubber doormat, under

the jack on a smooth surface.▶ Always lift the vehicle with the doors closed.▶ Do not insert any body parts under the raised vehi-

cle.▶ Do not start the engine of the lifted vehicle.

NOTICERisk of vehicle damage!▶ Make sure that the jack is attached correctly to the

bridge of the sill.

After having been changed› Check the tyre pressure on the mounted wheel

and adjust if necessary.› For vehicles with a tire control display, save the tire

pressure values in the system.› Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts of

the mounted tyres checked with a torque wrenchas soon as possible.

The specified tightening torque is 120 Nm.

Drive carefully until the tightening torque is checked.

Replace the damaged tyre. It is not recommended torepair the tyre.

WARNINGRisk of accident!▶ Too low a tightening torque may cause the wheel

to disengage while driving.▶ Excessive tightening torque can damage the

thread and deform the rim.

WARNINGRisk of accident!▶ Do not grease or lubricate screws.▶ Do not use corroded or damaged screws.

Changing the wheel and raising the vehicle

Loosen screws› If the vehicle has covers over the wheel bolts or

wheel trims, remove them.

WARNING▶ If you step on the key end when loosening the

screw, hold on to the vehicle for better stability.

Some vehicles may haveanti-theft wheel boltsthat protect the wheelsfrom theft.

› Insert the upper sec-tion on the anti-theftwheel bolt until itstops.

› Place the key on thewheel bolt or on theattachment piece.

› Turn the screw a maxi-mum of half a turn sothat the wheel doesnot come loose and falloff.

Pickups for the jackThe jacking points are located on the lower sill of thevehicle.

A 15.5 cm

B 25.8 cm

Position the jack and raise the vehicleUse the jack from the tool kit.

160 Wheels › Changing the wheel and raising the vehicle

› Position the jack at the jacking point closest to thewheel to be replaced.

› Insert the crank into the mount on the car jack.› Support the base plate of the jack with its full area

resting on level ground and ensure that the jack islocated in a vertical position at the jacking point.

› Use the crank to raise the jack until its claw enclo-ses the bar.

› Continue to lift the vehicle until the wheel is justoff the floor.

Changing a wheel› Unscrew the screws and place them on a clean

surface.› Remove the wheel carefully.› Attach the wheel.› Slightly screw in the screws.› Lower the vehicle.

NOTICE▶ Applies to factory installed or from ŠKODA Origi-

nal wheel covers supplied: Install the anti-theftwheel bolt according to the position marked on theback of the wheel cover.

Tighten screws› Tighten the opposite wheel bolts including the an-

ti-theft wheel bolt one after the other.› Reinstall the cover caps of the wheel bolts or the

full wheel covers.

Keep the label with the code number of the anti-theft wheel bolts. Based on this, a replacement at-tachment piece can be purchased from the ŠKODAOriginal parts.

Breakdown kit

Content overview

The kit is located in a box under the floor covering inthe luggage compartment.

A Stickers with the speed indication

B Valve insert driver

C Filling hose with sealing plug

D Air compressor (the layout of the controls maybe different depending on the type of air com-pressor)

E Tyre inflation hose

F Button for pressure reduction

G Pressure display

H 12 volt cable connector

I ON and OFF switch

J Tyre inflation bottle

K Replacement valve core

The declaration of conformity is included with the aircompressor or the log folder.

Conditions of use

Performing a repair with the breakdown kit not at allintended to replace a permanent repair on the tyre.

The purpose of the repair is to get you to the nearestspecialist garage.

Change the tyre repaired by the breakdown kit assoon as possible.

Before using the kit› Park the vehicle safely and secure it against rolling

away.› Turn off the engine.› Let all passengers get out. During the wheel repair

they should not stand on the road, e.g. behind thecrash barriers.

› Close all doors as well as the luggage compartmentand engine compartment flaps.

› If a trailer is coupled, uncouple it.

After using the kitIf a tyre pressure of 2.0 bar cannot be achieved, thetyre is too damaged and cannot be sealed with thepuncture set.

› Stop driving. Get the help of a specialist company.

161Wheels › Breakdown kit

Once a tyre pressure of 2.0–2.5 bar is achieved, con-tinue the journey at a maximum speed of 80 km/h(50 mph).

› Avoid full throttle accelerations, hard braking andfast cornering.

Instructions for driving with repaired tires› The pressure of the repaired tyre must be checked

after driving for 10 minutes.› If the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar and less, do not con-

tinue! Get the help of a specialist company.› If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar, correct

the pressure to the correct value of at least 2 barand continue driving.

NOTICEDanger of compressor damage!▶ After the maximum running time of the air com-

pressor has expired, let it cool down for a few mi-nutes.

WARNINGRisk of burns!The tire inflation hose and air compressor can be-come hot when inflated.▶ Allow the air compressor and hose to cool down

for a few minutes.

Usage restrictions

Do not use the kit in the following cases.

▶ The rim is damaged.▶ The outdoor temperature is below the minimum

temperature indicated in the manual of the tyre fill-ing bottle.

▶ Tyre punctures are greater than 4 mm.▶ There is damage to the tyre wall.▶ The expiry date stated on the tyre inflation bottle

has expired.

Self-help

Seal the tyres› Unscrew the valve cap from the damaged tyre.› Unscrew the valve core with the valve insert and

place it on a clean surface.› Shake the tyre inflation bottle back and forth with

sealant.› Screw the inflation hose onto the tyre inflater bot-

tle. The film on the closure is pierced automatically.› Remove the plug from the inflation hose and push

it fully onto the tyre valve.› Hold the bottle with the bottom facing upwards

and fill all of the sealing agent into the tyre.› Remove the filler plug from the valve.› Screw in the valve insert.

Inflate tyres› Fit the tyre inflation hose of the air compressor to

the tyre valve.› Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.› Start the engine.› Plug the connector into the 12 volt socket .› Turn on the air compressor.› Once a tyre pressure of 2.0-2.5 bar is reached, turn

off the air compressor.

Observe the maximum running time of the air com-pressor according to the directions of the repair kitmanufacturer.

› If an air pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar has not beenreached, remove the tyre inflation hose from thevalve.

› Drive approx. 10 metres forwards or backwards toallow the sealing agent to distribute in the tyre.

› Replace the tire inflation hose on the valve and re-peat the inflation procedure.

Tyre pressure


NOTICE▶ Always adjust the tyre pressure to the load.▶ Check the pressure in all tyres at least once a

month and before each longer ride.▶ Check the pressure when the tyres are cold. If nec-

essary, do not reduce the elevated pressure whenthe tyres are warm.

▶ After each change in tyre pressure, save the newvalues in the tyre control display.

WARNINGRisk of an accident!▶ If tyre pressure loss is very quick, try to stop the

vehicle carefully without heavy steering or heavybraking.

Stickers with prescribed tire pressure values

The sticker with prescribed tyre pressures is locatedon the inside of the fuel filler flap.

A Filling pressure forhalf a load

B Filling pressure forenvironmentallyfriendly operation(slightly lower fuelconsumption andpollutant emissions)

C Filling pressure forfull loading

162 Wheels › Tyre pressure

D Tire diameter in inchesThis information only serves as information forthe prescribed tyre pressure. This is not a list ofapproved tire sizes for your vehicle. These are inthe vehicle's technical documentation, as well asin the declaration of conformity (in the so-calledCOCDocument).

E Tyre pressure reading for the front axle tyres

F Tyre pressure reading for the rear axle tyres

G Prescribed tyre pressure value for the emergen-cy wheel

Tyre pressure monitor

Functionality

The tyre pressure monitoring indicator indicates achange in tyre pressure.

Warning when pressure changesilluminates

› Stop the vehicle.› Check the tyres and tyre pressures.

Show tyres with changed pressure› In the following menu, select the menu item for

displaying the tyre condition.

Or:


The system is unable to provide a warning in theevent of a very rapid tyre pressure loss, e.g. suddenpuncture.


▶ Uneven loading of the wheels, e.g. with a trailer at-tached.

▶ Sports driving style.▶ Driving on unpaved roads.▶ Fitted snow chains.

Save tyre pressure values

Save tyre pressure values in Infotainment› Inflate the tyres to the stipulated inflation pressure.› Turn on the ignition.› In the following menu, select the menu item for

displaying the vehicle condition.

Or:

› Using the functional areas select the menu for

the tyre control display.› Tap the functional surface .› Then follow the instructions on the screen.

Save the tyre pressure values in the following cases.

▶ Change in tyre pressure.▶ Change of one or more wheels.▶ Change of position of a wheel on the vehicle.▶ Always after covering a distance of 10,000 km or

once a year.

Troubleshooting

Tyre pressure display faultyflashes for about 1 minute and stays on

› Stop the vehicle, switch off the ignition andstart the engine.

If the symbol flashes again after starting the en-gine, there is a system fault.


Wheel bolt cover caps

Pull off and install cover caps

Pull off› Push the pull-off clamp onto the cover cap up to

the stop.› Pull off the cover cap.

Install› Push the cover cap onto the wheel bolt to the stop.

Full wheel frame

Pull off panel and install

Applies to factory installed covers or covers deliv-ered with ŠKODA original accessories.

163Wheels › Tyre pressure monitor

Remove› Hang the bracket for pulling off the wheel covers

at the edge of one of the openings in the cover.› Push the wheel wrench through the bracket, sup-

port it on the tire and pull off the cover.

Install› Place the cover on the intended valve section on

the rim.

If an anti-theft wheel bolt is used, it must be in theposition marked on the cover.

› Press the trim, starting at the valve, into the rim onboth sides until it engages around the entire cir-cumference.

NOTICE▶ Use hand pressure, do not hit the wheel cover.

Storage space and interiorequipment

Equipment in the boot

Overview

Luggage compartment of a vehicle without natural gasdrive

A Removable partition of the storage compart-mentMax. load 2.5 kg

B Hitch switch

C Under the floor covering: Storage compartmentfor spare or emergency wheel and vehicle toolsLoad on floor covering max. 75 kg

D 12 voltsocket

E Storage compartmentMax. load 1.5 kg

Luggage compartment of a natural gas vehicle

A Partition of the storage compartmentMax. load 2.5 kg

B Under the floor covering: Storage compartmentfor on-board toolsLoad on floor covering max. 75 kg

C 12 voltsocket

164 Storage space and interior equipment › Equipment in the boot

Emergency equipment

Overview of the emergency equipment

Emergency equipment in the boot of a vehiclewithout natural gas drive

A Positioning of the warning triangle (dependingon equipment)

B Tool kit

C Placing of the first-aid kit

Emergency equipment in the boot of a natural gasvehicle

A Placing of the first-aid kit

B Tool kit

C Placing of the warning triangle

Storage compartment for the reflective vestThe storage compartment for the reflective vest is inthe storage compartment of the front door.

Fire extinguisher under the passenger seat

Tool kit

Depending on the equipment, not all of the followingcomponents may be included in the tool kit.

A Attachment for the anti-theft wheel bolts

B Towing lug

C Bracket for removing the full wheel covers

D Jack with sign and crank

E Wheel wrench

F Removal clip for the wheel bolt cover caps

G Breakdown set

H Screwdriver

The declaration of conformity is enclosed with thejack or the logbook folder.

Storage compartment for the reflectivevest

Fasteners in the boot

Overview

Vehicle without the variable loading floor

A Pocket hookMax. load 7.5 kg

165Storage space and interior equipment › Emergency equipment

B Fastening elements for fastening the fasteningnets

C Hook for fastening the fastening netsMax. load 1.5 kg

D Lashing eye for fastening the fastening nets

E Lashing eyes for securing the load and the fas-tening netsMax. load 350 kg

Natural gas vehicle






Vehicle with variable loading floor






F Lashing eyes for securing the load and the fas-tening netsMax. load 350 kg

Other fastening elements

A Net on the boot coverMax. load 1.5 kg

B Hook to attach the load to the eyelet TOPTETHERSystemMax. load 5 kg

C CargoelementsMax. load 8 kgA storage compartment for the cargo elementsis located under the floor covering in the boot.› Fold up the cargo element and fasten it to the

floor covering in the boot.

Bag hooks in the boot

The maximum load for the hook is 7.5 kg.

166 Storage space and interior equipment › Bag hooks in the boot

Cargoelements in the luggagecompartment

The maximum load of the Cargoelements is 8 kg.

Storage net

The maximum permissible load for the net is 1.5 kg.

Hook on the eyelet of the TOP TETHERsystem

The maximum load for the hook is 5 kg.

Fastening nets

Overview

The maximum load of the respective fastening netsis 1.5 kg.

Storage pocket

Operation

The maximum load of the other fastening nets is3.5 kg.

167Storage space and interior equipment › Cargoelements in the luggage compartment

Suspension

› Hang the storage bagat the attachmentpoints A , B or C .

NOTICE▶ Before hanging the storage bag, remove the hook

from the eyelet of the TOP TETHER system.

Folding

› Place the rear baragainst the front barand secure it with theretaining tab.

Net partition

Fasten the net partition

Fasten at the back

› Insert the crossbar in the holders A.

› Snap the carabiners B into the lashing eyes.

› Pull the straps firmly at the free ends C .

Fasten at the frontThe procedure is analogous to the process behind.

The lashing eyes for the carabiners are located underthe central body pillars.

LoosenLoosening takes place in the reverse order to fasten-ing.

Double-sided floor covering

Overview

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may beequipped with a double-sided floor covering in theluggage compartment. One side is made of fabric,the other side is washable.

Rigid boot cover

Removing and inserting

The maximum load of the other fastening nets is1 kg.

Removing

› Unhook the straps.

› Remove the cover.

Inserting› Insert the cover until it clicks into place.› Hook in the retaining straps.

Store the cover behind the rear seats

› Hook the cover behindthe rear seats.

168 Storage space and interior equipment › Net partition

Variable loading floor in the boot

Setting the position

The maximum load of the variable loading floor is75 kg.

Set the variable loading floor to the upper or lowerposition

› Lift the variable loadfloor and pull it to-wards you.

› To set in the upper po-sition, place the varia-ble loading floor in thefront area on area A .

› To set in the lower po-sition, place the varia-ble loading floor in thefront area on space B .

› Press the variable load-ing floor forward andhang up.

Fasten the raised variable loading floor in the up-per position

› Secure the raised vari-able loading floor withthe help of hinged cor-ners in areas A .

Removing and inserting

› Lift the variable loading floor up to a distance ofabout 15 cm below the boot cover and then re-move it.

› Insertion takes place in reverse order.

Overview of passenger compartment

Overview of practical equipment in the front

A Make-up mirror

B Note holder

C Parking ticket holder

D Spectacle compartmentMax. load 0.25 kg› Press the button to open.

E USB connectionThe USBconnection is for charging only.

F Storage compartmentMax. load 3 kg› Pull the handle to open the compartment.

G Storage compartment▶ Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 1.5 l▶ Storage compartment for the waste container▶ Storage compartment for the reflective vest

H USBconnectionsThe USB connections can be used for chargingand data transfer.

I 12 volt socket

J Opening and adjustable armrest with storagecompartmentIn the lower part of the armrest, there is a cardholder.› Pull the handle to open the compartment.

K Storage compartment

169Storage space and interior equipment › Variable loading floor in the boot

Max. load 0.5 kg› Pull on the handle to open.

NOTICE▶ Do not leave any heat-sensitive objects in the

spectacle compartment D.

Overview of practical equipment at the rear

A Coat hooksMax. load 2 kg

B Folding table

C Storage compartment▶ Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 0.5 l▶ Storage compartment for the reflective vest

D Storage bag

E USBconnectionsThe USB connections are for charging only.

WARNING▶ Only hang light clothing on the hooks. Do not leave

heavy and sharp objects in the pockets of theclothing.

▶ Do not use hangers to hang clothes.

Parking ticket holder

Bottle tray in the storage compartmentof the front door

The tray is suitable for bottles with a max. size of 1.5l.

170 Storage space and interior equipment › Parking ticket holder

Bottle tray in the storage compartmentof the rear door

The tray is suitable for bottles with a max. size of0.5 l.

USBConnections

The USBconnection can only be used for charging.

The USBconnections can be used for charging anddata transfer.

The USBconnections can only be used for charging.

171Storage space and interior equipment › Bottle tray in the storage compartment of the rear door

Hook on the middle body pillar

The maximum load for the hook is 2 kg.

WARNING▶ Only hang light clothing on the hooks. Do not leave

heavy and sharp objects in the pockets of theclothing.

▶ Do not use hangers to hang clothes.

Glasses compartment

The maximum load for the compartment is 0.25 kg.

NOTICE▶ Do not leave any heat-sensitive objects in the

glasses compartment.

Card holder on the armrest

Storage compartment under the frontseat

Open the storage compartment

The maximum permissi-ble load for the storagecompartment is 1.5 kg.

Storage compartment for an umbrella

Overview

NOTICERisk of damage to the body and the interior panellingof the vehicle!▶ Only place the umbrella from the ŠKODA original

accessories in the storage compartment.▶ Always push the umbrella into the storage com-

partment as far as it will go.

172 Storage space and interior equipment › Hook on the middle body pillar

Phonebox


CAUTIONRisk of burns during charging.▶ The phone may get warm, remove it carefully from

the storage compartment.▶ Do not leave any metal objects in the compartment

under the phone. If there is a metallic object in thestorage compartment, which has become hot, re-move the phone and let it cool down in the storagecompartment!

Functionality

Functions of the Phonebox▶ Wireless phone charging.▶ Amplification of the telephone signal (only valid for

some countries).

The Phonebox is located in the storage compartmentin the front centre console.

Insert a telephone with a maximum size of 160x80mm into the storage compartment.

Charge status displayApplies to Infotainment Swing and Bolero.

The charge status is indicated by discolouration ofthe symbol displayed in the status bar on the Info-tainment screen.

▶ White - the phone is in the storage compartment,is detected and is charging.

▶ Red - the phone is in the storage compartment, isdetected, but cannot be charged.

▶ No icon displayed - the function is not available.

Charge status displayApplies to Infotainment Amundsen.

The charge status is indicated by discolouration ofthe symbol displayed in the status bar on the Info-tainment screen.

▶ White - the phone is in the storage compartment,is detected and is charging.

▶ Grey - the phone is not in the storage compart-ment/does not support wireless charging/is fullycharged.

▶ Red - the phone is in the storage compartment, isdetected, but cannot be charged.

▶ No icon displayed - the function is not available.

Recommendations for optimal function✓ The phone is positioned with the screen facing

up.✓ The protective cover of the phone is removed.✓ The phone is centred on the phone icon on the

pad.


Conditions for wireless charging✓ Ignition is switched on.✓ The phone supports the Qi standard.✓ There is no object between the pad and the

phone.

Troubleshooting

A message was displayed on the Infotainmentscreen stating that the mobile phone could not becharged.

▶ Check that there is no object between the supportand the phone to be charged. If this is the case, re-move the phone and the item. Place the phonecentrally on the phone symbol on the pad again.

▶ Check that the position of the phone to be chargedhas not changed. If this is the case, remove thephone and put it back in the centre of the phonesymbol on the pad.

Cup holder

Overview

Cup holder in front

In the front holder area, abottle can be openedwith one hand.

› Press the bottle intothe holder and un-screw the cap.

Cup holder in the back

CAUTIONRisk of scalding!▶ Never put hot beverage containers in the cup hold-

er.

NOTICEDanger of damage to the electrical system and thepanels from spilled drinks.

173Storage space and interior equipment › Phonebox

Multimedia holder

Overview

The multimedia holder is inserted in the cup holder.

A Storage compart-ment for coins

B Storage compart-ment for the vehiclekey

C Storage compart-ment for a mobilephone

Waste container

Replace bags

Ashtray and cigarette lighter


CAUTIONRisk of burning or fire!▶ Do not use the ashtray for storing hot or burning

objects.▶ Handle the lighter carefully.

service

The ashtray is inserted in the cup holder.

Open the ashtray

Remove the lid

cigarette lighter

› Push in the lighter.› Wait until the glowing

lighter pops back out.› Remove and use the

lighter.› Push the lighter back

in.

The socket of the ciga-rette lighter serves as a12V socket.

Folding table

service

Fold up the table

› Fold the table up to thedesired position.

Unfold the table

› Press the safety buttonand unfold the table.

Slide out the cup holder

174 Storage space and interior equipment › Multimedia holder

The maximum load for the table is 8.5 kg.

CAUTIONRisk of injury!▶ While driving, the table must be in the folded-

down position.

12-Volt power socket


NOTICERisk of damage to the electrical system of the vehi-cle!▶ Use the sockets only for the connection of ap-

proved electrical accessories with a total powerconsumption of up to 120 watts.

NOTICEDanger of damage to the connected consumers!▶ Switch off the consumers before switching the ig-

nition on or off and before starting the engine.

Roof rack and hitch

Roof rack

Overview

The maximum weight of the load incl. roof rack is75 kg.

Depending on the equipment, the roof bars can beattached at the attachment points A and B .

Swivelling hitch


WARNINGRisk of an accident!▶ Do not manipulate the switch for swinging the tow

bar in and out while a trailer or another accessoryis coupled to the tow bar. The tow bar could be un-locked.

CAUTIONRisk of injury!▶ Handle the trailer coupling carefully.▶ When swinging out the tow bar, do not stand in

the middle area of the rear bumper.

NOTICERisk of damage to the trailer coupling!▶ When not using the towing device, swing the tow

bar under the bumper.

Tow bar: swivel out/in

Swing out the tow bar

› Pull on the switch. Thetow bar swings out.The indicator light inside the switch illu-minates.

175Storage space and interior equipment › 12-Volt power socket

› Press the tow bar untilit audibly clicks intoplace.

Check latchings: theindicator light withinthe switch lights up.

Swivel tow bar

NOTICE▶ No trailer or any other accessory can be connected

to the tow bar.▶ A socket or adapter may not be plugged into the

socket.

› Pull on the switch. Thetow bar is unlocked.The indicator light inside the switch illu-minates.

› Swing in the tow barunder the bumper untilit audibly clicks intoplace.

Check latchings: theindicator light withinthe switch lights up.

Coupling or uncoupling a trailer or accessory

The following information describes the procedurefor coupling and uncoupling a trailer. The informationalso refers to another accessory, e.g. a bike carrier.

WARNINGRisk of an accident!▶ Do not use the safety eye for towing.▶ Distribute and fix the load correctly.

The trailer has a 13-pin electrical socket. If thetrailer has a 7-pin connector, use a correspondingadapter from the ŠKODA Original Accessories.

Coupling› Swing out the tow bar.› Put the trailer drawbar onto the ball head.

› Plug the electrical trail-er plug into the socketA .

› Hook the tear-off ropeof the trailer onto thesafety eye B . Thetear-off rope must sagagainst the vehicle inall trailer positions.

UncouplingUncoupling takes place in reverse order.

Power supply of the trailer power networkIn the electrical connection between the vehicle andtrailer, the trailer is powered by the vehicle.

NOTICERisk of damage to the vehicle electronics!The total power consumption of all consumers con-nected to the trailer power supply must not exceed350 watts.

Troubleshooting

Trailer coupling errorThe indicator light inside the switch does not lightup or flash, or the tow bar does not lock into place.

› Do not use the trailer coupling.› Seek the help of a specialist garage.

Tow bar not lockedilluminates

› Engage the tow bar.

176 Roof rack and hitch › Swivelling hitch

Technical data

Tow hitch attachment points

A Distance of the attachment points

B Length of the rear overhang to the centre of theball head

C Distance of the front attachment point to thecentre of the ball head

D Distance of the rear attachment point to thecentre of the ball head

E Distance of the rear bumper to the centre of theball head (according to the ECE-55 standard)

F Distance from the centre of the ball head to theroad (according to the standard ECE-55)

G Fastening points on the body

In mm

A 1030.30B 960.7

C 643

D 351.7

E min. 65

F 350-420

Maximum vertical load for trailer operationThe maximum vertical load for trailer operation de-pends on the engine type and the vehicle equipment.

The valid specification for your vehicle can be foundin the technical vehicle documentation, (e.g. vehicleapproval documentation, the COC document) or at aŠKODA partner.

Other information (e.g. on the nameplate of the trail-er device) merely provides information on the testvalues of the device.

Support load with mounted accessoriesWhen using the accessories (e.g. bicycle carrier), themaximum length and the permissible total weight in-cluding load must be considered.

The maximum length of the mounted accessories(from the ball of the towing device) may not exceed70 cm.

The permissible total weight of the mounted acces-sories including its load corresponds to the maxi-mum vertical load for trailer operation; the value canbe found in the vehicle registration documentation.

If the maximum load in trailer operation is more than75 kg, then the permissible total weight of themounted accessories including their load must notexceed 75 kg.

This value applies if the centre of gravity is at a dis-tance of no more than 30 cm from the towing deviceball head.

If the distance of the centre gravity of the load tothe ball head of the towing device is greater than30 cm, then the max. permissible total weight of theaccessory, including its load, decreases (e.g. at a dis-tance of 60 cm from the ball head, the permissibleweight decreases by half).

WARNINGRisk of an accident!▶ Do not exceed the maximum vertical load.▶ The permissible trailer load and the weight of an-

other accessory, e.g. of the bike carrier, is not to beexceeded.

NOTICERisk of damage to the trailer and the vehicle itself!› When using the accessory (e.g. bicycle carrier), ob-

serve the maximum length and the permissible to-tal weight of the accessory incl.

177Roof rack and hitch › Swivelling hitch

Maintaining and cleaning

Service events

service intervalsCompliance with service intervals is crucial for thelife and value of the vehicle.

You will be notified of the due date for service withthe symbol and the corresponding message on thedisplay of the instrument cluster.

The specialist garage will inform you of the type ofservice interval, the option of changing this and thescope of service.

All services and the replacement or refilling of op-erating fluids are chargeable to the customer, evenduring the warranty period, unless the ŠKODA AUTOwarranty conditions or other binding agreements de-termine otherwise.

Proof of serviceA specialist garage stores the proof of service in theinformation system called Digital Service Plan.

The proof of service can be printed out.

Show service appointmentIn Infotainment, select the following menu.

Menu item for the service

Or:

Menu item for the service

Resetting informationWe recommend that you do not reset the informa-tion regarding service events on your own. It canlead to incorrect setting of the service intervals andthus also to possible faults in the vehicle.

For vehicles with a variable service interval, newservice interval values calculated according to theprevious operating conditions will be displayed afterthe oil change service indicator is reset. These valueswill then continue to be adjusted according to thecurrent operating conditions.

Service work, adjustments and technicalchanges

The instructions and guidelines from ŠKODA AUTOmust be observed when carrying out any modifica-tions, repairs or technical alterations to the vehicle.

Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helpsensure road safety and helps keep the vehicle in agood technical condition.

We advise only using ŠKODA Original Accessoriesand ŠKODA Original Parts which have been expresslyapproved for use on your vehicle. Reliability, safety

and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed withthese.

ŠKODA Service PartnerAll ŠKODA Service Partners operate according tothe most recent guidelines and instructions fromŠKODA AUTO. Service and repair work is thereforecarried out on time and at the appropriate quality.Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helpsensure road safety and helps keep the vehicle in agood technical condition.

We therefore advise having all modifications, repairsand technical alterations to the vehicle carried out bya ŠKODA Service Partner.

ŠKODA original partsWe recommend the use of ŠKODA Original Parts foryour vehicle, as these parts are approved by ŠKODAAUTO. These parts correspond exactly to the ŠKO-DA AUTO regulations and are identical to the partsused in series production.

ŠKODA AUTO is able to warrant the safety, suitabili-ty, and long life of these products.

ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects ofŠKODA Genuine Parts for a period of 2 years aftersale in accordance with the materials defect liability,unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement.

ŠKODA original accessoriesWe recommend that you use ŠKODA Genuine Ac-cessories in your vehicle. With these accessories,ŠKODA AUTO stands for safety, reliability and thesuitability for your vehicle type.

ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects ofŠKODA Genuine Accessories for a period of 2 yearsafter installation or delivery in accordance with thematerials defect liability, unless agreed otherwise inthe purchase agreement or any other agreements.

Spoiler

WARNINGRisk of an accident!▶ Only use the original spoiler on the front bumper in

combination with the original spoiler on the bootlid.

▶ The original spoiler on the front bumper cannot beleft on its own without the spoiler on the luggagecompartment lid or in combination with an unsuita-ble spoiler on the luggage compartment lid.

▶ We recommend that you consult the ŠKODA Serv-ice Partner for any repairs to or replacement, addi-tion or removal of spoilers.

Component protectionSome electronic vehicle components (such as the in-strument cluster) are factory-equipped with compo-nent protection. This component protection ensuresthe functional limitation of these components in a

178 Maintaining and cleaning › Service events

non-legitimate installation in another vehicle (e.g. af-ter a theft) or operation outside the vehicle.

Interior


NOTICE▶ Use cleaning agents intended for cleaning and care

of the individual materials.▶ Do not use aggressive cleaning agents or chemical

solvents.

Natural leather / Faux leather / Alcantara® suede /material

NOTICE▶ Remove impurities as soon as possible.▶ Do not use solvents, floor wax, shoe cream, stain

remover or similar agents on Alcantara® suede seatupholstery.

▶ Make sure that natural leather is not moistenedwhen cleaning and that no water seeps into theseams.

▶ Do not clean the roof cladding with a brush.

NOTICERisk of fading to the cover fabric.▶ If necessary, do not leave the covers for long peri-

ods in the blazing sun.

▶ During use, the leather and Alcantara® and suedematerials may show minor changes (e.g. folds ordiscolouration).

▶ Some clothing fabrics, e.g. dark denim, sometimesdo not have sufficient colour fastness. As a result,discolouration that is clearly visible on the seat up-holstery can occur. This is not a defect in the fab-ric.

▶ Sharp-edged zippers, rivets, clamps and similargarments can damage the upholstery in the vehi-cle. Such damages cannot be subsequently recog-nised as a justified complaint.

Plastic parts

NOTICERisk of damaging the dash panel.▶ Do not attach fragrances and air fresheners to the

dash panel.

Windows

NOTICERisk of damage to the filaments or the glass antenna.▶ Do not stick stickers on the heating filaments.▶ Do not use sharp objects (such as pot scrapers,

etc.) to clean the windows.

Covers on electrically heated seats

NOTICERisk of damaging the heating system.▶ Do not clean the seats with water or other liquids.▶ Do not dry the seats by switching on the heating.

Seat belts

NOTICERisk of damage to the seat belts.▶ Do not dry clean the seat belts.▶ Allow cleaned belts to dry before rolling up.

Instructions for cleaning

Natural leather / Faux leather / Alcantara® / suede /material› Remove dust and dirt on the surface with a vac-

uum cleaner.› Remove fresh impurities with water, slightly mois-

tened cotton cloth or woollen cloth; if necessary,use a mild soap solution and wipe with a dry cloth.

› Remove stubborn stains with a suitable cleaningagent.

› For regular care of natural leather, use the equip-ment provided for this purpose. After each clean,use a care cream with light protection and impreg-nation effect.

› When looking after Alcantara®, remove stubbornhair from suede and fabric surfaces with a cleaningbrush. Remove pills from materials with a brush.

Plastic parts› Remove impurities with water, slightly moistened

cloth or sponge with a suitable cleaning agent ifnecessary.

Windows› Remove impurities with clean water and dry with a

cloth provided for this purpose.

Infotainment screen› Remove any impurities on the screen using the

cleaning agents provided.

NOTICE

Danger of screen damage!

▶ When removing dirt, do not press on the screen.

Covers on electrically heated seats› Remove impurities with a suitable cleaning agent.

Seat belts› Remove impurities with a soft cloth and mild soap

solution.

179Maintaining and cleaning › Interior

Exterior


WARNINGRisk of accident!After washing the vehicle, the functionality of thebrake system may be affected by moisture and, inwinter, by ice.▶ Dry and clean the brakes by braking several times.

NOTICE▶ Bird droppings, insect residues, litter and sea salt

residues, overflowing fuel, remove AdBlue® andsimilar as soon as possible.

▶ Do not use rough sponges, pot scourers or similarto remove dirt.

▶ Use the appropriate cleaning agents to clean andcare for the individual materials.

▶ Do not use aggressive cleaning agents or chemicalsolvents.

▶ Do not polish the vehicle in a dusty environment.

NOTICEAdBlue® picks up some materials, e.g. paint and plas-tics.▶ Clean the affected area with a damp cloth and cold

water.▶ Remove the dried solution with warm water and a

sponge.

NOTICE▶ Paint damage should be repaired as soon as possi-

ble.▶ Do not treat matt lacquered parts with polish or

hard wax.▶ Do not polish foils.▶ We recommend treating door seals and window

guides with the appropriate tools from ŠKODAoriginal accessories. These ensure that the protec-tive lacquer layer of the seals and window guides isnot attacked.

▶ Do not use abrasive cleaning agents to clean therear view camera.

Before driving through a car wash› Observe the usual specifications of the car wash,

e.g. close all windows, fold the exterior mirrors, andthe like.

› Set the wiper lever in position .› If there are special attachments on your vehicle,

observe the instructions of the car wash operator.

NOTICEIn vehicles with an electric luggage compartment lid,this can open automatically due to the pressure ofthe washing brushes.▶ Lock the vehicle, e.g. with the central lock button.

After washing with a wax preservation› Wipe off the windscreen wiper blades with a dry

cloth.

Wash with a pressure washer

NOTICE▶ Follow the operating instructions for the high-

pressure cleaner. This particularly applies to infor-mation with respect to the pressure and spray dis-tance from the vehicle surface.

▶ Do not direct the water jet directly at the followingvehicle parts.▶ Foils.▶ Locks.▶ Columns on the vehicle.▶ Trailer socket.▶ Swivelling ball bar.▶ Sensors.▶ Camera lenses.▶ Plastic parts, chrome-plated and anodized

parts.

Remove snow and ice

NOTICE▶ Remove snow and ice with a plastic scraper or a

suitable de-icing agent.▶ Clean cameras with a hand brush.▶ Only move the scraper in one direction.▶ Do not use scratches or other sharp objects for

foils.▶ Do not remove snow and ice with hot or warm wa-

ter.▶ Do not remove snow and ice from surfaces with

coarse dirt.

Instructions for cleaning

Handwash› Wash the vehicle from top to bottom with a soft

sponge or wash glove and plenty of water, if nec-essary with additional suitable cleaning agents.

› For foils and headlights, use a mild soap solutionthat contains two tablespoons of white neutralsoap to one litre of lukewarm water.

› Use a glass cleaner for the windscreen wiperblades.

› Wash the cameras with clean water and dry with asuitable clean wipe.

180 Maintaining and cleaning › Exterior

NOTICE▶ Wash out the sponge or wash mitt regularly.▶ Use a different sponge for wheels, sills and the

lower part of the vehicle than that used for theother vehicle parts.

▶ Do not wash the vehicle in the blazing sun.▶ Do not dry the headlights or use sharp objects.▶ Do not put pressure on the bodywork when wash-

ing.▶ The temperature of the washing water may be a

max. 60 °C.

After hand washing› Rinse the vehicle and wipe it with a suitable clean

cloth.

Vehicle paint› Preserve the varnish at least twice a year with hard

wax.› Use a polish for matt lacquers.

FilmsFilms will age and become brittle – this is entirelynormal: this is not an error.

The following factors have a negative effect on thelife or colour fastness of the films.

▶ Sun rays.▶ Moisture.▶ Air pollution.▶ Stones, e.g. due to the rebound of the cargo during

transport on the roof rack.

Protection of hollow spacesCorrosion-prone cavities of the vehicle are perma-nently protected by preservative wax at the factory.

› Remove spilled wax with a plastic scraper, cleanstains with mineral spirits.

UndersealThe underside is permanently protected by the fac-tory against chemical and mechanical influences.

› Have the protective coating checked by a special-ist garage before starting and at the end of thecold season.

Wheels› After washing, preserve the wheels with suitable

means.

NOTICESevere dirt on the wheels can result in the wheelsunbalancing.

Car jack› If necessary, treat moving parts with suitable

grease.

Tow hitch› Coat the ball head of the towing device with a suit-

able grease whenever necessary.

Ice scraper on the fuel filler flap

181Maintaining and cleaning › Ice scraper on the fuel filler flap

Technical data and specifications

Requirements for the technical data

The emission standard, information on fuel con-sumption and other information pertaining to yourvehicle can be found listed in the technical vehicledocumentation and in the declaration of conformity,in the so-called COC-document.

The information listed was determined in accord-ance with rules and under conditions that are stipula-ted by legal or technical regulations.

This and other information about your vehicle andthe declaration of conformity can be obtained from aŠKODA partner.

The details in the technical vehicle documentationand in the declaration of conformity take prece-dence over the information in this Owner's Manual.These details and values apply to your vehicle in thestate and configuration at the time of delivery fromthe manufacturer. Retrofitting an accessory can havea negative impact on these details and values, in par-ticular the values pertaining to fuel consumption andcarbon dioxide (CO2), which are specified in the vehi-cle documentation and in the declaration of con-formity.

The listed performance values were determinedwithout performance-reducing equipment, e.g. airconditioning system.

Vehicle identification data

Vehicle identification number (VIN)The vehicle identification number is found at the fol-lowing locations.

▶ Directly in the engine compartment on the suspen-sion turret.

▶ On a plate under the windscreen in the lower leftcorner.

▶ On the type plate at the bottom of the middlebody pillar of the vehicle.

Type plate.

A Vehicle manufacturers

B Vehicle identification number (VIN)

VIN displayThe display of VIN takes place in the infotainmentunder the following menu item.

Menu item for the Service

Or:

Menu item for the Service

Engine numberThe engine number is embossed on the engine block.

Maximum permissible weights

The maximum permissible weights are listed on thenameplate.

The type plate is located at the bottom of the middlebody pillar of the vehicle.

A Maximum permissible gross weight

B Maximum permissible towed weight (towing ve-hicle and trailer)

C Maximum permissible front axle load

D Maximum permissible rear axle load

Maximum permissible towed weightThe specified value is valid for altitudes up to 1000m above sea level.

The engine output falls as the height increases, asdoes the ability to climb.

Therefore, for every additional 1,000 m in height (orpart), the maximum permissible towed weight mustbe reduced by 10 %.

The towed weight is made up of the actual weightsof the loaded towing vehicle and the loaded trailer.

PayloadsIt is possible to calculate the approximate maximumpayload from the difference between the permissibletotal weight and the operating weight.

The payload consists of the following components.

▶ The weight of the rider.▶ The weight of all luggage and other loads.▶ The weight of the roof, including the roof rack sys-

tem.

182 Technical data and specifications › Requirements for the technical data

▶ The weight of the equipment that is excluded fromthe operating weight.

▶ Trailer bearing load for trailer towing » page 177.

WARNINGRisk of accident and danger of vehicle damage!▶ Do not exceed the specified values for the maxi-

mum permissible weights.

Operating weight

Information about the operating weight

The specification corresponds to the lowest possibleoperating weight without additional weight-increas-ing equipment. This includes 75 kg driver's weight,the weight of the operating fluids and the on-boardtool kit and a fuel tank filled to min. 90%.

Operating weight

Engine type Gearbox Operating weight (kg)

1.0 l/66 kW TSI G-TEC Manual gearbox 13101.0 l/70 kW TSI Manual gearbox 11921.0 l/85 kW TSI Manual gearbox 1209

DSG a) 12291.5 l/110 kW TSI Manual gearbox 1243

DSG a) 12551.6 l/81 kW MPI Manual gearbox 1194

Automatic gearbox 12191.6 l/70 kW TDI CR Manual gearbox 13101.6 l/85 kW TDI CR Manual gearbox 1314

DSG a) 1329a) Automatic dual-clutch transmission.

Ask for the exact vehicle weight in a specialist garage.

Vehicle dimensions

Dimensions

Specification Value (in mm)

Vehicle height 1469 a)/1471Vehicle width with folded-in mirrors 1793Vehicle width with folded-out mirrors 1988Ground clearance of the vehicle 149Vehicle length 4362a) Applies to vehicles with a 1.0l/66 kW TSI G-TEC engine.

Engine specifications

Overview

▶ 1.0 l/66 kW TSI G-TEC » page 184.▶ 1.0 l/70 kW TSI » page 184.▶ 1.0 l/85 kW TSI » page 184.▶ 1.5 l/110 kW TSI » page 184.▶ 1.6 l/81 kW MPI » page 185.▶ 1.6 l/70 kW TDI CR » page 185.

183Technical data and specifications › Operating weight

▶ 1.6 l/85 kW TDI CR » page 185.

1.0 l/66 kW TSI G-TEC engine

Power (kW at 1/min) 66/4000-5500Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 160/1800-3800Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/999Transmission Manual gearboxMaximum speed (km/h) 182With specified gear engaged 6Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 12.4

1.0 l/70 kW TSI engine

Power (kW at 1/min) 70/5000-5500Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 175/2000-3500Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/999Transmission Manual gearboxMaximum speed (km/h) 188With specified gear engaged 5Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 10.9


Output (kW at rpm) 85/5000-5500Highest torque (Nm at rpm) 200/2000-3500Number of cylinders/displacement(cm3)

3- 999

Gearbox Manual gearbox DSG a)

Maximum speed (km/h) 201 199With specified gear engaged 5 7Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 9.7 9.8a) Automatic dual-clutch transmission.


Output (kW at rpm) 110/5000-6000Highest torque (Nm at rpm) 250/1500-3500Number of cylinders/displacement(cm3)

4- 1498

Gearbox Manual gearbox DSG a)

Maximum speed (km/h) 220 219/213 b)

With specified gear engaged 5 6Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 8.2 8.3a) Automatic dual-clutch transmission.b) Applies to cars with the EU6W emission standard.

184 Technical data and specifications › Engine specifications

1.6 ltr./81 kW MPI engine

Power (kW at 1/min) 81/5800Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 155/3800-4000Number of cylinders/displacement(cm3)

4/1598

Transmission Manual gearbox Automatic gearboxMaximum speed (km/h) 193 188With specified gear engaged 5 5Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 10.6 11.8

1.6 l/70 kW TDI CR engine

Output (kW at rpm) 70/2750-4500Highest torque (Nm at rpm) 250/1500-2500Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4- 1598Gearbox Manual gearboxMaximum speed (km/h) 186With specified gear engaged 5Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 11.5

1.6 l/85 kW TDI CR engine

Power (kW at 1/min) 85/3250-4000Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1500-3250Number of cylinders/displacement(cm3)

4/1598

Transmission Manual gearbox DSG a)

Maximum speed (km/h) 201 200With specified gear engaged 6 7Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 10.1 10.1a) Automatic dual-clutch transmission.

Accident data recorder

The vehicle is equipped with an accident data re-corder, hereinafter only “EDR”. The purpose of theEDR is to record data during a traffic accident or oth-er extraordinary traffic situation, hereinafter only an“accident”.

Data is only recorded in the event of an accident inwhich the restraint systems are triggered.

The EDR records the accident in a short time (ap-proximately 10 s), by showing the following informa-tion, for example:

▶ The function of certain systems in the vehicle.▶ The seat belt status of the driver and front passen-

ger.▶ The actuation of the brake and accelerator pedals.▶ The speed of the vehicle at the time of the acci-

dent.

The recorded data support the analysis of how thevehicle systems behaved shortly before, during andshortly after the accident. This enables them to bet-ter understand the circumstances in which the acci-dent occurred.

The data of the assistance systems in the vehicle arealso recorded. Whether e.g. the affected systemswere switched on or off at the relevant time, wheth-er they were only partially available or were inactive.There is also the possibility of tracking whetherthese vehicle functions controlled, accelerated ordecelerated the vehicle during the accident. Depend-ing on the equipment, these functions are, e.g:

▶ Automatic distance control (ACC).▶ Lane Assist.▶ Parking assistant.▶ Emergency brake function (Front Assist).

Under normal driving conditions, there is no data re-cord. There is no audio or video recording from the

185Technical data and specifications › Accident data recorder

vehicle interior or surroundings. Personal data, e.g.Name, gender, age or place where the accident oc-curred are not recorded in the EDR. Third subjects,e.g. Law enforcement agencies can, however, usecertain resources to link EDR content to other datasources and, in this way, identify some of the peopleinvolved in the accident when investigating the cau-ses of the accident.

Special equipment is required and the ignition needsto be switched on to read the EDR data.

The ŠKODA AUTO company will not read or processany accident data from the EDR without the consentof the vehicle owner or another person authorized touse the vehicle. Exceptions are specified in the con-tractual agreements or these are subject to generallybinding regulations.

Due to legal requirements, ŠKODA AUTO is requiredto monitor the quality and safety of its products,meaning that it is only entitled to use data from theEDR to monitor the product on the market, for fur-ther research and development, and to improve thequality of the vehicle's safety systems. For the pur-pose of research and development, ŠKODA AUTOwill also make data available to third parties. This isdone exclusively in anonymous form, i.e. without anyconnection to the specific vehicle, the vehicle owneror other authorized users.

Personal data

Personal customer data is collected, processed andused by ŠKODA AUTO in accordance with the provi-sions of the generally binding legal provisions.

The current declaration on the protection of person-al data can be found on the following website:

▶ https://www.skoda-auto.com/other/personal-data

Information about the radio systems inthe vehicle

Your vehicle has various radio systems.

Manufacturers of this radio equipment declare thatthis equipment complies with the requirements ofDirective 2014/53/EU and the Technical Regulationon Radio Equipment, approved by the Decision ofthe Cabinet of Ministers of Ukraine of 25 May 2017no. 355.

Information about Directive 2014/53/EUon the ap-proximation of the laws of the Member States relat-

ing to the marketing of radio equipment, TechnicalRegulation on Radio Equipment, approved by theDecision of the Cabinet of Ministers of Ukraine of25 May 2017 No. 355, as well as regarding declara-tion of conformity, can be viewed on ŠKODA webpages using the following link or by scanning the QR-code.

https://www.skoda-auto.com/services/red-doc

After this, proceed as follows:

1. Select the desired region.2. Select Download Declaration of conformity

against the desired model, to receive the certifi-cates.

Examples of labelling of radio systems

Armenia

Australia and New Zealand

Belarus

Europe (countries that approve radio equipment as perEU guidelines)

Philippines

Moldova

186 Technical data and specifications › Personal data




Rights arising from defectiveperformance, ŠKODA warranties

Rights arising from defective performanceYour ŠKODA Partner, as a seller, is liable to you formaterial defects in your new ŠKODA vehicle, ŠKODAGenuine Parts and ŠKODA Genuine Accessories, inaccordance with the legal requirements and the pur-chase contract.

The buyer is entitled to assert the rights arising fromdefective performance with the responsible ŠKODApartner from the time of vehicle handover. The dateof the vehicle handover and the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN) are properly documented in the “Vehi-

Mongolia

Russia

Serbia

Taiwan

Ukraine

Vietnam

cle delivery documentation” chapter in this Owner'sManual.

ŠKODA warranty for new carsAs well as the legal rights arising from defective per-formance, ŠKODA AUTO grants you the ŠKODAwarranty for new cars (hereinafter referred to as the“ŠKODA Warranty”), according to the conditions de-scribed below.

Under the ŠKODA Warranty, the company ŠKODAAUTO shall provide the following services 1).

▶ Free repair of damage due to a defect that occursin your vehicle within two years of the start of theŠKODA Warranty.

▶ Free repair of damage due to paintwork flaws thatoccur on your vehicle within three years of thestart of the ŠKODA Warranty.

▶ Free repair of rust corrosion on the body, whichoccurs on your vehicle within twelve years of thestart of the warranty. In terms of rust corrosion onthe body, the ŠKODA Warranty shall cover onlyrust corrosion through body panels from the insideto the outside.

The start of the ŠKODA Warranty is the day onwhich the new car is handed over for use by a ŠKO-DA partner to the first buyer who is not a ŠKODAPartner2).

The ŠKODA Partner enters this date into the corre-sponding systems of the manufacturer. Any oneŠKODA Partner Partner can notify you of this dateon request.

Vehicle repairs under the ŠKODA Warranty can becarried out by means of a replacement or repair ofthe defective parts. The ŠKODA Service Partner de-cides about the type of vehicle repair. The vehicle re-pair takes place in accordance with the availability ofthe ŠKODA Service Partners and within a reasonableperiod of time. Replaced parts become the propertyof the ŠKODA Service Partner.

There shall be no further claims arising from theŠKODA Warranty. In particular, no claim for replace-ment, no right of withdrawal, no claim to purchaseprice reduction, or provision of a replacement car forthe duration of repair and compensation.

The ŠKODA Warranty can be claimed at any ŠKODAService Partner.

1) Based on the requirements of generally binding legal regulations or country-specific market requirements,the ŠKODA partner or importer can provide a warranty beyond the scope of the stated ŠKODA Warranty.This local warranty extends the scope of performance in accordance with the specific warranty conditionsof ŠKODA partners or importers.

2) Due to the requirements of the generally binding country-specific regulations, the date of first registrationcan be given instead of the date of the vehicle handover.

187Technical data and specifications › Rights arising from defective performance, ŠKODA warranties

There are no claims under the ŠKODA Warranty ifvehicle damage has occurred in causal connectionwith one of the following circumstances.

▶ The service work was not carried out on time andprofessionally according to the provisions of ŠKO-DA AUTO, or its execution was not proven by thecustomer when asserting claims under the ŠKODAWarranty.

▶ Damage refers to parts that are subject to naturalwear, such as tyres, spark plugs, wiper blades,brake pads and brake discs, clutch, bulbs, syn-chronizer rings, batteries, etc.

▶ Installation, connection of parts or accessories,other adaptation or technical modification of thevehicle not approved by ŠKODA AUTO (e.g. tun-ing).

▶ Unauthorized use, improper handling (e.g. use inmotor sport competitions or overloading), improp-er care and maintenance or unauthorized modifica-tions to your vehicle.

▶ Non-compliance with provisions in the Owner'sManual or other factory-supplied instructions.

▶ External impact or influences (e.g. accident, hail,flood, etc.).

▶ Damage has not been reported immediately to aspecialist company or has not been properly rem-edied.

The customer shall prove the lack of causation.

The present ŠKODA Warranty shall not affect thepurchaser's statutory rights arising from unsatisfac-tory performance in respect of the seller of the vehi-cle and possible claims arising from product liabilitylaws.

ŠKODA Mobility warrantyThe Mobility Warranty provides you with a sense ofcertainty for journeys in your vehicle.

As part of the Mobility Warranty, if your car breaksdown as a result of an unexpected fault when youare on the move, you can access services to ensureyour continued mobility. These services include thefollowing: Breakdown service at the breakdown lo-cation and towing to the ŠKODA Service Partner,technical assistance by phone or on-site operation.

If your vehicle is not repaired on the same day, thenthe ŠKODA Service Partner may, if necessary, ar-range additional subsequent services, such as re-placement transport (bus, train, etc.), the provision ofa replacement vehicle, and the like.

Specific claims for free provision of services underthe ŠKODA Mobility Warranty only exist if your vehi-cle has remained in a causal connection with a defectwhich is to be remedied on the basis of fulfilment un-der the ŠKODA Warranty.

Check the conditions for provision of the MobilityWarranty for your vehicle with your ŠKODA Partner.

They will also inform you of the detailed terms andconditions of the Mobility Warranty in relation toyour vehicle. In the event that your vehicle is notcovered by a mobility warranty, he will inform you ofthe possibilities for subsequent conclusion.

Optional ŠKODA Extended WarrantyIf you also purchased a ŠKODA Extended Warrantywhen purchasing your new car, ŠKODA AUTO willprovide you with a free repair of vehicle damagecaused by a defect in the vehicle during the warrantyperiod.

The ŠKODA Extended Warranty for your vehicle isvalid for the agreed period or until the agreed mile-age limit is reached, whichever comes first.

For the assessment of claims from the ŠKODA Ex-tended Warranty, the conditions of the ŠKODA war-ranty described above apply to the appropriate ex-tent.

The vehicle repair under the ŠKODA Extended War-ranty can only be carried out by replacement or re-pair of the defective parts, whereby the ŠKODAservice partner decides on the type of vehicle repair.The vehicle repair takes place in accordance with theavailability of the ŠKODA Service Partners and withina reasonable period of time.

There shall in any case be no entitlement to furtherclaims from the ŠKODA Extended Warranty. In par-ticular, no claim for replacement, no right of with-drawal, no claim to purchase price reduction, or pro-vision of a replacement car for the duration of repairand compensation.

The previously mentioned paint warranty and thewarranty against rust perforation are unaffected bythe ŠKODA extended warranty.

The ŠKODA Extended Warranty does not apply toexterior and interior foils.

Your ŠKODA partner will provide you with informa-tion about the detailed conditions of the ŠKODA Ex-tended Warranty.

The ŠKODA Mobility Warranty and the ŠKODAExtended Warranty are only available in some coun-tries.

188 Technical data and specifications › Rights arising from defective performance, ŠKODA warranties

Index

A

ABS 130ACC 134

Automatic stop and start 134Distance adjustment 135Interruption of cruise control 135

Accident data recorder 185Activation of online services 114Adaptive Cruise Control 134AdBlue

Check 148Functionality 147Indicator light 148Refilling 148Safety 18standard 147tank capacity 148

Air conditioningsee manual air conditioning 50

Air conditioning,see Climatronic 51

Airbag 40Fault 41Installation locations 40Release 40Safety 19Switch off the front passenger airbag 41Turn off airbags 40

Alarm system 26Trailer 26

All-season tyres 158Ambient lighting 48Analogue instrument cluster 54Android Auto

Infotainment Amundsen 107Infotainment Bolero 85Infotainment Swing 71see digital version of the manual 5

Anonymous vehicle data 115Apple CarPlay


armrestbehind 33front 32

Ashtray 174ASR 130Assist systems

Driver assist 130Park Assist 140

Assistance systems

Safety 20Automatic Braking

see Front Assist 131Automatic gearbox 125

shift manually with the shift paddles on thesteering wheel 125

Automatic gearbox modes 125Automatic operation of the Climatronic 51Availability of ŠKODA Connect services 114

B

Batterysee vehicle battery 153

Battery acid 153Boot

Double-sided floor covering 168Rigid cover 168see luggage compartment lid 29Transporting objects safely 20Variable loading floor 169

Boot cover 168Boot lid

Automatic locking 29Manually unlock 30to be set to the highest position 30

Boot LidTroubleshooting 30

brake fluid 129Brake fluid

Safety 18Brakes 129

Handbrake 130Breakdown call 121Bulbs 45Buttons / dials

Steering wheel 11

C

Car adaptationsRecommendations 178

Cargo elements 165Central locking 23

SAFE function 23Central locking button 24Centre console 10Changing gear with a

manual gearbox 124Charging your phone wirelessly 173Check the vehicle before your journey 18Child lock 27Child seat 36

Attachment 39Attachment with a strap 38Grouping 37i-Size 38

189Index

in the passenger seat 36ISOFIX 37, 39Keyword child seat 36Recommended child seats 37Safety instructions 36Securing children properly 19TOP TETHER 39

cigarette lighter 174Cleaning the vehicle

Outside 180Climatronic 51CNG 151COMING HOME 44

attitude 44Functional conditions 44

Compartments 169, 170Compressed natural gas 151Control Centre

Infotainment Amundsen 92Infotainment Bolero 76Infotainment Swing 61

Coolant 145Checking 145Indicator light 146Refilling 145Safety 18Specification 146Temperature display 145Troubleshooting 146

Cooling system 51Crew Protect Assist

see Proactive occupant protection 139Cruise control 133Cup holder 173Cybernetic Security

Infotainment Amundsen 101

D

Data Connection 118Daylight running lights 42Diesel 150

Misfuel protection 150Prescribed fuel 150Refill 150Requirements for refuelling 150Standards 150Tank capacity 150Troubleshooting 150

Digitalinstrument cluster 55

Digital Assistant LauraInfotainment Amundsen 91

Digital instrument cluster 55dimmed headlights 42, 43Distribution of the cargo 127Door

Open / close 27Drive in neutral 125

Driver Alert 139fatigue detection assistant 139

Driver's seat 10Driving data 56Driving with a trailer

Trailer stability assist 131Driving with trailer

Safety 21DSR 130

E

Earth point 154Economical driving style 127EDL 130Electric windows 28

Activation 28Force limitation 27Operation 28Troubleshooting 28

EmergencyEmergency call 21Using jump start cables 154What to do after an accident 22What to do in the event of a fire 22

Emergency call 21Emergency equipment 165

Jack 165Tool kit 165

Emergency wheel 159Safe driving 20

End of protection of personal data 115Engine compartment 11

Coolant 145Engine oil 144flap 144Safety 18Vehicle battery 153Windshield washer fluid 49

Engine compartment lid 144Engine number 182Engine oil 144

Changing 145Checking 144Indicator light 145Refilling 144Safety 18Specification 144

Engine startUsing jump start cables 154

EPC 146Equipment in the luggage compartment 164ESC 130Exhaust control system 147Explanations 6Exterior

lighting 42Extinguisher 165

190 Index

F

Fasteners in the luggage compartment 165First aid kit 165Flashing comfort 43Flooring in the boot 168Fog light 43Fog lights 43Fogged windows 51, 52Folding table 174Freewheel

see Driving in neutral 125Front Assist 131Front seats

with electrical control 31with manual operation 31

Front vehicle area 7Fuel

CNG 151Diesel 150Petrol 148

Fuel filter 147Fuel tank

Opening the flap 147Fuel tank lid 147Full LED headlights 42Fuses 155

In the dash panel 155In the engine compartment 156Replacing 155

G

G-TEC (natural gas vehicle) 151

H

Handbrake 130Hazard warning lights 43Headlights 44

Full LED 42Headlight range control 43

Headrests 32Heated seats 53Heated windscreen 52Heating 50HHC

see hill start assist 130High beam assistant 44, 45High-beam

High-beam assist system 44High-beam assist system 44Hill start assist 130Hook

in the interior 170in the luggage compartment 165

I

i-Size 38Ice scraper 9

Ignition lock 122Images

Infotainment Amundsen 100see digital version of the manual 5

Immobilizer 123In the event of an accident

What to do after an accident 22indicator

see flashing light 42Indicator lights

Foreword 12Overview 12, 14

Info call 120Infotainment Amundsen 88Infotainment Bolero 73Infotainment keyboard

see digital version of the manual 5Infotainment Overview

Infotainment Bolero 73Infotainment Swing 59

Infotainment ScreenInfotainment Amundsen 89Infotainment Bolero 74Infotainment Swing 60

Infotainment SettingsInfotainment Amundsen 88Infotainment Bolero 73Infotainment Swing 59

Infotainment Swing 59Instrument cluster

Analogue 54Instrument cluster display 54

Instrument cluster display 54Interior

lighting 47Interior lighting 47, 48

Ambient lighting 48service 47

Interior mirror 33ISOFIX 39

Retaining eyes 39Use of child seats 37

J

Jump start cables 154Jump-starting 154

K

Key 23Key switch for airbag deactivation 41Key switch for the front passenger airbag

Key switch faulty 41Keyless locking (KESSY) 25Keypad

Infotainment Amundsen 90Infotainment Columbus 75Infotainment Swing 60

Kick-down 125

191Index

L

Lane Assist 136Lane change assistant

see Side Assist 137Lane Keeping Assist

see Lane Assist 136LEAVING HOME 44

attitude 44Functional conditions 44

Leverbuttons 54High beam assistant 45Main beam 42Turn signal 42Windshield wipers and washers 48

Liability for defectssee warranty 187

Light 42automatic switching on and off 42, 43Change bulbs 45Changing bulbs 45Clean headlights 48CORNER function 42dimmed headlights 43Driving in opposite directions 44Fog light 43Full LED headlights 42Hazard warning lights 43Headlight range adjustment 43High-beam assist system 44Indicator light 44Main beam 42Parking light 43service 42Side light 43Troubleshooting 44Turn signal 42, 43

Light Assistsee high beam assistant 44

Light range 43light switch 42lightbulbs

Fog lights - change 46Front flashing light - change 45High beam - change 45Rear flashing light - change 46Reversing light - change 47

lightingInside 47Outside 42

LightingAmbient lighting 48

Limitersee speed limiter 132

Lock 23Locking 25Luggage compartment 164

12 volt socket 164

Fastening elements 165Fastening nets 167Hitch switch 164Net partition 168Storage compartments 164Storage pocket 167

Luggage compartment lid 29manual operation 29

M

Main beam 42Management of online services 118Manual air conditioning 50Manual gearbox 124Manually switch the automatic gearbox

with the selector lever 125MCB 130Media

Infotainment Amundsen 96Infotainment Bolero 79Infotainment Swing 64Playlist 97see digital version of the manual 5

mirrorsee exterior mirror 34see inside mirror 33

MirrorLinkInfotainment Amundsen 107Infotainment Bolero 85Infotainment Swing 71see digital version of the manual 5

Mobile Device ManagementInfotainment Amundsen 101Infotainment Bolero 81Infotainment Swing 67

MSR 130Multi-collision brake

see MCB 130Multimedia holder 174

N

NavigationInfotainment Amundsen 109

Net partition 168Nets 167

O

Oilsee engine oil 144

Online servicesAvailability 114Breakdown call 121Info call 120Remote access to the vehicle 121Shop 120System update 119

Online ServicesData Connection 118

192 Index

Management of online services 118Personalisation 117Service Scheduling 121ŠKODA Connect 113User Management 116User registration and activation of ŠKODA Connect

services 114Vehicle status report 121

P

ParkParking assist 140Parking assistant 141

Park AssistTroubleshooting 143

Park Assist systems 140Parking

Parking the vehicle safely 21Reversing camera 141

Parking aid 140Parking assist 140

Troubleshooting 140Parking assistant 141, 142Parking brake 130Parking light 43ParkPilot

see parking assist 140Passenger seat 10Pedestrian detection 132Personal data 115, 186Personalisation 117Petrol 148

Prescribed fuel 149Prescribed petrol 149Refilling 149Requirements for refuelling 149standards 148Tank capacity 149Troubleshooting 149

Phonebox 173Power steering 33Practical equipment 169, 170

12 volt socket 164, 169, 175Ashtray 174cigarette lighter 174Coat hooks 170Cup holder 173Folding table 174Make-up mirror 169Multimedia holder 174Note holder 169Parking ticket holder 169Spectacle compartment 169Storage bags 170Storage compartment for the umbrella 172Storage compartment under the front seat 172Storage compartments 169, 170

R

Radiator blinds 147Radio


Rear fog light 43Rear seats

fold up 31Rear vehicle area 9Rear view camera 141Rear View Camera

Operation 141Recirculated air mode 51Refill

Diesel 150Windshield washer fluid 49

RefillingAdBlue 148Coolant 145Engine oil 144Petrol 149

Reflective vest 165Remote access to the vehicle 121Restarting Infotainment


Rights arising from defective performancesee warranty 187

Roof rack 175Attaching the carrier 175Roof load 175Safe driving 20

S

Safe driving 20SAFE function

Description 23Turn off 24

SafetyAirbag 19Assistance systems 20Before the journey 17Belt webbing arrangement 19Car adaptations 17Child seat 19Correct seating position 18Driving through water 21Driving with a trailer 21Emergency call 21Engine compartment 18Exiting the vehicle 21Indicator lights 20New brake pads 17New tyres 17Operating fluids 18

193Index

Parking 21Roof rack 20Running in the engine 17safe driving 20Sensors and cameras 17Sockets 18Spare and emergency wheel 20Transporting cargo 20Transporting children 19Transporting objects 20Vehicle battery 18weather conditions 21What to do after an accident 22What to do in the event of a fire 22

Seat belts 35Adjust height 35Automatic belt retractor 35Belt tensioners 35blocked webbing 36Correct arrangement 19Put on and take off 35Reversible belt tensioner 35status display 35

Seats 31fold up 31Heating 53ISOFIX 39Sitting safely 18TOP TETHER 39

Selector lever 125Service event

Interval 178Proof 178Reset information 178Show appointment 178

Service position of the wiper arms 49Service Scheduling 121Service work 178Set the air conditioning fan speed 52Set tyre pressure values 163Shop 120Side assist 137Side Assist 137Side light

see parking light 43Sliding / tilting roof

Electrical operation of the sun protection blind 28SmartLink


Snow chains 159Sockets

12-volt socket 175Safety 18

Spare wheel 159Safe driving 20

Speed limit 58

Resetting 58Settings 58

Speed limit warning 58Setting 58

Speed limiter 132Indicator light 132

Sport Chassis Preset 127Start 123Start the motor 122START-STOP 124Starter button 123Starting instructions 123Steering column lock 33Steering wheel 33

buttons / dial 54, 55Buttons / dials 11Correct position 19heating 53shift manually with the shift paddles on the

steering wheel 125Steering wheel heating 53Stopping the engine 122, 123Storage 169, 170Storage pocket 167Sun protection 29

Activating sunblind operation 29Electrical operation of the sun protection blind 28

Supported media filessee digital version of the manual 5

Switch off the front passenger airbag 41Switch on the low beam automatically 42, 43System

Infotainment Amundsen 88Infotainment Swing 59

System update 119System Update

Infotainment Bolero 73

T

Tank capacityDiesel 150Petrol 149

Technical data 182Technical specifications

Dimensions 183engine specifications 183

TelephoneInfotainment Amundsen 102Infotainment Bolero 82Infotainment Swing 68

Tips for economical driving 127Tiptronic 125Tires

Pressure 162Tool 165Top speed 183TOP TETHER 39

Retaining eyes 39

194 Index

Touch operationInfotainment Amundsen 89Infotainment Bolero 74Infotainment swing 60

Tow hitch 175Tow rope 129Towing a trailer 127Towing eye 128Towing the vehicle 128traffic accident

Data recorder 185Traffic accident

Emergency call 21Traffic Sign Recognition 138Trailer 127

Alarm system 26Coupling and uncoupling 176Permissible load 128Safe driving 21Swing out the tow bar and back in 175

Trailer attachmentVertical load 177

Trailer couplingTroubleshooting 176

Trailer stability assist 131Transport

Transporting objects safely 20Transporting

tow hitch 175Transporting the

roof rack 175TSA

see trailer stability assist 131Turn signal 42, 43Type plate 182Tyre control display 163tyres 157

Breakdown set 161Tyres 158

Overview of the labelling 157Pressure 162Snow chains 159Tyre control display 163Wear indicator 157

U

Umbrella 172Unlock 23Unlocking 25Update Infotainment


Updating the system and the Infotainment systemsee digital version of the manual 5

USB 169, 170User Management 116User registration 114

V

Variable loading floor in the boot 169Vehicle battery 153

Charging 153Checking the condition 153Discharge protection 153Disconnecting and connecting 154Error 153Safety 18

Vehicle cleaninginterior space 179

Vehicle dimensions 183Vehicle driving mode 126

Eco 126Individual 126Normal 126Sport 126

Vehicle height 183Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 182Vehicle length 183Vehicle status 58Vehicle status report 121Vehicle width 183Vest

see reflective vest 165VIN

see vehicle identification number 182Virtual cockpit

see digital instrument cluster 55Voice control

Infotainment Amundsen 91

W

Warning triangle 165Warranty 187

Mobility Warranty 188Optional Extended Warranty 188Rights arising from defective performance 187Warranty for new cars 187

Waste bin 174Water in the fuel filter 147Weight 182wheels 157Wheels

Breakdown 158Change 160Cover caps of the screws 163Full wheel cover 163Overview of tyre labelling 157Pressure change 158Spare wheel and emergency spare wheel 159Tyre control display 163Tyre pressure 162Wear indicator 157

Wi-FiInfotainment Amundsen 105Infotainment Bolero 85Infotainment Swing 70

195Index

see digital version of the manual 5window

mechanical operation 27Window 28

heating 52Windshield washer

see windscreen wipers and washers 48Windshield washer fluid

how is the wash water refilled 49Level too low 49

Windshield wipers and washers 48Add windshield washer fluid 49automatic rear window wiper 49automatic wiping 49Fold down the wiper arms 49Replace the windscreen wiper blade 50Windscreen washer fluid level too low 49

Wing mirror 34Winter tyres 158

X

XDL + 130

196 Index

owner´s manual · 2020. 7. 14. · table of contents. 1 vehicle owner 5 about the owner's...

Documents